Free Articles Database

What are so special about Designer Handbags?

Wed, 25 Aug 2010 05:00:00 GMT

A Prada Handbags represent quality and elegance combined together. Initially they were designed to be just beautiful but they also do their work as bags. Actually Prada Handbags can be your bag for everyday use, to say literally, but they will still look stylish. Prada bags are very durable bags; did you ever see how your baggage is treated during its stay in airport? But Prada bags always emerge from such situation as new as they were prior to your trip.

Superior quality. To check the quality of preferred Prada Handbag, look at its stitching. Prada Handbags are handmade and therefore it is stitched with special thread by hands what makes it much more durable than other bags. You won't find ripped lining or burst seams on Prada Handbags.

Perfect style. Prada Handbags are designed by top experts who literally put a life and all of their creativity into them. And those experts take into account not only the latest fashion trends but they tend to make Prada Handbags as much durable as it possible.

Prada handbags last long time. Prada Handbags never go out of style. Be sure that if you have handbag bought about 10 years ago, you may still be confident that it looks great! How many trade marks of handbags with such lifespan you can name? The main reason why Prada Handbags are last above the time is that they are made passing all high fashion standards and to be as durable as possible.

Only quality materials are used when Prada Handbags are being created — superior grade leather, High quality Prada microfiber material and some Prada bags has leather with microfiber combined together. Moreover, even thread that used for stitching is not common industrial thread. Prada works only with suppliers that understand their needs and specifications, with those who know what is needed to create perfect purse. Prada handbags are mostly made by hand, because those materials are too expensive to rely on machine.

You won't leave store without a bag. Because shops with Prada Handbags are actually one-stop stores of bags. If you get to the Prada store, you will definitely buy a purse for everyday use, clutch for the evening occasion or travel bag in one place. Everyone, who understands in a High Fashion, have several Prada bags for all occasions.
So, if you are ready for another High Fashion European Designer Handbag, Prada handbags would one of your best choices.

Fendi handbags or purses are trendy accessory among fashionable consumers. Fendi handbags are distributed among only authorized and licensed resellers You have to be aware, because many fake manufacturers are imitating authentic Fendi handbags design and supply markets with them. Bear in mind that Fendi produce only limintd edition of handbags. Genuine Fendi Handbags are always made of high quality and professional materials following all rules of craftsmanship. So if you choice is Fendi handbags you have to know how to discern the original production prior to shopping around.

Genuine Fendi handbags have a serial number on it. You can find serial number located inside the purse. Most of counterfit Fendi handbags do not have such number. And some Fendi handbags have even more than one number.

Check the material of the handbag as well. The handles of genuine Fendi handbags are always made of leather. You can spot the fake Fendi purse by finding synthetic leather or vinyl among materials.

Fake Fendi handbags have wry stitches. Crooked stitches can be observed even from outside the purse Fendi handbags with crooked stitches look just not fine and have many bulge areas. Genuine bags made professionally by best craftsman, and have straight stitches.

Fendi handbags have square buckles. If the buckles have other shapes then consider that it as possible fake and move along.

Fendi handbags have strict quality control and bad purses are not to be sent to the market and stores. Zippers should match the color of the bag itself. The stitches should be even and regular. You if you see or feel that something is not right, move along and avoid buying this bag.

You can find Fendi handbags in online stores and in boutiques. Be careful, some stores online never state that their Fendi bags is genuine. You better avoid those stores, which never give you a warranty about authenticity of the handbags they sell. We recommend to by only on reputable online stores and avoid dubious ones. Of course you can read some user reviews to determine whether purses are good, but those reviews can be written by website creators as well. Good luck in choosing good Fendi handbag.

Please see our collection of Authentic Prada Handbags like Prada BN1407 Gauffre leather, Prada BR3787 Deerskin Leather or Prada br2703 Calf Leather.

2010-08-25 Illustrations

Internet marketing is not only corporate website

Tue, 13 Oct 2009 05:00:00 GMT

The well-done corporate site creation is a basic option but not unique issue to the Internet marketing. The question, such as "why only a few people visit our site", is common even for well-done web sites owners.
The problem is:
medium sized company wish operated online better to keep buyers loyalty or attract new clients in business to business sector. Its marketing budget is limited and this firm can't afford high cost. A name of a company and its brands aren't widespread. For example, you let out the woodworking machinery, well-known only within a narrow circle of consumers.
Commercial firms have a standard website's structure, which answers the the following questions: Where is this company from? What are the company's products or services? How can I get in contact with the company? Which othercustomers does this firm have? and some more.
The main parts of the site consist of: "About Us", "Contact Us", "Our Products/Our services", "Our clients" and so on. It is possible to add special service such as "Searching" and etc.
From the common side, such site is informed enought. Why doesn't it work well?
Corporate site is not a God
The first reason is corporate name.
The traffic to the corporate resourse can be equal to 0 because of company name. The visitors can open a webpage by typing an address directly. For well-known brands it isn't a barrier sony.Com. These Internet resourses have huge number of daily visitors. And what if corporate site address is woodmanufacturer.Lv?
The 2 reason is absence in searching sites.
Searching engines are the main source of target audience to the corporate page. Commercial site advancement consists of registration in searching engines and on b2b marketplace. By typing in the search line �electrical equipment and supplies�, user enter your page.
This easy way|It is the first step] of initial advancement. After two or three months work can provide from 15 to 150 visits per day. But it is not enough.
Do not concentrate on "free of charge only": paid registration on the most popular [business portals, banners, which urgency to specialized resources increases. Banner's cost depends on many factors: size, quantity of displays for a particular period of time and some more .
Option number one: purchase a vip place in a list of results. The top place belongs to the site which has paid.
Competitive option number 2: purchase targeting displays in the searching engines, then an information blog is shown after corresponding inquiries. As an example, when you type "order an office furniture" a you will see an information blog. It can be: company-manufacturer or supplier of corresponding goods.
Secret number three: business forums. You can learn new information. The main thing is to understand exactly which audience you want to target.

2009-10-13 Illustrations

Candida And Probiotics

Sun, 12 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

In my opinion, this is one of the world's most powerful, secret remedies for any illness! I strongly believe that if we all drank the amount of water our bodies need, we would see a great reduction in all types of sicknesses. Most doctors say that we should drink at least eight 8-oz. glasses of water daily, but many people need even more than that. I have found that simply drinking enough water greatly reduces my likelihood for getting a yeast infection. Because I am drinking more water, and subsequently urinating more frequently, my body is able to flush out the sugars that feed the yeast. Candida infections in infants and adults may become visible in different ways; oral Candidiasis (or thrush) is exhibited by thick, white patches on top of a red base and may appear on any area inside the mouth. Bleeding on the underlying tissue occurs if these white patches are wiped away. Without the white coating this infection makes the tongue appear to be red in color. Oral thrush is painful and can contribute to eating disorders. Candida Albicans is a destructive yeast infection that begins in the digestive system and little by little spreads to other parts of the body. Candida is present in all of us not long after birth. Typically, this yeast remain in a healthful balance with the other bacteria and yeasts within the intestinal tract. Under certain conditions, such as excessive stress, lowered immunity or the long-term use of steroids, the candida yeast can multiply, thus disrupting the gastrointestinal "terrain". Candida overgrowth may also be a consequence of antibiotic treatment, as antibiotics not only kill pathogens but also a large number of those bacteria that are part of a healthy gastrointestinal flora. With the depletion of the beneficial protective flora in the intestinal tract and a weakened immune response, this opportunistic yeast can then spread and multiply beyond the intestinal tract affecting every organ in the body. You wish to get rid of yeast infection permanently, but there are a lot of cases that yeast infection keeps coming back even with the use of prescribed medicines and you find your self using products after products which you thought could bring you permanent relief. Some may recommend boric acid as a remedy and you must be warned that it is a toxic substance and should not be taken as a remedy to get rid of yeast infection because it is very harmful and may cause deaths. If you find yourself searching for a permanent way on how to get rid of yeast infection, you must attack the root cause and not the symptoms. Your yeast infection keeps coming back because you just treated the symptoms and not the root cause and the infection is still there waiting to be triggered again and again. Vaginal Yeast infection in women is very common. Yeasts or Candida fungus are minute organisms that live in small numbers on human body. Yeast infection occurs when the number of these organisms increases beyond a certain level. Typically, the acidity in the vagina keeps the level of yeast low. But with the drop in the acidity level due to various conditions like menstruation period, pregnancy, diabetes or birth control pills, yeast grows and causes the infection. This type of treatment for your Candida yeast infection may seem a good solution, but all drugs have unpleasant and unwanted side effects. The anaesthetic gel may cause irritation and the steroid creams may cause the thinning of the vaginal walls. Antibiotics are usually weakening your immune system and antifungal drugs may cause a burning feeling to the affected area. But the anti-protozoal medicines can make you lose your appetite and even have nausea sensation. Another Candida treatment, the amityptiline may make you experience dry mouth, blurred vision and even fainting. For women who have recurring yeast infections, going to the pharmacy to purchase an over-the-counter treatment is not only time-consuming, but can prove to be quite expensive. The best way to treat a yeast infection is to deal with the root cause of the problem. This is where natural remedies come in. If you want a long term, more permanent solution, go natural!

2006-02-12 Illustrations

Period Pain

Sun, 12 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Period pain As much as this is important for women to know guys should be aware of this also. Why? You may ask? Because you may have to look after your or someone else's daughter one day. Another reason may be that you just want to love your wife or girlfriend and knowing some simple keys will mean the difference between peace and suffering for her. What is period pain? Period pain is what a female may experience when she has her menstrual cycle. The pain can come before or during her menstrual cycle and the intensity can vary from person to person. The pain may be slight cramps or it can be so debilitating she may have to check into a hospital. Does every woman experience period pain? No, and they shouldn't! Most women I speak with have a belief that period pain is a phenomenon that all women go through but this is far from the truth. Period pain is a symptom of your body being out of balance and not a natural part of the menstrual cycle. Women should not experience any pain at all with their period whether it is breast tenderness, low abdomen cramps or any other pain. What actually happens every month? The menstrual cycle is a shedding of the uterus wall and it should happen without pain. Every month a woman's uterus creates a lining of blood vessels to prepare a home for the anticipated fertilized egg. If a woman becomes pregnant the egg will feed off the wall of blood until a developed baby has grown. If pregnancy does not occur the uterus will shred the lining and this is what is called your menstrual cycle or period. This process should be pain free but for a lot of women its not. Why pain occurs. In Chinese medicine we talk about liver Qi stagnation, cold in the lower Jiao, cold in the channels, blood deficiency and stagnation of blood. These are all terms that will be the reason why a woman will experience period pain. Simply put, if the blood or energy is not flowing freely around the uterus a women will experience pain. The Liver organ is the main culprit The Livers job is to smoothly circulate energy (Qi) and blood around the body. It is also responsible for the suppleness of muscle and tendons, lubricated eyes and the ability to see as well as preparing a fertile ground within the uterus for a baby to grow. When the Liver energy is out of balance we will experience liver Qi stagnation and blood stagnation. And this takes us to why a woman will experience period pain. Liver Qi stagnation is caused usually by stress, the liver becomes heated and aggravated by emotional turmoil and then the Liver Qi will stagnate giving the body pain. Qi stagnation will inturn stagnate blood flow and then a stabbing type pain will be felt. To rectify this problem you could have acupuncture, massage if the symptoms are not to bad and Chinese herbs. Cold in the lower Jiao or channels If you could imagine a lake flowing nicely just before the cold snap of winter and then all of a sudden it freezes. "Well", this is something like what happens with the blood that circulates around the uterus when it's invaded by cold or cold gets into the acupuncture channels. When cold invades the body your blood will stagnate and this will give you very severe cramping. The above symptoms are the main reasons why a woman will experience period pain. Other reasons may be dampness, meaning there is a type of mouldy by product developed in your body due to digestive system weakness and this prevents the blood from circulating. And another reason may be endometriosis. Period pain can be prevented and can be treated without going on the pill or any other chemical intervention. If you have cold the pain will be stabbing, for this drink ginger tea with a little honey. If there is a cramping sensation this is liver Qi stagnation and in this case do something relaxing like walking in the park and look at the green grass and trees. Green soothes the liver. Also meditation and yoga Nidra will help ease tension. The gym is not recommended it is stressful on the body and will only make the pain worse. And if you have blood stagnation you can do both. The warmth of the ginger will help move the blood and relaxation will help free up any Qi stagnation. Many women experience tiredness and dizziness after their period and this is because of lack of blood and the body's inability to replenish the blood lost after a period. This subject will be spoken more about in another BOYF news letter. Until next time, Take care. Kind regards, Scott Cansdell www.backonyourfeet.com.au

2006-02-12 Illustrations

Yeast Infection Treatment Depends Upon Severity of Symptoms

Sun, 12 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

The treatment for yeast infection varies from person to person. The first time a woman has symptoms, she should definitely see a doctor to develop a treatment plan. The reason is that there are other possible causes for vaginal discharge and itching. Yeast infection symptoms are similar to those of gonorrhea or immune system disorders. There are several factors that you and your doctor should consider when selecting among the many treatment options. One important issue is the difference between vaginal medications like Monistat, Gyne-Lotrimin and Terazol and the oral medication Diflucan. The oral drug goes through the bloodstream and then gets to the infected tissues of the vaginal area. The locally applied drugs are a little different. Those are applied at the site of the infection and treat the fungus locally, as if it was a topical skin infection, which essentially it is. With oral treatment you are exposing your whole body to the drug while with the topical treatment you are only exposing the affected area to the drug. The intravaginal medications usually have very few side effects and are generally well-tolerated. Side effects of oral medications include nausea, abdominal cramps and bloating. Topical therapy can last anywhere from one to seven days. The oral therapy is usually a one time dose. The right treatment for yeast infections usually depends upon the severity of the symptoms. In addition to antifungal medications to get rid of the yeast infections, many people use topical preparations, like Vagisil, to help relieve the itching. Treatment for symptoms of yeast infections sometimes includes options that are not universally recommended by physicians. Some people report substantial relief form itching when they use medicated gold bond powder applied directly to the vulva. Some women use a paste made of slippery elm and a little water and apply this to the vulva. Others soak a cotton pad in aloe vera juice and apply it to the vulva. Some people eat yogurt or drink buttermilk every day to increase the presence of healthy bacteria in their bodies. Some recommend drinking cranberry juice every day or taking enteric-coated acidophilus pearls to help increase the amount of "good" bacteria in your system. These are tablets are readily available at most health food stores. Be sure to talk to your doctor before you self-medicate for yeast infections. Your doctor can help you decide on the best yeast infection treatment for you.

2006-02-12 Illustrations

Healthy Tips

Sun, 12 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Enjoying life to the fullest and aging gracefully without the burden of disease depends primarily on the healthy choices we make for our bodies TODAY.

Here are tips that will aid you lengthen your "good" years:

Eat Breakfast
Research suggests that eating breakfast early in the day may reduce the risk of weight gain and perhaps heart disease and diabetes.

Avoid fats and carbs from items like sugar, potatoes, and white bread. Choose foods that are heart-healthy and include fruits, whole-grain cereals, bread, reduced-fat cheese, and low fat or skim milk.

Beat the Sugar High
For those that have a sweet tooth, staying away from sugar is a constant struggle. On one hand it is just so much easier and faster to grab that doughnut on the way to the office! On the other hand, sugar becomes like an addiction that is very hard to break.

If you happen to like sugar a little more than you should and you need that sugar fix each day, an enormous way to get control and to curb the sugar craving is by using a natural substance called 5-HTP. You can find it in most any natural health food store. (5-hydroxytryptophan)

There are no magic pill for weight loss, but if appetite, and not willpower, is your downfall, then 5-HTP may do the trick.

5-HTP is a direct precursor to "serotonin". It causes feelings of fullness and eliminates cravings for carbohydrates and balances the serotonin levels in your brain. This safe, effective herbal compound can also lift your spirits, which makes it great for mood swings, anxiety and depression. The recommended dosage is 50-100 mgs per day.

Rotate Your Exercise Routine
Varying your exercise routine can help slow down the aging process. By changing routines you avoid boredom, and most importantly the danger of injury caused by overusing a particular muscle, bone, or joint.

Try rotating between aerobic exercises such as walking, dancing, jogging, swimming, cycling, and skating.

Add strength training exercises a couple of times a week and gently stretch your muscles at least two or three times a week to help prevent weakness, stiffness, bone loss, and falls.

Take Charge!
Taking charge of your own medical history and lifestyle is your right! You don't have to become Dr. Know-it-all, but researching specific areas of health that pertain to your own conditions is a smart move.

Researching the natural remedies in addition to what your doctor advises giving you more choices, as well as natural healing options. Getting a second opinion from additional health care professionals is important as well.

You have the right to all your medical records and eyeglass or contact lens prescriptions. You are entitled to all copies of lab results, immunization records, and imaging studies. Keep them filed at home in an organized manner. Keep a record of up-to-date medications and doses for your files as well as carrying this list with you at all times.

By feeding your body and mind the best foods and nutrients possible not only will you have more energy, your body will be stronger and your mind sharper. The tips in this report are the first steps on the route toward a healthier life.

Healthy Tips

2006-02-12 Illustrations

10 Great Lens Care Tips

Sun, 12 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Contact lenses can change the way you see the world. Using lenses drastically alters your vision and appearance. But for maintaining the health of your eyes and protecting your vision you need to care for your lenses. Protein deposits or fungal growth can prove detrimental to your eyes.

Once you have had your eyes checked by the doctor and ordered your lenses, request your eye care professional to instruct you on how to care for your lenses. Educate yourself by reading articles and tips on web sites devoted to the care of vision health. Make a list of doubts you want to clear and find out answers to the questions.

Many lens providers give a detailed booklet along with the lenses. Read the booklet thoroughly and understand what needs to be done. Remember, lens care is not standard different kinds have a different regimen. So, the care required would depend on whether your lenses are daily wear, disposables, soft lenses, hard lenses, or continuous wear. Daily wear lenses must be removed at the end of the day, continuous wear lenses at the end of six days and disposable lenses must be discarded.

Basically lens care means:

1. Washing your hands thoroughly with mild soap, then rinsing the hands well and drying with a lint free towel before handling the lenses. Your hands must be free of pollutants and foreign bodies at all times. Never use cold cream, cosmetics, face powder or lotions just before handling the lenses.

2. Always handle lenses with your fingertips. Keep fingernails short and well filed.

3. After removal, the lenses must be cleaned, rinsed, and disinfected well. The solutions used must be approved by the FDA and manufactured by reputable companies. Never compromise on quality, remember you must protect your eyes. Clean lenses immediately after you remove them from the eyes.

4. The lens care solution must be fresh not expired and follow carefully the chemical system of sterilization.

5. For rewetting lenses only use recommended solutions not saliva or any other alternative. Never lick your lens or use tap water.

6. Fix your routine and follow it carefully. Remove lens 1, clean, rinse, disinfect and then place in its chamber in the lens storage case. Then repeat procedure for lens 2.

7. Lenses should always be completely immersed in disinfecting solution when not in use. Never leave lenses exposed to dust or air.

8. Learn the correct method of storing lenses.

9. If recommended use a lubricating solution while the lenses are in use. This will give comfort.

10. If you experience stickiness, discomfort, or any other problem immediately consult your doctor and replace the lenses. No lens with bacterial or fungal growth should ever be worn.

If you experience any irritation from household cleaning fluids, gardening solutions, flying particles, or chemicals rinse your eyes well with tap water and go immediately to the doctor's clinic or hospital. Treatment must not be delayed.

2006-02-12 Illustrations

Ovarian Cancer — Don't Ignore the Warning Signs

Sun, 12 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Around 1.5 percent of women are likely to develop ovarian cancer at some stage of their life. It is less common than breast cancer but is considered as the most serious and fatal of all gynecological cancers. The reason for this is that the cancer is usually advanced before it is diagnosed, making treatment difficult. The ovaries cannot be easily examined and, because the warning signs are unclear, late diagnosis is common. Because of the lack of screening tests available, it is imperative to know the early symptoms and the possible risk factors. Understanding ovarian cancer The ovaries are two small organs that are a part of the female reproductive system and they are situated each side of the uterus. These ovaries contain germ cells that become eggs which are released when the woman menstruates. They also produce estrogen and progesterone, the hormones that adjust the menstrual cycle and have an effect on the growth of breasts and body hair as well as affecting the development of the female body shape. What types of tumors are there? This normally happens in an organised manner but occasionally they grow abnormally and form a growth that we know as a tumor. This tumor may be benign or it may be malignant. If it is benign, it is not cancerous and does not spread to other parts of the body. A malignant tumor, on the other hand, is cancerous and will often spread, making mestastases or secondary cancers. Ovarian cancer is malignant and can occur in either one or both of the ovaries. There are three main groups that are related to the cells where the cancer starts. Epithelial ovarian cancer, as its name implies, grows in the epithelium which is the surface of the ovary. It is the most common and accounts for around 90 percent of ovarian cancer. It mainly affects post menopausal women. Another kind of epithelial tumor is a borderline tumor which grows much more slowly than its regular counterpart. These can normally be removed successfully even if diagnosed at an advanced stage. There is a very rare form of ovarian cancer called germ cell ovarian cancer that starts in the cells that develop into eggs. This only accounts for about 5 percent of ovarian cancers and usually occurs only in women under 30. The other five percent of ovarian cancers are generally sex-chord stromal cell ovarian cancer that affects the ovary cells responsible for female hormones. It can affect women of all ages. Who is at risk of getting ovarian cancer? The cause of ovarian cancer is unknown but there are some risk factors that have been identified through research. Although having these risk factors may increase your chances of developing ovarian cancer, they do not mean that you will necessarily get the disease. However, knowledge of these risk factors can be helpful. If you are concerned by having any of these risk factors, it is important to talk to your healthcare professional. Factors that may increase your risk of ovarian cancer include: Age- Around 90 percent of ovarian cancers affect women over 40. Cultural background - Caucasian women in western society have higher rates of ovarian cancer than African or Asian women. Number of pregnancies — Women who have never been pregnant appear to have a higher risk of ovarian cancer. Family history - Between 5 and 10% of ovarian cancers are genetic. Researchers believe that the genes responsible for breast cancer (BRCA1 and BRCA2) are involved in almost all cases of familial ovarian cancer as well as familial breast cancer. It is also thought that these same damaged genes may be responsible for some endometrial and colon cancers. If you are genetically predisposed to any ovarian, breast, endometrial or colon cancers, you may have an increased risk of getting ovarian cancer. Infertility and taking fertility drugs — Women who have had fertility drugs may be at a higher risk although infertility itself is a risk factor so this cannot be taken as a clear indication. Hormone Replacement Therapy — The use of estrogen only HRT which is usually when you have had a hysterectomy, has been identified as a possible risk factor for ovarian cancer, particularly if you have been on this therapy for over ten years. Lifestyle factors — Obesity is a risk factor associated with ovarian cancer as is a diet that is high in fat. Can I reduce the risk of ovarian cancer? Currently, there are no known procedures to prevent or detect early ovarian cancer but there are ways to reduce the risks. Some of these are: Oral contraceptives - Research has found that the use of oral contraceptives can cut the risk of ovarian cancer by up to 60 percent if taken for a period of five years during your life. Pregnancy and breastfeeding — Breastfeeding delays ovulation after childbirth and therefore decreases your risk of ovarian cancer. However, there is no guarantee that breastfeeding will stop you from developing ovarian cancer. Enjoy a low fat diet — A high fat diet has been identified as a risk factor in ovarian cancer. Therefore, it makes sense to stick to a low fat diet with lots of fresh fruit and vegetables. Tubal ligation or hysterectomy — These operations are only performed with a valid medical reason but it is believed that they both reduce the risk of ovarian cancer. People with a strong family history of ovarian cancer may opt to speak to a genetic counselor that can assess whether you are at risk of developing the disease. If your family history suggests the damaged genes associated with ovarian, breast, endometrial, or colon cancer, it may be wise to have genetic testing. If these tests show the damaged BRCA1 or BRCA2 genes, you may be refe.rred to a gynecological oncologist to consider ways to reduce your risk. Early symptoms of ovarian cancer Because there is no screening test available for ovarian cancer, it is recommended that you have a regular pelvic vaginal checkup to see if there are any changes in your ovaries. It is also vital that you consult your healthcare specialist if you notice any possible signs of this illness. Because the symptoms are often common to many other medical conditions, diagnosis of ovarian cancer can be difficult However, if you have any of the following symptoms that are unusual for you and that persist for more than a week, see your doctor without delay. Some symptoms of ovarian cancer may include: Stomach discomfort of pain in the pelvic area Persistent nausea or wind. Feeling constantly bloated or 'full'. Unexplained weight gain. Loss of appetite or unexplained weight loss Bowel changes Frequency or urgency in urination Lethargy. Pain during intercourse. Unexplained vaginal bleeding. Sometimes, ovarian cancers are wrongly diagnosed as irritable bowel syndrome or menopause so if you are concerned, ask to be referred to a gynecological oncologist who can order tests to rule out ovarian cancer. It is rare that these symptoms will be ovarian cancer but if it is, early detection gives an excellent chance of survival. Diagnosing ovarian cancer If your doctor suspects ovarian cancer, you will be referred to a gynecological oncologist who will organize tests which may include any or all of the following: An internal pelvic examination. Blood tests Chest and stomach x-rays. A barium enema to rule out bowel problems Ultrasound scans If the results show a likelihood of ovarian cancer, you will be recommended to have an operation to confirm the diagnosis (none of the abovementioned tests can be sure). During the operation, if the surgeon finds ovarian cancer, they will normally remove the cancer as well as the ovaries. It is important to understand before the surgery that this may happen so learn all you can about your illness and the outcomes before the operation. Anne Wolski has worked in the health and welfare industry for more than 30 years. She is a co-director of http://www.magnetic-health-online.com and http://www.betterhealthshoppe.com which are both information portals with many interesting medical articles. She is also an associate of http://www.timzbiz.com which features many articles on internet marketing and resources.

2006-02-12 Illustrations

Osteoporosis And The Facts

Sun, 12 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Osteoporosis is called the silent thief because you do not experience any symptoms, the first time you know about it is when a bone snaps unexpectedly. Osteoporosis means "porous bones" and it is a condition where the skeleton becomes very fragile and the bones break easily. Simple things can cause a bone to break, such as stepping off a curb, sneezing, being hugged or even bending down to pick something up. Breakages are mainly in the hips, spine and wrist and effects mainly women but men can have it as well.

Nowadays you can be tested to see what your bone mass is like and because of more knowledge you can delay the onset of osteoporosis with diet and exercise earlier in your life.

You might think that the skeleton does nothing else but holds you up but it is every bit as dynamic as other tissues, bone responds to the pull of muscles and gravity, repairs itself, and constantly renews itself. The skeleton also protects the internal organs, as well as allowing you to move about.

After the age of 30, the bone starts to breakdown and outpaces formation. The volume of the bone remains the same, but it's density declines.

Calcium intake is important to build bone but you also need vitamin D to help the body absorb the calcium. Vitamin D is produced by the skin in sunlight or can be found in many foods, such as in milk products and many breakfast cereals. It has also been found that Magnesium and Vitamin K can also assist in the reduction of bone loss. Vitamin K can be found in greens, whereas Magnesium is found in small quantities in a variety of foods, so eating a varied, healthy diet should provide what you require.

A lifelong habit of weight-bearing exercise, such as walking or biking, will also help build and maintain strong bones. The greatest benefit as you grow older is that physical fitness reduces the risk of fracture, because it gives you better balance, muscle strength, and agility, making falls less likely. Exercise also provides many other life-enhancing psychological and cardiovascular benefits.

You don't have to do too much, to get the most benefit from exercise. It is suggested that 30 minutes brisk walking five days a week is all you need. Add in a little weightlifting, and that's even better. The reason behind this recommendation is that the flexing of bones during exercise is thought to prompt the body to lay down more calcium in the bones. It's always smart to ask your doctor before starting a new exercise program, especially if you already have osteoporosis or other health problems.

It is important to ensure that when exercising the body has enough nutrients to build muscle otherwise minerals could be leeched from the bone making the bone more susceptible to osteoporosis. It is therefore important that you do not exercise on an empty stomach.

Osteoporosis is a problem that can affect anyone in their later years and you should do all that you can to keep your bones strong.

2006-02-12 Illustrations

Burn Fat fast

Sun, 12 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

The Secret of Negative Calories Food FAT IS A SILENT KILLER! Can you beat it ? The answer is: !! YES!! The fact is: obesity can cause severe health problems like high blood pressure and diabetes ... We need to take a different approach to loosing weight than we have being doing in the past. Forget old-fashioned diets that don't really give you the long-lasting results you seek. They are very good reasons why they do not work well. Some of the calories in the foods you eat are burned off just to digest, so the the net amount of calories is actually less than the amount contained in the food. This process has several names: - Diarety-induced thermogenesis - Specific dynamic actiom of food - Thermic effect of food ... You may have heard of the expression, "Negative calories", this refers to certain foods which have a thermic effect and a low colorie density. This is almost impossible for these food to be stored as fat because most of these calories are burned off just to be digest them. The negative calories foods have so few calories that you can burn up more calories in preparing cooking, chewing and digesting them than they impart. The ingestion of these foods increases the metabolic rate of the body, which, in turn draws excess calories from the body's fat deposit. Frequently Asked Questions:Fact: Foods that actually melt down fat were discovered by nutritionist physicians during their search for healthier foods. When you add these type of foods to your normal diet, you lose weight but you also lower and normalize your cholesterol rate. This always contributes to your health. Q: How many pounds can you lose per week? A: If you are less than 20 pounds overweight, you can lose an average of 5-8 pounds in the first week, and 3-4 pounds in the subsequent weeks.If you are more than 20 pounds overweight, you will lose weight even more quickly. Some people with more than 40 pounds to lose have lost up to 12 pounds in the first week. Q: I have tried bean pod capsules, other methods, other diets, and nothing has helped me lose weight yet. Why will it be different with this? A: Because you will burn away more calories than you absorb. Everyone who has tried it has lost weight, there is no reason that it would work for everyone else and not for you! Key Benefits - No pills to take! - The weight loss plan you are going to buy, is rapid and efficient at fat burning. - The secret is that you will burn more calories than you take in. - Easy to follow instructions and appetizing tips on how you can enjoy fat-controlled meals! If you want to receive this Negative Calorie Food E-book. Just drop me an email at patbeaufay@yahoo.co.uk As well don't forget to go to the Burn the Fat and Feed the Muscle site and to order the Burn the Fat and Feed the Muscle E-Book or first to request this Free Report with very honest information about this program and about the diet industry with full huge LIKEHOODS (LIES) and PLEDGES (PROMISES) Click therefore on this link for the best tool I have found in my quest for health and fitness!! http://hop.clickbank.net/hop.cgi?patbeaufay/burnthefat FREE! SIZZLING HOT BRAND NEW 40-PAGE REVEAL ... HOW TO INCINIRATE FAT FAST SO YOU CAN START SEEING YOUR ABS !!! SKYROCKET YOUR FAT LOSS SUCCESS !!! If you want to know what to do and what kind of food that burn the fat please visit the site for more information on burn fat fast and burn the fat feed the muscle burn the fat feed the muscle

2006-02-12 Illustrations

Women?s Health Blogs - Adventures In The Blogsphere

Sun, 12 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Writing, as a form of therapy, is as old as ink itself. Universally understood as a transformative process, the simple act of putting pen to page can effectively jump start personal growth and healing.

Over the years I?ve had more than a handful of sessions on a therapist?s couch sorting through the baggage I?ve built, bought, borrowed and inherited in my 48 years. Without exception, each qualified practitioner proposed the following recommendation: start and keep a daily journal.

Seems much angst and worry can be worked through with pen and paper. Yet for reasons that can only be explained as part of ?my personal charm,? my journal keeping would start and lapse in record time. Nevertheless, I knew the writing process to be powerful despite my inability to be consistent. Once, after managing to hold my journaling nose to the grindstone for 13 weeks, I leapt tall buildings made of artist block and landed on the other side, with renewed energy and fabulous paid work.

And yet, despite my success, I quickly discontinued putting my thoughts on paper.

Miraculously, last spring, my lifelong writing inertia evaporated with the click of a computer button. As easy as one, two, three, I started my own on-line journal, more commonly known as a blog.

A blog is a web log comprised of a series of posts, about the author?s choice of subject, from professional to personal. Every entry is date and time stamped as they are published, giving the material the feel of a traditional diary.

Blog procedure is exceedingly simple and free for anyone with access to a computer. I type my thoughts, press the publish toggle and instantly my rants and raves go live on the World Wide Web. There is no middle person, web mistress, publisher or editor to be found. Blog control post, pace and frequency is in the blogger?s hands.

However, there is one distinct motivating difference between your traditional hard copy diary hidden away, under the bed, and your blog. Blogging offers a possible audience.

My first thought was to use a blog to share the unusual adventure of my Calendar Girl life and draw attention to the Breast of Canada project. It took no time to realize that a following of fans was a big buzz, injecting tremendous energy into the somewhat relentless process of making, marketing and moving 3000 calendars every year.

My second blog took on a digest format offering alternative breast related news that was a simple by-product of my role of publisher.

Blog number three was born thanks to a peri-menopausal fit of memory and hair loss. Fondly called ?My Menopause Blog, How to Punctuate Life Without a Period,? This effort truly fits the therapeutic writing model and contributes enormously to my state of mind.

Writing publicly about my petulant period, in real time, is like inviting a bunch of menopausal women over for tea and a heart-to-heart. Not surprising, scaling the dome of silence surrounding menopause, and talking above a whisper about ?The Pause? resonates deeply with women readers.

Shooting from the hip and funny bone, I share my findings of remedies, attitude shifts and my belief that menopause is not a disease. Thinking broadens with each entry; confidence grows as does understanding and a liberated sense of ageing. My Menopause Blog is like a cyber red tent for anyone interested in musing on maturity.

Eventually, curiosity lead to an on-line exploration of blog networks, blog rolls and search engines to see if other women were writing about their lives, health and well being.

Turns out, they are. Thousands of blogs are written by new moms, freshly divorced, empty nesters, the menopausal, survivors of cancer, stay at home parents, clinically depressed and chronically curious. Photos are up-loaded. Advice is sought. Human contact is collected by way of comments that reader?s leave like cyber hugs. There?s a whole lot of contact being made between people separated by geography, but connected by circumstance.

Clever blog names are common with blog owners. Ellie at This is My Body, This is My Blood offers a hilarious window into her peri-menopausal pity party. ?I'm Out of Estrogen and It's Not Pretty? provides a window into Victoria?s menopausal life. A group blog that I randomly come across claims: ?Running this blog is about 50,000 times cheaper than a good therapist.?

This new cyber kid on the block follows a blogger code of conduct that creates a safe, encouraging and friendly zone where you can let yourself hang out, be human and be heard. Not everyone writes like a professional, although there are excellent pro bloggers leading many a parade of readers. Countless circles of similarly focused, differently skilled people gather in and share the Blogosphere.

My greatest blogging benefit comes from my daily commitment to write just like the psychologists suggested. I clear my head, sort out my hormone-scattered feelings, get cheered on and remind myself that life is dynamic. Indeed, the cyber trail documentation of my menopausal mood swings is time stamped proof.

2006-02-12 Illustrations

What Is Endometriosis?

Sun, 12 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

What is endometriosis? Endometriosis is one of those diseases that you?ve probably heard the name of before, but aren?t really sure how it?s caused or what its symptoms are. You may wonder who is most at risk for contracting it and whether there is a cure. The first question is relatively easy to answer. The answer to the second question is, sadly, no. As of yet there is no cure.

Who is at risk? The good news is that if you are a man, you are out of danger. The bad news, unfortunately, is that if you every female is at risk from the time of their first period. So, then what is endometriosis, physically speaking? What happens to a woman who has it? The disease gets its name from the endometrium, which is the name for the tissue that lines the uterus. When a woman suffers from the disease, the endometrium grows outside the uterus. Why does this happen? That?s part of the problem. Nobody has yet learned why this occurs in some women.

The tissue typically grows outside the uterus in somewhere in the pelvic cavity. The actual site of this tissue growth can take place in several places. It can occur either on or beneath the ovaries; or on the tissues behind the uterus; or on the bowels of the bladder. In extremely rare cases, it has even been know to grow outside the pelvic cavity.

So what happens as a result of this tissue growth? Usually it develops into larger growths that can be referred to as tumors, lesions, or implants. Though they may be called tumors, they are typically not cancerous and don?t usually lead to developing any kind of cancer. These tumors can be painful, however. The pain can range from moderate to quite severe. They can also lead to infertility.

The physiological changes that take place during a woman?s menstrual cycle affects these growths. The walls lining the uterus thicken each month as part of the reproductive cycle. If no pregnancy develops, the uterus sheds this lining and the woman experiences the bleeding associated with her period. However, a woman who has endometriosis also experiences bleeding on the growths outside the uterus. But since this tissue cannot be shed like the uterus lining, internal bleeding results and scar tissue develops. Depending on where the growth are located, this can lead to a variety of complications.

A surgical procedure called a laparoscopy is needed to fully diagnose endometriosis. Though done under anesthesia, a laparoscopy is a relatively minor procedure in which a lighted tube is inserted into the abdomen through a small incision. This device is called a laparoscope and it allows the doctor examine the organs and determine if any growths are present.

Although there is no cure yet for endometriosis, treatment does exist. Unfortunately, it ranges from medication to treat the pain to hysterectomies to remove the affected areas. The only problem with this is that there has been a high rate of recurrence even among women who undergone this procedure.

The answer to the question what is endometriosis is, alas, not a happy one.

2006-02-12 Illustrations

The Truth About Infertility

Sun, 12 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Infertility is the inability to conceive; it may be remedied. However, should the conditions persist, it is referred to as sterility.

In the United States, one out of every 8 to 10 couples are childless because of infertility; it is a major medical and social problem. Both husband and wife are urged to seek medical attention for complete examinations and evaluation, since almost as many men as women cause a sterile marriage.

It is usually recommended that the male be evaluated first, because tests for the female are more expensive and time-consuming. Such tests may require the services of a urologist, gynecologist, endocrinologist, and internist.

In the female, the organs of reproduction and the glands influencing them are evaluated. Among the causative factors may be displacement and tumors of the uterus, genital infantilism, and inflammation. To allow fertilization of an ovum, it is necessary that the vagina, cervix, and uterus to be patent and have mucosal secretions receptive to the sperm. Semen is alkaline, as is cervical secretion; normal vaginal secretion is acid.

Treatment is directed towards correcting the deficiencies encountered in the individual patient. The following tests assist the gynecologist in delimiting the problem.

1. Rubin test

This procedure is to determine the potency of the fallopian tubes by introducing carbon dioxide through a sterile canula into the uterus, into the tubes, and into the peritoneal cavity.

By listening with a stethoscope on the abdomen, the physician may hear the gas swishing into the abdomen. If the pressure gauge reaches 200 mm. of a mercury, an occlusion may be suspected.

2. Salpinogram; Hysterosalpingogram

A radiopaque substance is often used to determine the site of tubal obstruction; an x-ray picture then shows the outline of the tubal lumen.

3. Hubner test

Within an hour or two after intercourse, the physician aspirates cervical secretions with a long cannula. The woman is to be instructed not to void, bathe, or douche between coitus and the examination; a perineal pad is worn until she is placed in ?lithotomy position? in the examining room. Aspirated material is placed on a slide and examined under microscope for presence and viability of sperm cells.

Treatment

The treatment of sterility is a difficult matter, because it may be caused by a combination of several factors. Efforts are made to build up the general health of the patient, supplying lacking glandular hormones as indicated.

Operative treatments include removal of obstructions and plastic operations to restore tubal potency. Unfortunately, these are not too successful; in addition, there is a high incidence of tubal pregnancy following such operations.

The psychic and social factors of infertility must not be overlooked. Among some religious groups and nationalities, it is important to have blood descendants; adopting children is not acceptable in these families.

In other family groups, the man?s virility, or woman?s femininity are suspected when a couple fails to have children. Many pregnancies have occurred after an infertile couple has adopted a child, moved to another location, or the husband had a change of jobs.

All of these things indicate that the concepts behind infertility are not absolute and concrete. There are instances that the information about this particular problem may have underlying causes that should not be blamed on the inability of the person to conceive.

Boiled down, the problem on infertility is more of a social problem than a biological problem. It is not the aspect of not being able to conceive that persons involved are hesitant to disclose the matter.

If it is more than just biological malady, then, it requires tough solutions.

2006-02-12 Illustrations

Migraines And Women

Sun, 12 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Migraines occur far more frequently in women than in men. In fact, in adult women the rate of frequency is roughly fifteen to seventeen percent, whereas in men it is only about five percent.

Studies have concluded that estrogen withdrawal is a key factor in migraines related to menstrual cycles.

Twenty-five to thirty percent of all women in their 30s experience at least an occasional migraine.

Menstrual migraines generally last longer than non-menstrual migraines and often are much more difficult to treat effectively.

Sixty to seventy percent of women who suffer from migraines have menstrual-related migraine.

Ten to fourteen percent of women with migraines have them only during menstruation. These types of headaches are known as ?true menstrual migraine?.

Premenstrual migraine may in fact be part premenstrual syndrome (PMS), the menstrual related mood disorder. Symptoms of PMS include fatigue, irritability or depression, bloating and, yes, headache.

Two-thirds of women who suffered from pre-menopausal migraines find their condition improve with physiologic menopause. On the other hand, it has been found that surgical menopause worsens migraine conditions in two-thirds of cases.

Migraine attacks usually disappear during pregnancy. At the same time, however, some women report an initial onset of migraines during the first trimester of pregnancy, with the disappearance of their headaches after the third month of pregnancy.

Treatment options for menstrual migraine

Sidenote: Hope you're finding this useful? I have always been curious about this matter. And when I found very little quality information about it, I decided to share a part of what I've learned about it - which is why this article came to be written. Read on.

When choosing to treat menstrual migraines with medication, the drugs used most often are non-steroidal anti-inflammatory medications (NSAIDs). The NSAIDS of choice in treating menstrual migraines are:

ketoprofen (Orudis)
ibuprofen (Advil and Motrin)
fenoprofen calcium (Nalfon)
naproxen (Naprosyn)
nabumetone (Relafen)

For best results when using NSAIDs to treat migraines, usage should be started two to three days before menstrual flow actually begins and the therapy should be continued throughout the period. Gastrointestinal side effects are generally not serious enough to be considered because the therapy takes place over such a short period, no pun intended.

For patients who suffer from more severe menstrual migraines or who desire to continue taking oral contraceptives, doctors also recommend taking a NSAID. This therapy should begin l9th day of your cycle and continue through the second day of the next cycle.

Some women have found antinausea medicine and pain relievers like aspirin, ibuprofen or acetaminophen sufficient enough to dull the pain. Others trust in analgesics or serotonin agonists such as Imitrex, Zomig, Amerge or Maxalt. When using medications, it is extremely important to be aware of the dangers of avoiding a repetitive pattern of medication or overuse of medication as this can cause rebound headaches.

You might also consider using an estrogen skin patch. This treatment is utilized in the days leading up to your period and may either delay or actually prevent the onset of a menstrual migraine.

Some studies have found that daily doses of magnesium may help menstrual migraines in certain women. In addition, vitamin and herbal treatments have been found to be effective. The herb feverfew or vitamin B2 when taken on a daily basis may reduce

Either the severity or the frequency of headaches, though research does not point to

menstrual migraines in particular.

Even though two-thirds of women do report improvement in their migraine condition with the onset of natural menopause, two-thirds of women report a worsening with surgical, therefore neither a hysterectomy nor an ovarian removal are recommended.

As always, you should consult your physician for a proper diagnosis before discontinuing or launching on kind of new treatment, including over-the-counter medication treatments.

Every person has a unique health profile that includes aspects specific to their physiology and family history and that may preclude them from taking certain medications.

Some final tips

There enough different migraine triggers to fill a book and keeping track of them can be a full time job. It is highly recommended that you keep a trigger diary that includes a record of foods you eat, weather conditions, medications you have taken, stressful events, menstrual activity, etc.

Also of benefit is developing a plan around your period. Reduce stress as much as possible by planning work and leisure commitments around your cycle so as to cut back on menstrual-related triggers as much as possible.

I hope you've found this information helpful and gained something of value from the article.

In case there is any specific portion that is not clear enough, or that you'd like to know more about, please write to let me know and I'll try and update the article or write another one getting into greater detail.

2006-02-12 Illustrations

Breast Cancer: What Women Should Know

Sun, 12 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

From relative obscurity, breast cancer has become one of the leading causes of deaths among women in the world. In 2001, about 200,000 cases of breast cancer have been reported in the United States, making it the second leading cause of cancer death in the US. It is, in fact, the most common malignancy problem that is affecting women in North America and Europe today.

But what is breast cancer and how do people get it?

Breast cancer occurs when malignant tumors in the breast grow and start to affect other tissues in the body. There is still no clear indications how tumors are created but what is often observed is that cancerous cells usually comes from ducts or glands.

Although women?s health organizations advise women to massage the breast daily and to feel for any lumps, it may a long time before a cancerous cell get big enough for us to feel it. By that time, it may already be too late. Doctors make use of mammograms for their diagnosis.

Breast at risk

All women are actually at risk, with the risk increasing with the presence of some risk factors that are already part of the natural cycle, for example, aging. Family history of breast cancer can also significantly affect the prognosis as heredity has been found to play a role. Women who got their periods before they were 12 years old and those who never had or had children after 30 years old are also more likely to develop breast cancer.

There are also risk factors that medical science can help alter such as hormonal problems through replacement therapies. Women are also advised to decrease their consumption of alcoholic drinks, exercise every day and decrease the use of birth control pills. Breastfeeding has been found to decrease the risk of breast cancer development.

Although there are some factors that women can avoid to prevent breast cancer from developing, cause and effect relationships between these factors and breast cancer is still debatable. For women who are already at high risk, doctors often recommend a drug called Tamoxifen, which is known to decrease the risk by as much 50 percent when taken in five years. Still, like all medications, Tamoxifen has side effects such as hot flushes, vaginal discharges and sometimes even blood clots. Taking the drug can also lead to pulmonary emobolus, stroke and uterine cancer, although these are all isolated cases.

Another avenue that women can go to is Vitamin A, which some studies show to be effective in decreasing the risk. Still, research is still in the initial stages and nothing has been proven yet. Other things that are being linked to the breast cancer fight are phytoestrogens, which can be found in soya, Vitamin E, and Vitamin C.

But until something concrete is found in research, the only thing that women can do to ensure that they are safe from breast cancer is early detection. This can be done through daily self-examinations as well as annual check ups and mammogram tests. It is also important that women know the beginnings of breast cancer. Here are some of the signs that they should watch out for.

Lumps in the breast and in the underarms
Scaling of the skin of the breast and of the nipple
Redness in the skin of the breast and of the nipple
Changes in the size of their breasts
Discharges from the nipple

If these signs are observed, it is best to consult a specialist so that you can know whether you have breast cancer or not.

2006-02-12 Illustrations

A Rundown On The Birth Control Methods

Sun, 12 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

With the population boom in recent years, many countries have pushed for the use of birth control to help curb the increase in population. There are many types of birth control methods that families can use, depending on what the couple are most comfortable with.

Hormonal Methods

One of the methods of controlling birth that is available in the market is the hormonal method, which targets hormones and their effects on the body?s fertility. Some of the most common hormonal methods are the use of birth control pills and birth control shots, skin patches and the vaginal ring. This method actually works quite as it prevents the production of eggs. As a big bonus, these methods can also help relieve pain and cramps during monthly periods and can relieve heavy flows.

There are also Intrauterine devices (IUDs) that contain hormones called Minera. IUDs, however, are more expensive as they can last for years, sometimes lasting for more than 5 years. IUDs , although expensive, is highly recommended as these have 99 percent success rates. And because you only have to pay once over a period of five to 10 years, the total cost of birth control is actually much cheaper compared to other forms of birth controls. Another thing that adds to its appeal is that IUDs do not interrupt foreplay during sexual intercourse or foreplay and they do not require the cooperation of the sexual partner. It has also been found that IUDs can also be used while breastfeeding.

One disadvantage though of hormonal method besides the cost is you have to take the pills or the medications religiously. One relapse can mean ineffectiveness of the birth control method. They are also not ample protection against sexually-transmitted diseases unlike condoms and other barrier method instruments. Another disadvantage is that it can react differently when taken in with other medications. This is why people should first consult the gynecologists for medications that may affect its effectiveness.

Barrier Method

Barrier methods, on the other hand, are generally less effective than the hormonal methods although they seem to be the most widely-used especially among the younger set. Among the devices that belong to these group of birth control instruments are condoms, diaphragms, cervical caps, and sponges. There are also Lea?s shield and spermicides, which when used with any of the barrier devices can help increase the effectiveness by killing the sperms. Still, one advantage of barrier method is that it protects both individuals from sexually-transmitted diseases. In fact, some people use condoms not to prevent pregnancy but to prevent the spread of diseases.

Calendar method
Natural birth control methods can also be done through the calendar method. This can be tough work though for the couple. The woman must first determine the fertile periods of the month. The couple must then avoid having sex on the days that the woman is most fertile to avoid conceiving. This however is not reliable and must be calculated to the letter before it can be effective. The calendar method is actually the only method supported by the Catholic Church, which takes a pro-life stand.

Sterilization surgery
Permanent birth control methods such as vasectomy and tubal litigation surgery are also options for the couple but they must remember that they can no longer have children when they have these procedures performed on them. These methods are actually for couples who are old or those who already have children and feel that they should not have anymore.

2006-02-12 Illustrations

Premenstrual Symptoms ? A Bane Of Every Woman

Sun, 12 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

When it is one of those days when you feel bloated, have breast pain, gain weight, have acne, headaches, cramping and mood swings, you know it is one of those days that every woman dreads. A lot of women suffer from premenstrual symptoms (PMS) and it can cause a lot of inconvenience to the sufferer. There are a plenty of home-based treatments available for the PMS sufferers but it needs some experimentation to determine the right one for you.

The common treatments for PMS are:

? Reduce your intake of saturated fats: When you consume a lot of fatty foods, your PMS symptoms and pain tend to worsen. Avoid fatty cuts of beef, lamb and pork and go in for fish and poultry. Replace butter, which has high content of saturated fats with flaxseeds, safflower and corn, which are rich in polyunsaturated fats.

? Minimize salt intake: Excessive intake of salt leads to water retention. Many snack foods and some fast-foods have very high salt content. These foods will lead to bloating. Hence it is advisable to choose fresh fruits and vegetables over packaged and processed foods.

? Take more of carbohydrates to minimize the cravings: It is common to crave for high carbohydrate foods like ice cream, chocolate and potato chips during PMS. But switching to complex carbohydrates like whole grains, pasta, cereal and bagel will effectively counter the food cravings experienced during PMS. Also, these foods are the excellent sources of fiber and thus remove the excess estrogen from the body. High-carbohydrate, low-sugar foods help in relieving the psychological symptoms of tension, anxiety and mood swings associated with PMS. Women who eat high-fiber foods are more alert and happier than those who don?t.

? Move your body: Exercise has been shown to reduce many physical and psychological symptoms associated with PMS. This is because exercise releases endorphins, the chemicals in the brain associated with easing pain and increasing the sense of well-being. It also reduces breast tenderness, food cravings, fluid retention and depression.

? Eliminate caffeine: If you are sensitive to caffeine, it is best to avoid caffeine like tea, coffee, colas and chocolates. Studies have proved that women who consume two or more cups of caffeine a day are likely to suffer from PMS, since caffeine is a stimulant and can lead to anxiety and irritability. It also leads to breast tenderness.

? Read labels on pain relievers: Some over-the-counter medicines contain caffeine. Hence, if you take them during PMS, they will aggravate the symptoms. Read the contents of the medicine carefully before taking them.

? Skip alcohol: Alcohol is a depressant and a diuretic and can worsen PMS headaches and fatigue. It can increase depression. Hence, avoid taking any alcoholic beverages including wine or beer, if you have PMS.

? Prevent menstrual acne with vitamins A and D: Vitamins A and D have been proved to suppress menstrual acne. Eat plenty of carrots, cooked spinach, cooked sweet potatoes and cantaloupe for vitamin A and plenty of sunshine or fortified milk for vitamin D.

? Improve your mood with vitamin B6: Taking more of vitamin B6 has been shown to improve mood swings, fluid retention, breast tenderness, bloating, sugar craving and fatigue. You can take supplements of 25 to 100 milligrams a day or increase your intake of vitamin B6 by eating more of potatoes, bananas, fish, white meat in chicken and turkey.

? Reduce stress and allergies by taking vitamin C: Vitamin C helps in alleviating the stress experienced during PMS. Being a natural antihistamine, it helps women whose allergies worsen during PMS. Take more of vegetables like broccoli, Brussels sprouts and raw peppers and fruits like cantaloupe, grapefruit, oranges, cranberry and citrus fruits.

? Vitamin E helps: Vitamin E has been shown to have a powerful effect on the hormonal system, thus relieving painful breast symptoms, anxiety and depression. Cooking oils and salad dressings like olive oil, safflower oil and corn oil as well as some fruits like blackberries and apples contain vitamin E.

? Fight PMS with calcium and magnesium: Calcium prevents menstrual cramps and pain. Magnesium helps the body in absorbing calcium. Magnesium helps in controlling premenstrual food cravings and stabilizing moods. If you do not suffer from lactose intolerance, you can opt for skim milk as a source of calcium. Include green leafy vegetables, beans, peas, tofu and canned salmon for calcium and spinach, tofu, rice bran and some fish like halibut and mackerel for magnesium.

2006-02-12 Illustrations

Natural Remedies to Boost Low Sex Drive

Sun, 12 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

There are a number of reasons why both men and women experience low sex drive including, hormonal imbalance, nervous disorders, nutritional deficiencies, fatigue, endocrine disorders and numerous other factors.

A healthy sex drive is a natural part of a human being's makeup, so it you are experiencing low sex drive it's important to investigate the cause with your doctor. Fortunately, however, there are a number of natural herbs that can not only boost your sex drive but will also improve your mood, help you look and feel better and raise your overall energy level as well.

Herbal remedies are often better than over the counter medications because they are natural and don't have the adverse side effects that over the counter medications tend to have.

Herbal alternatives for low sexual desire range from general aphrodisiacs to herbs containing nutrients that will help to improve your general health over time. In addition, it is important to note that anything that is good for your health is also good for your sex drive as well.

Therefore, when trying to resolve issues of low sex drive, in addition to exercising frequently, it is important to consider such issues as making sure that your diet is properly balanced. A low-fat, well-balanced diet which includes cold water fish such as Salmon, lots of vegetables and the avoidance of high-sugar, starchy foods is essential to solving the problem of low sex drive.

Besides dietary changes that you can make to improve your sex drive, there are a number of herbs which can also be helpful.

Horny Goat Weed - Believed to affect cortisol levels (the main stress hormones in the body) and increases sexual desire and performance in both men and women.

Passion flower - Helps the mind and body to relax and helps the body to cope with stress - one of the biggest factors in low sex drive, particularly in women.

Ginkgo - Increases energy and is said to increase the blood circulation to the genital area, which will make arousal easier and improve the sensation during intercourse.

St. Johns Wort - Effective in improving the overall well-being and treating depression. St. Johns Wort is also effective in treating insomnia which can be a cause of low sex drive in some cases.

Sarsaparilla - Important for glandular balance and contains the hormones testosterone and progesterone. It is an excellent blood purifier and is often use to treat liver disorders (liver function is important to sex drive).

In addition to the herbs mentioned above there are also several vitamins and other nutrients that are important to a healthy sex drive including Zinc, B Complex, vitamin C, vitamin E and fish oils.

Scents like ylang ylang, sandalwood, lavender and jasmine can also help you relax, lift your mood and gently aid in improving feelings of sexual desire as well.

2006-02-12 Illustrations

What Is Endometriosis And Common Symptoms

Sun, 12 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Endometriosis is a condition that can prevent pregnancy in a woman. It is a disease that is fairly common and can afflict women from their first menstrual cycle through menopause. In rarer cases, endometriosis can affect post-menopausal women as well. Currently, there is no cure for endometriosis. As well, general practitioners often have a difficult time diagnosing endometriosis.

Endometriosis occurs when the endometrium, or uterine lining, grows outside of the uterus. It may grow in areas such as around the ovaries, in the pelvic cavity, sometimes even the bowels or in the bladder. Although very rare, the endometrium can also grow in the lung area.

As the condition progresses, the growths develop into "tumors" or "implants." While the reference to tumors can be unnerving, endometrium growths are not cancerous or malignant. However, the condition can be severely painful, cause heavy menstruation, and can prevent pregnancy in some cases.

Endometriosis symptoms include pain that is localized in the pelvic, abdominal, or lower back areas. The severity of the pain does not directly correlate with the amount of endometriosis present in these areas. One can have a small amount of endometriosis growth and feel severe pain. Conversely, one can have a large area of endometriosis growth and feel no pain.

Women who have pain in these areas might want to consult with their gynecologist. Gynecologists are specially trained to diagnose endometriosis. An MRI or ultrasound should be able to detect endometriosis, but it is not always the best way. A definitive diagnostic procedure is a laparoscopy. A laparoscopy is a surgical procedure that involves inserting a tube with an attached light into the abdomen. This procedure will determine the location, size, and extent of the condition. Once endometriosis is detected, treatment options are discussed with the gynecologist, which includes medication, hormone treatments, and surgery.

2006-02-12 Illustrations

What Are The Causes Of Yeast Infection In Women?

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Some yeast can be found harmlessly inside our bodies but when they grow and multiply, they become a yeast infection. It is necessary to know the causes of yeast infection and how it affects you so that predominately preventive measures can be taken. There are mainly three things that can make you susceptible to yeast infections.

First, during pregnancy, your increased estrogen level causes your vagina to produce more glycogen, making it easy for yeast to grow there. Yeast infections are very common in pregnant women, especially during the second trimester. This type of yeast infection is hard to prevent, as the causes of yeast infection in pregnancy is natural. However, you can help by wearing loose fitting, cotton underwear, avoid taking baths and limit your intake of sugary food as yeast needs sugar to grow.

Second is by taking antibiotics. As stated earlier, there are many yeast organisms present in our bodies, which are not harmful. Bacteria also live inside our bodies, which is essential to our health and is usually harmless. The presence of yeast and bacteria inside our bodies should be maintained in balance with one another. Taking antibiotics might kill the bacteria, which allows the yeast to grow rapidly, thereby causing yeast infection. It is important to maintain the balance of yeast and good bacteria in our body so that we can prevent the growth of infections. Therefore, it is advisable to only take antibiotics when it is strictly necessary.

The third common cause is sexual intercourse. Semen is more alkaline than vaginal fluids. Which causes the production and growth of yeast. During sexual intercourse, some internal tissues can become irritated and inflamed, leaving them susceptible to infection. Some birth control devices that contain spermicide can also cause irritation. The use of prophylactics during intercourse can also increase irritation as they are usually coated in spermicide.

There are other factors that might affect your vaginal balance. Stress can be a contributing factor. If a person is stressed your immune system becomes compromised, which invites the growth of yeast. Staying clean is an important factor to fight the production of yeast inside our body. If someone has a high carbohydrate intake like alcohol and refined sugars, this creates the perfect environment for yeast growth. A diet high in sugary foods can lead to Diabetes, which in turn is another cause of yeast infection. Clothing is another source of irritation and can encourage forms of fungal growth. Non-ventilating clothing increases warmth and moisture, the ideal breeding ground for yeast to reproduce rapidly.

2006-02-11 Illustrations

Myths About Cellulite

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Cellulite is surrounded by myths. There are many misleading ?facts? about cellulite that have led women to desperately try to get rid of or avoid getting cellulite only to end up with it gracing their back sides. Weeding through the myths and spelling out the facts is important. This way people can really know the whole truth about cellulite.

1. A myth that, at the time, seemed almost believable is that soda pop causes cellulite. The theory was that the sodium in soda pop caused fat cells to swell thus producing cellulite. This is not true. Cellulite is fat cells, but they have become deformed and trapped close to the skin in connective tissue.

2. Another often accepted myth is that cellulite only happens to those over 40 years old. While cellulite may be more apparent in older people because the skin thins out as we age, it can occur at any age.

3. Cellulite is often misunderstood, so it isn?t surprising that many people believe the myth that cellulite can only occur on the thighs and buttocks. While this is the most common area for cellulite to occur, it can also appear on the arm, neck and stomach.

4. Perhaps one of the most common myths is that only over weight people get cellulite. This myth, when debunked, can be devastating to those who are not over weight. Unfortunately everyone has fat cells, even skinny people so they too are subject to cellulite.

5. A myth related to getting rid of cellulite is that dieting and exercise are good ways to get rid of cellulite. This is untrue because of the make up of cellulite. It is unlike other fat that through dieting and exercise can be burned by a person?s metabolism. Cellulite is trapped in the connective tissue and is unaffected by metabolism.

These five myths are most often associated with cellulite. Some of these myths have even been used to sell products that say they will prevent or cure cellulite. Knowing the difference between myths and facts can help people deal better with cellulite.

2006-02-11 Illustrations

Affect Of Alcohol On Women

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Women and Alcohol

It is often quoted that females have a lower tolerance to alcohol than males and this is an indisputable fact but few people ever go on to tell exactly what the affect is and why. Hopefully this article will help shed light on exactly what happens when you drink alcohol and why you often do things that you regret later. Also give some insight into what alcohol actually does to the brain. This is not an anti alcohol article, it is presented in the hope that knowledge will influence attitude. The fact that this article is being published at the height of the Christmas/New Year festive season is coincidental; it contains valuable knowledge that is useful at all times.

Alcohol is a testosterone stimulant and the affect it has on women is based upon the fact that testosterone is not the dominant hormone in the female make-up, therefore they are usually unable to control the affect of testosterone as men do on a daily, even hourly, basis. Dealing with the bravado that testosterone produces is not a common experience to a woman and therefore they rarely know how to cope with it. This explains why they are more prone to carrying out acts that are normally not in their nature when drinking. The stimulation of testosterone initially makes them loud as the bravado affect kicks in; a feeling of invincibility that leads them to drop all inhibitions follows this. If there is a dance floor they are liable to seek it as a challenge to dance with a view to drawing self-attention. They meet with strangers when stimulated testosterone has them feeling invincible and there is no need for me to point out the dangers that this can create.

As the affect of alcohol dwindles and the real self re-appears there is true self-doubt regarding what they may, or may not, have done and whether they can face the people they were celebrating with again. This is caused by the lack of testosterone stimulation and the reassertion of the true personality as opposed to the testosterone induced personality that occurs whilst drinking.

The other affects that leave terrible hangovers to contend with are so well known that I will not go into them in this article. Hopefully if you have knowledge concerning why you become vulnerable while drinking you will be more careful concerning the quantity that you drink; especially when you are not in the home environment with trusted family and friends around you.

To have a drink can be fun, just be aware of what happens to your body and mind when you have too many. The stimulation of testosterone starts with the first sip.

A hangover is the result of alcohol dehydrating your body. Try to drink at least a quart (1 liter) of water between drinking and bed to help re-hydrate your body.

This article is copyright ? David McCarthy 2005. It may only be reproduced in its entirety with no additions.

2006-02-11 Illustrations

Pregnancy Fitness After The Baby Is Born

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

What happened to that pre-pregnancy body you once had? After nine months of your body going through numerous changes, many of which you do not like or enjoy, your newborn is here and its time to lose the excess weight you have most likely gained. You can speed the process of regaining your pre-pregnancy shape by exercising regularly.

While it may not help eliminate any stretch marks you may have, exercise will help you regain the body you had prior to becoming pregnant. Some of the most common questions asked by new moms are: How soon can one begin postpartum exercises? How long will it take to regain my pre-pregnancy shape? And what are the best exercises to help me achieve my goals? Keep in mind one of the most critical factors that help determine the answers to these questions is how healthy you were during your pregnancy - both physically and mentally.

Have you ever wondered how celebrity moms lose their baby weight so rapidly? One of the most common reasons is because they exercise strenuously prior to and during their pregnancy. Celebrities have been known to lose up to 60 pounds in what seemed like a few days. However, please keep in mind that this is not considered as the normal time frame. These individuals are also quite careful (almost to the point of obsession) about the types of foods they eat. They are also quite able to afford personal trainers and nannies so that they can perform their exercise routines 5-7 days a week for many hours at a time.

Because most new moms have the regular everyday tasks to contend with such as work, errands, families, losing that excess weight after childbirth is not quite so easy. Hopefully you found the time and the desire to engage in some kind of exercise during your pregnancy, even on the days you just wanted to simply crawl back in bed. If you did, you will find that the process of losing that extra baby weight will be a lot easier for you than for new moms who did no exercise at all while pregnant. Exercising regularly during your pregnancy will have given you the opportunity to become familiar with what will motivate you, give you the best results, and identify the types of exercise that you
find the most enjoyable.

Walking, jogging, aerobics, yoga, and many other types of exercise will allow you to lose the extra weight more quickly and you will feel better at the end of each day. Having a new baby can be an exhausting task and the simple act of exercising regularly will undoubtedly increase your energy and stamina when you need it most. Most doctors will say that it is safe to start a post-pregnancy exercise routine six weeks after the birth of your child. Walking and swimming can be started shortly after your baby is born if you do so in moderate amounts at a slow pace. Work up slowly to the more strenuous exercises to ensure your safety and reduce the risks of any complications that could arise from over-exerting yourself before your body has had adequate time to recover.

2006-02-11 Illustrations

Hysterectomy: Recovery After A Hysterectomy

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Hysterectomy recovery after a hysterectomy is a crucial time in a woman's life. Recovery after a hysterectomy means a woman needs some time to adjust, to heal and to complete her hysterectomy recovery process. Here are some tips for speeding up the recovery time:

1. Your first two weeks at home will likely be the most difficult, depending on what type of hysterectomy procedure you have had. Use this time to sleep, relax, read, and listen to your favorite music until your post hysterectomy is over. At the end of two weeks, you should be more able to begin moving around and slowly getting back to your normal activities.

2. Do not climb stairs or drive a car during this hysterectomy recovery period. This is the time to let family and friends help you.

3. Do not prepare your own meals for the first couple of weeks after a hysterectomy. Ask a friend or family member to do it for you or order your meals from sources that can deliver to you.

4. Have a thermometer at home to monitor your temperature. Call your doctor for advice if your temperature goes up.

5. Laugh as much as you can. Watch funny TV programs, rent some of your favorite funny movies or share fun stories with family and friends. Laughter provides a wonderful boost to the immune system during the hysterectomy recovery healing process.

6. Drink 8 glasses of filtered water each day to flush your system of toxins after a hysterectomy. Drinking pure clear water daily is a healthy habit to continue even once you are fully recovered.

7. Eat as healthy as you can during hysterectomy recovery since your body will need and use nutrients to help with healing. Include cold-water fish, turkey, chicken, organic bread, soups, salads, fruits and broths. If possible, make fresh vegetable juices daily which will provide nutrients that improve health and speed healing.

8. Take the best vitamin/mineral/nutritional supplement you can find. A really good daily supplement contains much more than just vitamins and minerals. Providing your body with important nutritional supplements is a good idea before and after a hysterectomy to help fill in the dietary gaps that everyone will have.

9. Begin to exercise as soon as your doctor authorizes it. Exercise will definitely speed up your post hysterectomy recovery. Take it easy but begin moving. Take walks or use your treadmill when you are home.

10. Begin to learn about your hormones, hysterectomy recovery and hormone imbalance. Having a hysterectomy will interrupt your normal production of progesterone, estrogen and testosterone which can result in symptoms associated with hormone imbalance.

Women considering hysterectomy or having had the procedure should seek the help of physicians trained in the use of natural bio-identical hormones. Bio-identical hormones are hormones that are identical to what the body makes and what normally would exist in the body. Synthetic drugs such as Premarin, Provera and Prempro are not natural nor the same as the body makes, and these kinds of synthetic drugs have numerous side effects.

There is a hormone health test provided by a leading women's health clinic that you can take online. The test takes just a few minutes and is free. The women's clinic has helped tens of thousands of women safely deal with hormone imbalance and related health issues. Learn as much as you can about hormone imbalance, hysterectomy recovery and physician-recommended natural alternatives for hormone replacement therapy.

Copyright 2005 InfoSearch Publishing

2006-02-11 Illustrations

Some Facts About Wild Yam Cream And Progesterone

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Wild Yam Cream has be advertised as a treatment for menopause, hot flashes, night sweats, PMS, migraine headaches, mood swings, fertility, larger breasts, heart disease, and osteoporosis. The people who sell these products claim they contain «natural hormones» and «hormone like compounds.» To many people, suffering from these conditions, this seems like the perfect «medicine» to help them. In most cases these creams are not effective because the product advertised does not contain the hormone claimed. The fact is, there is no progesterone in the wild yams, nor can your body make progesterone from the hormone like compound, diosgenin, in the wild yam. So, why is there such confusion about this?

The reason this misinformation exists is because a few decades ago, wild yams were harvested and purified to produce the intermediate chemical, diosgenin, for progesterone and other hormone production in the lab. An intermediate means that this component of wild yams was reacted with other chemicals, in a laboratory, to make progesterone. People not familiar with this process thought that these wild yams actually contained progesterone. This belief is still persistent today and many unscrupulous business people sell products made from «wild yams» and claim that they can cure or relieve the symptoms of many diseases and medical conditions.

As for natural sources of progesterone, that is a misnomer. Today 99.9% of progesterone is made in a laboratory. However, the synthesised version of natural progesterone is identical to naturally occurring progesterone and is referred to as bio-identical progesterone. The term «synthetic progesterone» is often used to refer to products such as Provera�, Cycrin� which are not identical to progesterone. These synthetic versions have additional chemical groups added to the progesterone molecule, for a number of reasons. These reasons include improved absorption (oral dosage forms) and making the molecule patentable. Today, most bio-identical progesterone is made from soya intermediates.

There is plenty of literature discussing the benefits of hormone replacement therapy, however, many people often confuse «natural and synthetic» as «good and bad.» The fact is that bio-identical hormones are available from your doctor, if you specify and state you would prefer to use natural hormones. Just because the progesterone is synthesised in a laboratory does not mean it is synthetic or «bad.» The fact is, the natural form of progesterone, unlike the component diosgenin, which is not found in the human body, is better for you, even though it is made in a lab. It could be more dangerous to use a hormone like substance, like diosgenin, that could be harmful to your health.

It is often claimed that natural progesterone has no side effects, however, it is a hormone, and does have a number of side effects that you should be aware of, these include:

a feeling of euphoria (based on the amounts used)
breast tenderness
possible acne upon initial use as body adjusts
possible acne upon initial use as body adjusts
possible suspension of ovulation if used prior to ovulation
possible spotting in women just starting menopause
alteration of cycle time
may prevent sperm maturation in men when used in excess
hives, skin rash, itching
increased sensitivity to sunlight
nausea and headaches

It is always a persons choice as to whether they want hormone replacement therapy or not, but to make that decision on unfounded product information is dangerous and could adversely affect your health. Your doctor can prescribe natural (bio-identical) progesterone if you are not comfortable with the synthetic versions like Provera� and Cycrin�. There are many options for hormone replacement therapy, but make sure you know the facts and avoid wasting your money on products that don't work, or could be harmful.

Additional Information about Progesterone: http://progesterone.monograph.ca

2006-02-11 Illustrations

Losing Weight After Pregnancy

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

You could be lucky. I was - just once. When my middle daughter was born I actually weighed 10 pounds less than I had when I'd conceived her. That's not something you can count on, though, and I can tell you that from experience as well. Most women start their lives as a new mom with an extra 8 to 15 pounds that they didn't have pre-baby.

There's a very good reason for that. God designed our bodies with nurture in mind. Part of that weight that you put on during pregnancy was meant to nurture your baby AFTER birth. While your body requires an extra 300 calories a day to keep up with the nutritional demands of your baby during pregnancy, a breastfeeding mother requires at least 500 extra calories a day to produce enough milk and remain healthy. Your body stores up a little extra nutrition for after the birth just in case there isn't enough food for its needs when it's time to feed the new little critter.

If you're breastfeeding, that's part of the good news. You'll automatically be burning an extra five hundred calories a day - which will make it considerably easier for you to lose the extra weight. In fact, you may not need to do anything special at all to lose weight. Just focus on eating a normal, healthy, well-balanced diet. If you're not breastfeeding, you won't find it quite as easy. Your focus should still be on healthy eating, with moderate exercise to burn extra calories.

Here's more good news for new mothers. Exercising is easier. Actually, that's not quite right. Burning more calories is easier. Walking alone for an hour burns 200 calories. Walking while pushing a stroller ups that figure considerably. Push a stroller uphill, and it's even higher. You'll get extra duty out of things you never thought of like lifting the stroller and car seat in and out of the car, carrying the baby up and down stairs and just plain carrying the baby.

Still. If you find yourself with stubborn pounds that simply won't come off, exercise and a moderate reduction in calories is the way to go. Just like pregnancy isn't the time for weight loss, just after pregnancy isn't the time to stress your body further with severe dietary restrictions. Aim for losing about a pound a week, though chances are you'll find it coming off faster than that. Being a mom is a high-energy proposition!

2006-02-11 Illustrations

Fitness For New Moms

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Becoming a new mother is certainly one way to incorporate more exercise into your life! From lifting to bending to picking up items, to carrying ? seems like you never have a chance to sit still now that your precious bundle has arrived!

However, you may be feeling the need to exercise to get back into shape after your pregnancy. There?s no need to join an expensive club, though. Start by exercising with your little one!

One of my favorite exercises when my niece was born was dancing with her. We swayed to Mozart, twirled to 50?s tunes, and rocked gently to lullabies. Consequently, I became fitter, and Sarah has learned to appreciate all kinds of music.

Simply lifting your baby up and down and saying the words, ?up??. ?down? give your arms a mini workout and help your baby learn! That?s right! Talking and moving help increase baby?s IQ! So sing to your baby, tell him or her that you?re moving ?left?, ?right?, ?over?, ?under?, ?around?, etc.

Purchase a sturdy stroller and take baby out for a walk each day. The fresh air will be beneficial to you both, and it?s another great way to introduce your child to the objects around the neighborhood. You do want to make sure your stroller doesn?t jiggle too much ? it?s not much fun pushing a stroller and ending up with numb hands (like you?re pushing a lawn mower!). A quality stroller will help you want to go for more walks with baby!

As your baby grows, he?ll mimic your movements. This is a fun time to incorporate some silly movement games into your ?exercise? session. Watching her trying to do exactly what you do brings tears of joy and much laughter!

As you can see, exercising with a baby is not only possible, but loads of fun as well. It?s a time to bond, teach, and take care of yourself and your little one. One day soon you?ll be telling your school age child about all the fun you both had exercising together when he was a baby. And yes, it will happen quicker than you ever dreamed!

2006-02-11 Illustrations

Breast Cancer: «A Curse To Every Female Species»

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

As the name suggests it's a cancer in the breast of a person. Previously only female species were observed effected by this disease but in the recent years it is found that some of the males are also falling prey to breast cancer. This disease is generally seen among matured women in the age group of 50 years and above. Every year lots of women become victim of breast cancer that ultimately leads to their death.

Our medical science has not yet reached to the roots of this disease, however during the recent years our scientists and experts in the related fields are continuously progressing in the fight against breast cancer. Today one can find many options in the treatment of breast cancer and can opt according to the stage and requirements of the disease.

Stages of breast cancer
The disease of breast cancer can be divided into many stages according to the symptoms and the nature of occurrence. The measure of the tumor inside the breast also plays an important role in deciding the stage of the disease. The different stages can be described into three parts as follows:

- Early stage- The early stage of breast cancer can be subdivided into these three different stages:

1. Stage 0- in this stage there is no evidence of cancer cells breaking through the normal tissue.

2. Stage I- In this stage the cancer cells are seen breaking through or invading the neighboring tissue and in this stage the tumor measure upto 2 cm.

3. Stage II- In this stage the tumor measure at least 2cm or upto 5cm and the cancer start spreading in the lymph nodes under the arm on the same side of the cancer.

- Lower stage- The lower stage of breast cancer is divided into sub stages described as under:

1. Stage III A- In this stage the tumor measures more then 5cm and the cancer spread through the lymph nodes and the nodes are sticking to the surrounding tissues.

2. Stage III B- In this stage a tumor of any size start spreading in the breast skin, lymph nodes and includes inflammatory breast cancer.

- Advanced Stage- the advanced stage known, as the stage IV is the most crucial stage of breast cancer where the tumor spreads beyond the breast, underarm, and internal mammary lymph nodes. The tumor can also spread to lungs, liver, bones or brains ultimately leading to death of the person.

Symptoms and diagnosis

There are many symptoms showing the occurrence of breast cancer, listed as under:

- Inverted nipple
- Nipple discharge
- Nipple rash
- Cysts
- Breast pain

The above symptoms if observed the person should immediately consult a doctor and should discuss about the required treatment. The best treatment of breast cancer is the early detection of the disease. However now days one can choose from much diagnosis available namely surgery, radiotherapy, tomoxifen drug, chemotherapy etc and can easily get rid of this disease and can even prevent it from occurrence in the near future.

2006-02-11 Illustrations

Can Women Build Big Muscles? Why Women Can't Build Big Muscles Easily.

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Why Is It Difficult For Women To Build Big Muscles

"I don't want to workout lifting weights because I don't want to build big muscles " or "I just do aerobics and sit ups to lose weight because if I lift weights, I may build muscle and looked like a man."

Ladies. Have you made these comments before? Awww... c'mon ladies, if you have ever uttered these words, you have just done a terrible disservice to yourself and are missing out on many great benefits that working out with weights can give you. Have you ever pointed to your belly or butt and sweetly proclaimed, "I want lose weight here." So managed to convince yourself that sweating profusely is the answer to a slim and beautiful body and you hit the gym day in and day out just to sweat off your tummy or butt fats!

So you peddle away on your stationary bike in the gym just like little hamsters or frantically stepping away on the step up machine and then you woefully do crunches after crunches in the hope of having a flat belly and a well rounded shapely butt not realising that there is no such thing as spot reduction.

You never even bother take a look at the weight lifting machines or the free weights lying everywhere in the gym not to say even touching those weights. Gosh.this terrible myth of building big muscles on women is creating so much fear in women causing them never to train with weights at their detriment.

Ladies! If you are listening, I want to say this loud and clear. There is no way women will build big huge muscles unless you are on special supplementation and specially designed training system. Some of those muscle bound ladies you have seen may even be taking steroids which are banned and obviously harmful. never never touch steroids to build msucles.

So the, why is it difficult for women to nuild big muscles? Well, it is simply because you do not have enough of tetosterone, a male hormone that encourages your muscles to grow. In fact, women have ten to thirty times less of bodybuilding hormones, tetosterone than their male counterparts. Women who accept the myth that they will build big muscles if they workout with weights will miss out on all of the benefits that weightlifting and bodybuilding can offer. This myth is so ingrained in women's psyche that even after explaining the facts to my women clients, they are still afraid to lift weights. So will women who lift weights in their workouts build more muscle tissue? Yes, of course, but it will not be those big huge muscles like those of bodybuilders. Your muscles will just tone your body shape resulting in a tight, firm, healthy, attractive and desirable body. The body shape that is ever so sexy and healthy. Yes, you may have noticed an increase in weight when you step on a scale. This is because muscles weigh more than fat. Thus, as you increase your muscle tissue, your weight will increase but your fats will be reduced giving you a well toned sexy body which most women can only dream of.

Muscle burn calories naturally even when you are sleeping. In fact, research has shown that for each kilo of muscle you build, you will burn 70-100 more calories per day. So, if you gain 2 kilos of muscle and lose 2 kilos of fat, you will burn about 75 more calories per kilo, which equates to burning 150 additional calories per day, which translates into 4200 additional calories per month and ultimately results in a fat or weight loss of 7-8 kilos a year without doing anything! One kilo is 2.2 pounds. Doesn't that sound great?

Another reason that women should do weightlifting is the benefit it can have on your bones. Weight training is a powerful preventive action against osteoporosis, a disease caused by porous bone and low bone density. Women has a much higher risk than men to suffer from osteoporosis. In fact, most women will suffer from this disease as they age. Those plagued with osteoporosis have an increased susceptibility to fractures. These fractures can even be fatal. So, women should exercise with weight to strengthen and increase bone density. Research has shown that six months of weightlifting may increase bone mineral density by as much as 15 percent. As you increase your muscle tissue, your bones must adapt to accommodate this increase in your muscle mass . So your bones respond by increasing in density. The result? You will own a stronger skeletal structure and a reduced risk for osteoporosis.

So, don't completely swear off weightlifting fearing that training with weights will build big muscles and turn you into an Incredible Hulk! You won't and you can't. Period.

OK girls, the weights are over there. Let's lift them now! Have the last laugh when your girl friends tell you that they don't want to lift weights and yet watching you transform your body that will make heads turn when you are in your bikini.

2006-02-11 Illustrations

Low Testosterone Women And Low Testosterone In Women Symptoms

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Low testosterone women and low testosterone in women symptoms are related to hormone levels in the woman's body. Testosterone production in a woman is about 10% of the amount typically made by a man. Testosterone is produced primarily in a woman's ovaries and adrenal glands.

Along with the two other vital hormones - progesterone and estrogen - testosterone production declines as a woman ages. Low testosterone women may experience certain symptoms, the most notable symptom being low libido. However, low testosterone in women can also contribute to depression and osteoporosis.

Harvard-trained family physician Dr. John R. Lee describes his experience with low testosterone women in the book What Your Doctor May NOT Tell You About Premenopause. He reports that several clinical studies have shown that using a small amount of natural testosterone supplementation may enhance the good effects of the other hormones.

However, Dr. Lee observes that testosterone production depends on sufficient progesterone levels in the body. In the healthy human body, progesterone converts into another form of progesterone, which converts into androstenedione from which testosterone is made. If progesterone levels are too low - common today with women in their 30's and older - low testosterone in women may be the result. For low testosterone women, Dr. Lee recommends first using natural progesterone cream supplementation for at least six months, using dosages in the same amounts as what the body would normally produce. Dr. Lee found that natural progesterone supplementation often solved the problem of low testosterone women and low libido.

While low testosterone in women is one problem, excessive testosterone can also cause problems. Dr. Lee describes what often happens as women approach menopause and ovarian function slows. Women often show symptoms of becoming androgen dominant, and testosterone supplementation may only make this condition worse. Symptoms of androgen dominance in women include male pattern baldness and facial hair growth.

In addition, an excess of estrogen in the woman's body can result in the occurance of these same two symptoms. Clearance of testosterone from the body is related to the healthy balance of estrogen and progesterone levels. Too much estrogen slows down the clearance of testosterone, while progesterone enhances testosterone clearance. By staying in the body longer than necessary, testosterone may produce the androgenic characteristics described above. Dr. Lee found that supplementation with natural progesterone cream tended to reverse the androgen dominant characteristics.

Dr. Lee recommends that low testosterone women first use natural progesterone cream supplementation for at least six months. His experience was that frequently no testosterone supplementation was required as natural progesterone corrected the symptoms. He advises that if low libido is still being experienced after doing progesterone supplementation for at least six months, then consider trying a small amount of natural testosterone supplementation - approximately 0.5-2 mg in the mornings. If testosterone supplementation begins to produce facial hair growth and/or male pattern baldness, reduce or discontinue testosterone supplementation.

He recommends using only natural testosterone, not one of the synthetic testosterone drugs that can have undesirable side effects. You will need a doctor's prescription to obtain natural testosterone which is easily available from compounding pharmacies.

Learn as much as you can about when to use natural hormone supplemention to help stay healthy and free from the symptoms associated with low testosterone in women, and understand the vital role that natural progesterone plays in women's health.

Copyright 2005 InfoSearch Publishing

2006-02-11 Illustrations

Incontinence: Improving Muscle Tone

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Incontinence is one of the most common problems among women these days. A treatable disorder, whose main symptom is frequent urination and leakage. An overactive bladder and incontinence affects 12 million North American women.

Incontinence occurs when the urethra loses support from the vaginal walls. Overactive bladder is closely linked to incontinence, and is characterized by such symptoms as frequent urination, insomnia due to the urge to urinate at night, urine leakage, and even bed-wetting. An overactive bladder is often caused by bladder stones, surgery or neurological disease. Among the main risk factors for incontinence are excessive weight, smoking, pregnancy, stress and infections of the bladder, such as cystitis.

Aside from being a physical health issue, incontinence and suffering with an overactive bladder can result in emotional and mental health issues. Frequent urination can be an embarrassing problem. As a result, many women who suffer from incontinence become socially inactive, abandoning social activities. Many women even stop seeing other people.

Childbirth is a major cause of incontinence, with age and menopause contributing to the problem. Vaginal childbirth frequently causes pelvic damage because the pressure of the fetal head displaces and stretches parts of the pelvic anatomy, most specifically, the vaginal walls. With the onset of menopause women can become estrogen deficient which can cause the vagina to thin which prevent the urethral walls from closing well. This lack of closure translates into incontinence.

There is no unique treatment strategy for incontinence and overactive bladder. You can prevent leakage of urine temporarily using diapers and pads, or even undergo a surgery. For bladder infections, there are a number of traditional and herbal remedies, such as cleaver or Marshmallow root teas that help toning bladder muscles.

Incontinence and other bladder problems don't necessarily have to be treated with medications. Pelvic muscles can be strengthened and toned, just like any muscle in the body, to prevent spontaneous urine leakage. These exercises, called after the doctor Kegel who invented them, are often prescribed to pregnant women. In the same time, Kegel exercises can tighten the muscles that control stream of urine. You can locate these muscles by stopping and starting the flow of urine.

Women, who are already being treated for incontinence, can start doing 3 sets of 50-60 repetitions of Kegel exercises a day. Then, as the muscles strengthen, women can do as much as a hundred Kegels a day - not at one time, of course! Quite conveniently, Kegel exercises can be easily done everywhere, as they are completely invisible. There are even vaginal weights to be used when doing Kegel exercises.

You can develop your own Kegel routine by adding variations of exercise, such as elevation Kegels or holding the pressure for a few seconds. Women who practice Kegels admit that these simple exercises have the added benefit of greatly improving their sex life.

The most important message for women who suffer from any form of urinary incontinence is that in 80 to 90 percent of people it can be significantly improved or even cured.

2006-02-11 Illustrations

Is Your Bra Hazardous To Your Health?

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Breast cancer is the most common form of cancer found in women, and this year alone 192,000 new cases will be diagnosed in the U.S. It eventually strikes one out of every eight American women. Breast cancer also causes more deaths than any other form of cancer in women under age 55.

As women, we all fear breast cancer. It is the one disease that sends chills down our spines and puts a knot in our stomachs. I am not about to go over all the reasons why women get breast cancer or who is or isn't a high risk factor. I will leave that subject to those who are far more qualified than I, however, there is one factor that affects your breast health and that is the fit of your bra.

Right now, as you read this, 80% of all the women in America are wearing the wrong size bra. Most of them are uncomfortable and most of them are too small. Your breast is all about circulation and the flow of lymph. If you want healthy breasts, follow a regular care program, including a monthly self exam, routine visits with your doctor, and a mammogram when recommended for your age and family history, Most importantly, wear a bra that fits you.

A tight, binding, constricting, and ill fitting bra is bad for you and can cause major discomfort as well as retarding the circulation in and around your breast. So what can you do to change that? Find a bra that fits you perfectly.

This process is very simple but requires the help of an "expert". When I was growing up in Brooklyn, New York, my mother use to call them the "brassier ladies». They were mostly European born and had worked in corset shops in Europe as fitters or seamstresses. This noble group of women worked in neighborhood lingerie shops. You never bought a bra without their expertise.

They had such a trained eye that the minute any woman walked in the door they knew what size she was. They would take one look and say, "34C". It was like radar, they just knew from afar, and when they measured you, they were almost always right.

Today there is a more modern version of these women called lingerie fitters. They are in local shops (if your town is lucky to have one), or work in major department stores in the lingerie department. So your first step to finding the right bra is to go see one of these gals. They will take your measurements, first under your rib cage and all around your back and then across your breast. One tells what your bra size is (34, 36, 38 etc.) and the other tells your cup size (A, B, C, D etc.) Now that you know this they will usually recommend a style for your body type based on your needs. During your session, tell this person all about your basic wardrobe. Are you looking for a bra to wear under a tee shirt or a knit, one for sports or the gym, or a special occasion look? Or do you need to establish a basic bra wardrobe?

Believe me, one hour spent with one of these experts will not only save you money in the long run (by avoiding having a drawer full of ill-fitting bras you can no longer wear), but you will be saved the daily agonies of wearing bras that hurt, are too tight, dig into your shoulders or are just plain torture!

Once you have established your size and needs, then follow these simple suggestions for a long and comfy relationship with your bras.

HOW TO PUT ON A BRA

Bend forward, put the bra on, and fasten.

Look at the fit and make sure that the cup holds all of your breast. If you are spilling out, it is too small. If you have "overhang" it is too small.

Next, take your right hand and smooth the skin of the left breast into the cup. Do the same on the other side.

Stand up straight and see how the straps fit and feel. They should be comfortable without feeling like a vice. Adjust as needed until perfect.

Now, look straight ahead into a mirror and make certain that each nipple is in the CENTER of each cup.

Adjust the back of the bra so it lies smoothly between your shoulder blades.

Take a deep breathe, how does it feel?

A word about brand names. Not every manufacturer cuts the same way, that is true of bras as well as clothes. You might be a size 34C in one brand but a 34D in another. And there may be some brands you can't wear at all.

BRA DO's & DON'TS —

Do get measured again every time you lose or gain weight, after a pregnancy, or if you are on hormone replacement therapy.

Don't ever buy a bar without trying it on and stay away from the sale rack.
Unless there is a brand and style there that you wear, pulling one off the rack because it is marked down is no bargain. Chances are it will have a long and happy life in your lingerie drawer.

Do buy an under wire style if you are full breasted and need firmer support.

Do buy a minimizer if you want to have a large breast appear smaller.

Do try one of the new soft cup bras that offer construction for a smaller breast. (Soft cup means sans under wire.)

Do throw away any and all bras that hurt you or are uncomfortable, no matter how much you paid for them.

Important points to remember
Ask a salesperson to measure you but let your eye and your body be the ultimate test. A bra shouldn't ride up, dig into your back, or slip off your shoulders.

When trying on a bra in a store, take several, in various sizes, into the fitting room. The difference between a 34 and 36 might be one hook.

For the best fit, your bra should be fastened with the middle hook.

Reevaluate your bra wardrobe at the beginning of every season.

If you find a bra that you love, by all means buy more than one.

Never put a bra in the dryer.

2006-02-11 Illustrations

Symptoms Of Hormone Imbalance In Women

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Symptoms of hormone imbalance in women may begin as early as the late twenties to the forties. Symptoms of hormone imbalance in women tend to increase as a woman ages, especially if ignored in the earlier years. Hormone imbalance symptoms can be any one or more of the following:

� Allergy symptoms
� Depression, fatigue and anxiety
� Endometriosis
� Fibrocystic breasts
� Hair loss and facial hair growth
� Headaches, dizziness and foggy thinking
� Low sex drive
� Osteoporosis
� PMS
� Urinary tract infections and incontinence
� Uterine fibroids
� Weight gain, water retention and bloating
� Wrinkly skin

Symptoms of hormone imbalance are caused primarily by the incorrect relationship between progesterone and estrogen levels in the body. The two female hormones, estrogen and progesterone, exist in a delicate balance. Variations in that balance can have a dramatic effect on your health, resulting in symptoms of hormone imbalance. The amounts of these hormones that the woman's body produces from month to month can vary, depending on factors such as stress, nutrition, exercise and most importantly - ovulation or the lack of ovulation.

In the first 10-12 days of the menstrual cycle, only estrogen is produced in the female body. If ovulation occurs, then progesterone is produced by the ovaries. On day 28 or so, levels of both hormones drop, resulting in menstruation. However, if ovulation did not occur, you can still have the menstrual period, but the estrogen is never "balanced" by progesterone, which needed ovulation to trigger its production. And this results in symptoms of hormone imbalance appearing - you have estrogen but progesterone production drops to very low levels.

In the industrialized countries, women take birth control pills, are exposed to household chemicals at home, car exhaust and other environmental xenoestrogens. In addition, women often have stressful lives, eat processed foods or skip meals, take synthetic estrogen HRT (hormone replacement therapy) and have hysterectomies. All these factors can add more estrogen to the female body, resulting in excess estrogen which will cause hormone imbalance symptoms.

How can a woman tell if she is experiencing hormone imbalance symptoms? An easy, fast and effective way is to take the online test provided by a leading womens health clinic for early signs of menopause and symptoms of hormone imbalance in women. The online test takes just a few minutes and is free. Learn more about your health, symptoms, what the symptoms are telling you and what to do about it based on your answers to important questions. Read more about hormone imbalance, estrogen dominance symptoms and physician-recommended natural treatments for eliminating the symptoms of hormone imbalance.

Copyright 2005 InfoSearch Publishing

2006-02-11 Illustrations

How To Choose A Wrinkle Treatment That Really Works

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

It happens to most of us as we enter our mid-30's and early 40's. We look into the mirror one day and see a face we don't recognize. Sure we noticed those crow's feet in our mid to late-20's, but when did those few crow's feet become a face full of wrinkles? To make it worse, we live in a society where youth is worshipped. Instead of being proud of our graying hair and wrinkles and the wisdom that comes with them we start searching for the fountain of youth.

When we are young our skin contains a wonderful protein called elastin. This is what keeps the skin firm. We also have robust amounts of a protein called collagen which strenghtens our skin. Over time, with aging and with outside influences such as sun exposure and smoking the elastin in our skin actually degenerates. Collagen production slows. This causes the skin to get thinner and impedes moisture entering the skin.

With hundreds of different wrinkle creams available on the market today, and some that cost literally thousands of dollars how do you choose? Some of these high priced products tout that it takes them months to prepare one batch of their wrinkle cream, so it's only available in very limited quantities. Does this appearance of "exclusivity" mean a product will work? Does high cost guarantee results? Unfortunately, the answer is no.

There are as many different ways for a product to work as there are products. Some of these products produce the immediate effect of reducing fine lines and wrinkles through the use of light. By putting the product on your face you actually deceive the eye by preventing the eye from seeing the shadows that form from wrinkles, hence the skin appears smoother. Some of these products contain hyaluronic acid which is a substance that helps to hydrate the skin by holding in water which helps to make the skin appear plumper. Some new anti wrinkle creams are like botox in a bottle. They use ingredients that help to relax facial muscle contractions.

How do you choose? The first rule of thumb is to stick with well known and established products. Get whatever samples you can. Some creams are very heavy and not suitable for use in hot and humid weather and you might not like the feel of them on your skin. Ask if you can use the product for 30 days with a money back guarantee if you don't see results. Don't believe the claim that you have to use a company's entire product line to see any results. Most companies have made a fortune with "add-on" products like cleansers, toners, and serums. The moisturizer and the serum are usually the highest priced products. Buy only the moisturizer. You will get the best bang for your buck from the moisturizer as it is used over the entire face as opposed to the serum, which is generally only used on trouble spots such the area around the eyes and lips. If you find you like the moisturizer then try the cleanser, and so on. Read up on the product. There is a wealth of information on line and many sites such as consumerhealthdigest.com have already done a lot of the work for you by evaluating many wrinkle creams to see if they live up to their claims.

Ultimately, the best thing that you can do is take care of your skin from the inside out. We're all stuck with whatever genetics we have but you can help yourself by not smoking, drinking lots of water and eating a healthy diet. Avoid the sun at all costs and use a moisturizer or foundation with SPF protection every day. Have a monthly hydrating facial. After your first several facials you'll definitely notice an improvement in the appearance of your skin, no matter what wrinkle cream you use.

2006-02-11 Illustrations

Stretch Marks: Prevention And Treatment During Pregnancy

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

More than half of all pregnant women will develop stretch marks during their pregnancy. Otherwise known as striae gravidarum, stretch marks look like streaks on the surface of the skin, and may be vary in color depending on your natural skin color. Most lighter skinned women develop pinkish stretch marks, whereas darker skinned women tend to have stretch marks that are lighter than the surrounding skin.

Most women develop stretch marks on their abdomen during pregnancy, however it is also common to get stretch marks on the buttocks, hips, breasts and thighs. In some cases up to 90 percent of women have stretch marks on some part of their body as a result of pregnancy.

What Causes Stretch Marks?
Stretch marks form when your skin is stretched rapidly as happens during pregnancy. Most women develop stretch marks during the later trimesters of pregnancy though some women start to develop them as soon as their bellies start growing.

Stretch marks are actually small tears that form in the tissue that supports the skin and helps it stretch. Stretch marks represent the tearing or separation of collagen from the skin when tearing occurs. Stretch marks are not harmful or painful and usually fade over time.

Who Gets Stretch Marks
Many women believe that using lotions and creams help prevent stretch marks. Realistically speaking however, the number of stretch marks you get depends on how elastic your skin is. The elasticity of your skin usually relates to your genetic make up. The best thing you can do is find out if your mother got bad stretch marks during pregnancy. If she did, you are probably more prone to stretch marks than other women.

Keep in mind the more weight you gain during pregnancy the more likely you are to have stretch marks. Normally the skin is elastic and capable of stretching quite a bit, however for some women the changes that occur during pregnancy are very drastic. These rapid fluctuations of weight and skin stretching can result in stretch marks.

Women with multiples are more likely to get stretch marks because their bellies usually grow much larger than women with single pregnancies. Other women likely to develop stretch marks include women who gain a lot of weight quickly during their pregnancy and women who carry big babies.

Here are some other factors that may contribute to your susceptibility to stretch marks:

* If you developed stretch marks before (like on your breasts during puberty) you are more likely to get stretch marks while pregnant.

* If you had stretch marks during another pregnancy you will usually get them again.

* If you are overweight or gain more weight than recommended you are more likely to get stretch marks.

* The better hydrated and well nourished you are the less likely you are to develop serious stretch marks.

Stretch Mark Prevention
Most women believe that they can prevent stretch marks by using creams and lotions. There are many formulations on the market today that claim to help prevent stretch marks. Some of these may help moisturize your skin and reduce itching. They may help reduce some stretch marks however there are no scientific studies that support this.

You probably know at least one parent however that swears by cocoa butter or some other formulation to prevent stretch marks. If nothing else rubbing these creams into your belly provides your unborn baby with a light and comforting massage. They may also give you peace of mind knowing you did everything possible to prevent stretch marks.

The best thing you can do to minimize stretch marks aside from using any creams or moisturizers you select is gaining the recommended amount of weight during pregnancy. Doctors recommend most women gain between 25 and 34 pounds. Gaining much more than this can cause you to develop more stretch marks.

Removing Stretch Marks
Most women worry about stretch marks after they have their baby. Fortunately most stretch marks do fade with time. Usually after 12 moths postpartum most stretch marks are light and less noticeable. Their texture may remain different from the surrounding skin however. Many women notice their stretch marks fading into whitish lines that are minimally noticeable.

Some women have very severe stretch marks that impact their self esteem after pregnancy. There are many treatments available for women that want to improve the appearance of their stretch marks.

If your stretch marks are particularly bad, you may consult with your doctor or a dermatologist. Some topical treatments such as tretinoin cream can help reduce stretch marks. These creams must be used after pregnancy however, because they can cause defects in your unborn baby.

Most of the topical treatments available should be used shortly after delivery, before they start to fade. The more time that passes between the delivery and use of cream, the less likely they are to be effective.

If you are breastfeeding it is important you consult with your doctor before using any stretch mark treatments. Some treatments may impact your milk supply or pass through the breast milk to your baby.

Most of the creams available to reduce stretch marks do not help relieve the sagging skin that also accompanies childbirth. There are some newer treatments including laser treatments however that may improve the skins elasticity and help reduce stretch marks. Some women also consider plastic surgery after they are done having children. A tummy tuck can help hide some stretch marks and reduce sagging skin.

Most women are able to joyfully overlook stretch marks when they consider the miracle of life they bring into the world. For the most the small annoyance even the worst stretch marks bring are well worth the joys of bringing a newborn baby into the world. Do what you can during pregnancy to maintain an appropriate weight and try not to worry too much about stretch marks. Many women wear them with pride, a �war wound' or «badge of honor» related to their pregnancy. Why not wear them with pride?

2006-02-11 Illustrations

Fibromyalgia Facts For Females

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Fibromyalgia is one of the most common diseases affecting the muscles, tendons, and joints in women. Many health care professionals still do not recognize the condition as a disorder, most likely, because x-rays, blood tests, and biopsies often show no prevalent evidence to support the patient's complaints. However, in recent years, the use of thermographs, a device that tests and measures the heat produced by areas of the body, has helped diagnose the condition. Studies indicate that fibromyalgia patients have decreased blood flow and decreased skin temperatures in sites of tenderness. Symptoms include long-term muscle soreness, muscle stiffness, sleeplessness, fatigue, mood changes, anxiety and depression. Often times the condition is worsened by stress and weather changes. Unlike other rheumatic conditions that cause swelling and inflammation of the tissues in the body, fibromyalgia does not cause any type of joint deformity or does not damage any internal organs.

Many times, patients that suffer with fibromyalgia have other conditions or disorders that will occur. One of the most common disorders associated with fibromyalgia is TMJ, a disorder associated with the jaw. Many sufferers of fibromyalgia may be diagnosed with Chronic Fatigue Syndrome, as well. Some patients complain of migraine or tension headaches, irritable bowel and bladder syndromes. Some women may develop a loss in memory and concentration. Fibrocystic Breast Disease and Endometriosis is often present in women that have fibromyalgia, although there has been no studies conducted regarding the correlation of the two.

Causes of this condition is still unknown, many experts are researching the relationship between menopause and fibromyalgia. Most women are diagnosed with this condition between the ages of 40 to 55 which is when menopause usually occurs, and approximately 85%-90% of all reported Fibromyalgia conditions are women. Hormonal changes, such as the decreased amounts of estrogen in the female body, may contribute to symptoms like anxiety, depression, and sleeplessness in fibromyalgia patients. Research shows, however, that estrogen and progesterone replacement therapy is not that beneficial to fibromyalgia sufferers. There are mild benefits reported when using the estrogen patches rather than the estrogen pills. Some studies indicate that the low thyroid function and decreased levels of thyroid hormones, as well as estrogen and progesterone hormones, may contribute to muscular pain, fatigue, mood changes, and anxiety. At the present time the correlation between menopause and fibromyalgia is uncertain, due to the lack of research on the subject. Fortunately, more tests are being conducted to find out how declining estrogen levels affect the onset of fibromyalgia. On-going research is being conducted that may suggest abnormally low levels of the hormone Cortisol, which is the hormone produced by the adrenal gland may also be a linked cause.

Unfortunately, there is no way to prevent this disorder or completely cure it, either... Therefore, most treatment's center on conquering the symptoms associated with fibromyalgia. Treatments for women suffering from fibromyalgia vary according to symptoms. In some cases, physical therapy or light exercise may be prescribed. Research has shown that the use of ice immediately following any exercise may decrease muscle and joint pain. The use of tricyclic anti-depressants usually used in treating depression; has also been shown to be an effective medication for treating firbromyalgia. These medications usually relieve depression, anxiety, reduce fatigue, and restores effective sleep patterns. Some physicians may prescribe local injections of analgesics to the sore or stiff areas. The use of pain-relievers and muscle relaxers has both been beneficial in reducing pain symptoms and improving sleep. Often times, doctors will discuss pain and stress management to their patients; which can eliminate some symptoms of the disorder.

Diet plays an important role in the prevention of symptoms concerning fibromyalgia. Eating organic foods, such as fruits and vegetables; increasing the intake of low-fat, high fiber foods; those high in Omega-3 Fatty acids, found in fish may benefit sufferers. Some physicians suggest lowering sodium rich foods or eliminating additives such as monosodium glutamate (MSG's) and artificial sweeteners, like Aspartame may relieve many symptoms of fibromyalgia. And recent studies indicate the use of a vegan diet may help alleviate symptoms. Alternative treatments, specifically in the field of homeopathic remedies, suggest taking magnesium, B-12 Vitamins, and Vitamin C.

Other non-medical treatments involve massage therapy, heat therapy and cold packs that may temporarily relieve symptoms. The use of Hydrotherapy or water therapy can increase circulation and decrease muscle aches. Currently, there are studies being conducted that may offer more treatments or one specific treatment for helping relieve fibromyalgia symptoms.

Women suffering with this disorder may find themselves withdrawing from society due to the pain and anxiety associated with fibromyalgia. Many times, women find themselves unable to work a physical or stressful job. The best advice is to seek treatment and maintain a healthy lifestyle, which includes light exercise, good eating habits, and staying active in both, work and life.

2006-02-11 Illustrations

Are Obese Women Getting Short-Changed By Chemotherapy Treatments?

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

How much chemotherapy does an obese woman need? Typically an obese woman with breast cancer would receive reduced doses of chemotherapy as they battle breast cancer. Back in June of 2005, a study published in the Archives of Internal Medicine concluded that obese women should receive chemotherapy based on their actual women, and not in reduced as amounts as it the standard practice.

And now again a study presented in the August 2005 edition of Lancet claims that doctors should not reduce chemotherapy doses for obese women when no receptors for the hormone oestrogen have been found on the breast cancer cells. This type of cancer is called oestrogen-receptor negative.

Clinicians often reduce chemotherapy doses for obese patients because of worries about how the treatment may react with the patient and affect their overall health.

According to the study's director Marco Colleoni of the European Institute of Oncology, Italy, and his colleagues, reducing the first course of chemotherapy for obese patients with oestrogen-receptor negative breast cancer proves «detrimental».

Colleoni and his team looked at the relation between body-mass index (BMI), chemotherapy dose reduction, oestrogen receptor expression, and outcome for pre-menopausal women with breast cancer by examining data from four randomized trials.

They found that 97 out of 249 obese patients received less than 85% of protocol specified dose during the first course of chemotherapy compared with patients with normal and intermediate BMI.

Obese patients with oestrogen-receptor negative disease that received 85% or more of the first protocol specified dose had significantly better disease-free survival and overall survival than those who received less than 85% of the normally recommended dosage.

Yet, obese patients with oestrogen-receptor positive breast cancer who had reduced doses of chemotherapy did not have a significant difference in their outcome compared with those given the recommended chemotherapy doses.

And contrary to popular practice, the researchers also noticed that obese patients initially treated with protocol doses of chemotherapy did not have more toxicity than patients who received reduced doses.

Dr Marco Colleoni concluded that, «Our findings suggest that for women with ER-absent or ER-low tumours, reduction in chemotherapy dose should be avoided.»

The message for obese women coping with cancer is to be aware of your risks and rights. Ask your doctor will she recommend lower doses of chemotherapy for you based on your weight and ask why.
Resource: Lancet, Archives of Internal Medicine

2006-02-11 Illustrations

What Is Endometriosis And What Are Endometriosis Stages?

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

What is endometriosis and what are the endometriosis stages? These are frequent questions since nearly 7 million women in their twenties to forties in the USA alone are affected with this painful and life-altering condition. The pain, cramping and other symptoms that can accompany the endometriosis stages can range from mild, to moderate, to so severe that the woman can hardly function day to day.

What is endometriosis? Endometriosis is defined as the abnormal growth of endometrial cells that spread to areas in the body where they do not belong. Endometriosis tissue islets or implants can grow in the fallopian tubes, within uterine musculature or the outer surface of the uterus, the ovaries, pelvic organs, colon, bladder and the sides of the pelvic cavity. As the menstrual period approaches and begins, these implants swell with blood and bleed into the surrounding areas and tissues. The problem is that there is no place for the tissue and blood to go, and the result is inflammation and pain.

What is endometriosis and its causes? While the causes of endometriosis symptoms are unknown, it appears that high estrogen levels in women contribute to having endometriosis. Endometriosis is more common in the industrialized countries, and women in the USA have the highest levels of estrogen of any country in the world. It often runs in families, and endometriosis incidence is higher in women with poor immune system function. Emotional issues are often involved as well in women with endometriosis. And in all these causes, hormonal imbalance is a common theme among the various factors.

What are the endometriosis stages? According to Dr. Stanley West, reproductive health physician and author of "The Hysterectomy Hoax", the American Society for Reproductive Medicine has categorized endometriosis stages into these stages:

Stage One - few endometrial implants, most often in the cul-de-sac in the womans pelvic area.

Stage Two - mild to moderate levels of endometrial implants affecting one or both ovaries.

Stage Three - moderate levels of endometriosis with implants in several reproductive areas, perhaps in one or both ovaries.

Stage Four - the most severe of the endometriosis stages with widespread endometriosis implants throughout the pelvic area. The more widespread the endometriosis, the more likely fertility problems will be experienced.

Anyone wanting to know what is endometriosis should learn more about the natural approaches recommended by naturopathic physicians and avoiding more drastic measures such as hysterectomy. Endometriosis ceases to be a problem after menopause, but menopause may be many years away. Although endometriosis is a difficult condition to treat, there are steps any woman can take to reduce the suffering that comes with the various endometriosis stages.

Understand the consequences of hormone imbalance, how excess estrogen levels in the body happen, how to reduce unhealthy estrogen levels and the critical role that natural progesterone performs in helping women regain and maintain hormone balance. If you or someone you know is asking about what is endometriosis and what are the endometriosis stages, read about the successes of Dr. John Lee and other physicians using natural progesterone in reducing endometriosis symptoms and helping women get their health and their lives back again.

Copyright 2005 InfoSearch Publishing

2006-02-11 Illustrations

Eating Disorders And The Use Of Yoga In Prevention And Treatment

Sat, 11 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

It was not so long ago that eating disorders, such as bolimia and anorexia, were thought to be purely the result of mental conditions. More recently, though, some physical factors have been attributed to these conditions. It is now thought that eating disorders can be triggered by a multitude of factors, in combination, including those of a psychological, behavioural, social, or biological nature.

How Can Yoga Help With Eating Disorders

As with many conditions, eating orders can better be dealt with through a calm and focused mind. Depression and low self esteem are problems often associated with eating disorders, and Yoga can help with both.

It has been proven that Yoga can reduce depression, restoring a state of balance and well being in the individual. Also, there are different yoga practices which encourage heightened levels of self esteem, and promote a positive view of your own body. These are crucial factors with eating disorders, and it has been shown that the application of yoga can significantly increase recuperation and healing. Through the elimination of self judgment, yoga establishes a strong connection between mind and body. This, of course, is the natural state of wellness. By re-establishing this strong connection, mind and body will work in harmony to repair the damage.

Regular yoga practice will increase the overall fitness level of the human body, improving the immune system and giving it a good chance of fighting illnesses. This is helpful with Anorexia, for example, because the sufferer's body will experience lower energy levels, and the condition reduces bone density.

In dealing with eating disorders, the yogic system identifies them as a problem related to the first chakra. There are different yoga poses that can be used to balance it: eg. staff, crab, full wind, and pigeon. By using grounding postures (eg mountain, goddess, standing squat and prayer squat) strength and courage can be increased. What these postures do is to re-establish the strong mind-body connections, and through that connection help overcome many physical obstacles. For anorexia sufferers, most of the yoga back bending poses help reduce depression, while forward bends can calm the spirit and reduce anorexia's effects.

Because the mental state has an important role in eating disorders, meditation can be used successfully to reduce negative and harmful thoughts and feelings. An active, well targeted, meditation practice should prove to be very effective. The yoga poses work best when external factors are shut out, and concentration is allowed to focus on your inner self. Giving special attention to breathing, and also to inner sensations, will transport you to a state of greater awareness and calmness. This new state will allow you to go on further to explore new concepts, and hopefully pursue new goals that may have been impossible before.

As with many medical conditions, being aware of the bulimia or anorexia problem, and showing a constant and strong desire to defeat it, is a great method to reduce their effect. It is likely that an early adoption of yoga practices would make the patient more aware of the problem, thus making a positive contribution to an early cure. However, these yoga techniques are more usually used in the recuperative stages of the illness. That is a pity because, as with all illnesses in which it can be beneficial, yoga works best in the prevention stage, when the negative effects are still low and easier to over come.

2006-02-11 Illustrations

Bali gets the heat back

Fri, 10 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

After a desperately slow business pace last year in related to the second bomb attack, Bali is now taking the heat back. Bali is experiencing a near-record in hotel and flight bookings for upcoming Christmas and New Year holidays, reflecting a never ending interest to the repeatedly voted the world best island destination. Even the ousted Thai Prime Minister Thaksin is taking his pre-Christmas holiday in the Island. The local flag carrier Garuda Indonesia operating ten daily services from Jakarta to Bali is fully booked for Christmas — New Year period. They even have added an extra 2,000 seats to meet the high demand. Local private airliner flying Jakarta — Denpasar route confirmed similar situation. International routes flied by Garuda are also hiking up. Flights from Japan to Bali are almost fully booked while there is still six weeks away to the season. Singapore Airlines which operates three daily return services between Singapore and Bali confirmed their optimism in getting double-digits increase, compared to the last year, in number of passengers traveling from Singapore to Bali for the upcoming Christmas — New Year holiday seasons. Leading hotels in Nusa Dua and Kuta are in average recorded 85% of occupancy for the period, the remainder will be well sold in the upcoming weeks. The surge does not only affect those popular areas. Matahari Beach Resort at the north shore, with prices soaring up to $466 expects a full house. The new style of holiday accommodation, private villa rentals, has started identifying the surge even well before. Villa Rental Bali, one of Bali leading holiday rental agents representing virtually all the luxury villas on the island, confirms that large private villas, especially beachfronts are well booked. "We started running out of villas since two months back, especially the large ones with four bedrooms or more. Exquisite properties like beachfronts and those at Uluwatu clifftop booked out even earlier. Most are aftering anywhere near Seminyak, however, as none are any longer available, we start sending guests to remote areas like Candidasa and Amed" confirmed Wisna Wedhana, the managing director of the agency. "They mostly research the internet and find that options are running out, so they do not really care about price any longer" she continued. Recreation operators are no exceptions. Bali Adventure Tours who has hosted celebrities like Claudia Schiffer and David Beckham, receives thriving bookings both through their website and a wide network of travel agents, for its wide range of activities from elephant safari of taro to adrenaline taking like white-water rafting, paragliding, and mountain-biking. Most holiday makers make between three to seven days. Hotels, mostly those with Russian clientele expect longer stays. However villa rentals show different pattern. Clients stay in a range of seven days to two weeks. "Mostly ten days, but some go up to a month" confirms Villa Rental Bali. Any plan to make a holiday in Bali? Hurry up, both flight and accommodations are running out quite quickly. For those thinking of villa accommodation, only small private villas with one or two bedrooms are still available, if you come in large group, the chance is hosted in a number of small villas next to each others in a complex, or Villa Rental Bali still has a beachfront four bedrooms villa at Amed, scuba diving capital of Bali. Get in touch with them at Villa Rental Bali www.villarentalbali.com

2006-02-10 Illustrations

Mexico's Tourism Sector "Sports" an Active Edge

Fri, 10 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

The numbers and revenue show that sports enthusiasts are increasingly traveling to Mexico to get their hearts pumping and muscles moving. Both amateur and professional athletes are contributing to the ever-continuing expansion of Mexico's sports tourism segment. Many sports benefit from Mexico's natural beauty and unique backdrops, a fact not gone unnoticed by professional sporting event planners. Mexico has recently hosted many high-profile international sporting events, including Rip Curl's Pro Search surfing event, part of the Association of Surfing Professionals' Men's World Championship Tour last June, and the PGA's 2006 Champions Tour's Puerto Vallarta Blue Agave Golf Classic last March. Upcoming events include the yearly Mexico City International Marathon in August. Amateur athletes and sports lovers are also helping to spur Mexico's sports sector growth. 2005 enjoyed robust numbers, with sports activities pumping approximately US$1.27 billion into the national economy. Several high-grossing sports activities which contributed to the impressive overall figure. - In 2005, 600 thousand golfers traveled to Mexico, generating $400 million. - Triathlons attracted 36 thousand travelers to Mexico, who in turn generated US$6 million in 2005. - In 2005, diving and relating activities produced US$200 million in revenue. - Sports fishing reeled in $500 million in 2005. Bright future forecast for sports tourism The increased popularity of Mexico's sports tourism sector echoes travel developments on a global scale. The World Tourism Organization predicts that sports tourism will be the second most important travel segment by 2020. Sports tourism's bright future recently prompted Mexico Tourism Secretary Rodolfo Elizondo to underscore the importance of developing this segment during a national sports tourism conference. "Sports tourism plays an important role in the evolution of Mexico's tourism industry. As we continuously improve infrastructure and sports tourism offerings on both a local and regional level, Mexico's position as a sports tourism destination will be solidified, more jobs will be generated and we will attract investors," he said. Elizondo went on to mention that Mexico's active support of the sports tourism sector is part of Sectur's strategy to diversify the country's tourism offerings beyond its already-successful products like sun and beaches, nature tourism, and cultural tourism, among others. About the Mexico Tourism Board The Mexico Tourism Board (MTB) brings together the resources of federal and state governments, municipalities and private companies to promote Mexico's tourism attractions and destinations internationally. Created in 1999, the MTB is Mexico's tourism promotion agency, and its participants include members of both the private and public sectors. The MTB has offices throughout North America, Europe, Asia and Latin America. FOR PRESS ONLY: For additional ideas, help with a story or general travel and tourism information about Mexico, please contact the MTB's North American Press Room directly at 1-800-929-4555, by e-mail at northamericanpress@visitmexico.com, or visit our press Web site at www.visitmexicopress.com. To access an online warehouse of free, downloadable b-roll, visit www.thenewsmarket.com/visitmexicopress. # # # Erick Laseca Mexico Tourism Board 312-228-0517 x14 erick.laseca@bm.com

2006-02-10 Illustrations

Malta Holidays - Rumours Hit Tourist Island

Fri, 10 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Holidays in Malta could be off the list of destinations offered by major tour operators from next summer, according to press reports.

While nothing has been confirmed yet, it has been reported that at least one of the tour operators is seriously considering withdrawing Malta as one of their destinations, and the fear among Malta hotel owners and those in the holiday industry is that once one holiday company pulls the plug on the island, others will follow, relegating Malta from a mainstream holiday island offered by major travel agents to smaller specialist companies.

But First Choice Holidays, winner of the 'Holiday Company of the Year' travel award in 2002, 2003 and 2004 and one of the UK's best known holiday companies have told one independent Malta travel guide that despite being named in the Malta press as the company most likely to do so they have never said they were pulling out of the Malta holiday market, but did admit that the Malta market was 'increasingly difficult' to sale.

Malta has been struggling for some years to adapt to the modern traveller, but government figures released for March showed a year on year drop in tourists of nearly 10 per cent, and most worrying of all was that the number of tourists arriving from the UK, Malta's main market, fell by over 13 per cent, and visitors from Italy, a market the Tourist Office had been trying to cultivate also fell.

Holidays in Malta and the related tourist sector are a major source of employment in Malta, and with unemployment running at over 8 per cent any fall in tourists could spell long term damage to the island's economy.

Another sector of the economy that could suffer with the Malta holidays market is real estate.

Property in Malta has risen in price in recent years, and 2004 saw Malta achieving the highest increase among the EU countries, with speculators buying property in Malta in the hope that joining the EU would see Malta real estate increase in value in the short and medium term.

Tribune Properties, who specialise in Malta Real Estate, view the potential downgrading of holidays in Malta as a double edged sword.

Managing Director Michael Johnson says that many Malta property buyers do so after visiting the island on holiday, and liking it so much they want to move to the island full time, while others who normally stay in hotels in Malta want to buy a property they can buy for their own and family holidays in Malta, and see buying a property in Malta as an investment for the future that they can enjoy too.

With less people taking holidays in Malta, the number of potential buyers will fall too.

Silver Lining

While Malta hotels and the tourist industry in Malta wait anxiously for news, the withdrawal of major tour operators from the island might not be all bad news.

There has been some discontent on the island about the rising prices of property in Malta, and with less overseas buyers the possibility of prices falling and more islanders being able to get on the property ladder could be welcome news.

In addition to lower property prices, YourMalta feel that projections of a collapse in the island's holiday market if tour operators did withdraw could be exaggerated.

'While the loss of the tour operators bringing tourists to the island is significant, in time the island will be less reliant on their business as more and more people make independent travel plans through the internet, and book their flights and hotels in Malta independently of traditional holiday companies.

Malta tends to attract the older tourist, so it might take longer than somewhere like Ibiza for example which attracts a younger visitor who as a group are more internet friendly', states Managing Director Roger Munns, 'but in time when the internet is seen as the primary source of booking a holiday across the age range, Malta will stand as much chance as anywhere of attracting tourists.

There has been speculation for some time now that low cost airlines are going to start offering flights to Malta, and this will help the Malta hotels and holiday market as more people consider three and four day breaks instead of the traditional week or fortnight, boosting the overall number of visitors, especially if Air Malta and the low cost airlines bring the cost of Malta flights to levels seen for the Spanish islands.

With an ineffective promotions board there is plenty of hope still for the holiday market in Malta, despite and not because of the Malta Tourist Authority, who are failing to promote Malta in the UK in any meaningful way.'

2006-02-10 Illustrations

A Quick Guide To Making The Most Of Your Maui Vacation

Fri, 10 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Maui is one of the world's most famous vacation spots because of its beautiful beaches and landscapes. To make the most of your Maui vacation, plan ahead to enjoy some of the many unique attractions the island has to offer.

Try something out of the ordinary ? how about a spelunking expedition in a lava tube, followed by a picnic in the Hala region? Several touring agencies in Maui use Limo-Vans, and limit tours to between six and eight people. Expert state guides lead the tours, with a variety of tours available, so there?s something for everyone.

This also may sound inviting, try the Maui helicopter tour and have the opportunity and the advantage of viewing the beautiful Garden Island from the air, these helicopter touring agencies offer a variety of tours that cover all the major points in the island of Maui. They can even let you have a quick look of neighboring Molokai if you want.

Boat charters offer great adventures that you can experience in Maui like snorkeling, fishing, and whale watching. One of the destinations preferred by tourists is the Molokini, and the charmingly named Turtle Town. Both of these spots offer some of the world's best snorkeling. Charter boats can also transport you to the waters where the humpback whales swim.

Perhaps you?d like an exciting ride down Mt. Haleakala, a dormant volcano. The route for this adventure is entirely up to you, from 10 to 38 miles long down the mountainside. Professional guides escort you, of course, and the tour company will provide you with the equipment you?ll need, including a mountain bike, safety helmet, windbreakers and gloves. And since the ride starts above 10,000 feet, you'll need cold-weather gear, because even paradise on earth can get cold.

Touring Mt. Haleakala via horseback riding is another adventure offered. Your tour guides will tall you all about Haleakala?s history and geological makeup, and about the flora and fauna native to Maui. The Kapalaoa Cabin Ride and the Ka Moa O Pele Junction Ride take you miles into the wilderness, providing you with unique experiences all day long.

Or perhaps you'd like to experience Maui?s underwater world firsthand. Aboard a 65-foot, fully air-conditioned submarine, you can descend 125 feet to see fascinating exotic fish and other marine life. The sub's crew will explain how the ocean is so much a part of Maui's rich culture.

There are even more exciting adventures that can help you make the most of your Maui vacation. This is just a taste of what?s to come.

2006-02-10 Illustrations

How To Book A Maui Vacation Package

Fri, 10 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

The island of Maui, also called the Valley isle, is the second largest island of Hawaii. It has a population of 120,000 on an area of 1,886 square kilometers. Maui is separated from the Island of Hawaii by the Alenuihaha Channel, and separated from Molokai by the Pailolo Channel. The island's world-class waves make Maui one of the best vacation spots in the world.

Once you're ready to plan your Maui vacation, there are two options. You can look for travel agency that offers good deals on Maui vacation package, or you can save yourself the time and aggravation of finding the right agent by searching the Internet. Most travel agencies now have their own websites, so you can search for a package that fits your budget and then book your vacation from the comfort of your own homes.

The details of your Maui vacations package will depend on how many days you want to spend, the accommodations, and the activities you want to enjoy while in Maui. Travel websites offer detailed overviews of the best destinations, including information on shopping and tour packages.. You can find the best rates for nice hotel rooms or even vacation rentals if you'd like to rent a house just walking distance from the beach. They often offer discounts if you book your vacation through their websites.

In addition to information on accommodations and airfare, online travel agents offer tips for planning organized tours of the entire island. Or you can plan every step of your trip yourself, choosing the parts of Maui where you want to spend most of your vacation. Not only will you find travel agencies online but also tour operators who offer reasonably priced day-trips around the island as well as full guided land tours, eco-tours, sailing tours, and helicopter tours around Maui.

Booking a Maui vacation package online is not only very convenient, it's easy on your budget and budget saver; it is also a time saver. You can take advantage of the services of a professional travel agent, allowing them to do most of the legwork for you, but you still get to plan your vacation while sitting comfortably in front of the computer. So if you want to book a Maui vacation package with ease, start by searching on your browser.

2006-02-10 Illustrations

Top Five Vacation Rentals On Maui

Fri, 10 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Vacationing in Maui, as with any vacation, requires a good accommodations so that you can enjoy a peaceful rest after a day of adventure. Many vacation rentals in Maui offer great views of the island's magnificent landscapes and beaches.

These are considered the top five vacation rentals in Maui:

The Hale Red Palms is a private cottage offering the best of both worlds in Lahaina. You'll have easy access to a local beach, and Hale Red Palms is just a walking distance from old Lahaina town ? it's like having your own private home in a quiet residential neighborhood. It's the perfect self-catering hideaway in Lahaina with all the modern conveniences.

The Valley Isle Resort, located on the best part of Kahana Beach, is between Kaanapali and Kapalua, about seven miles north of the historic whaling village of Lahaina on West Maui. They offer an all oceanfront rooms, tropical grounds, courtyard pools and a barbeque area exclusively for the use of the condo guests, plus lots of free parking with shops and restaurants within walking distance.

Maui Kaanapalis Villas is located north of the famous Black Rock on the Kaanapali Beach, and offers a wide variety of fine resort amenities. The air conditioned condominiums are clean, bright and very well furnished, and the resort features a pool, beach concessions and shuffleboard.

The Hale Mahina Beach Resort is a four-story, low rise complex . Located between the Kaanapali and Kapalua Resorts, this oceanfront condominium property features beautiful tropical gardens. You can relax in the resort's oceanside pool or jacuzzi, or snorkel and swim off the beautiful beach located just steps from your private condo. All of the condo units are fully equipped and magnificently decorated.

The Royal Kahana Resort is a beachfront property offering air-conditioned rooms and sweeping ocean views. They spacious studio and one-bedroom or two-bedroom units designed for modern living. Each unit's unique floor plan offers views of the Molokai Island and the Lanai Island from your bedroom and your own private lanai. Enjoy swimming in the warm waters, watching the beauty of a Maui sunset, barbeque and playing tennis on lighted courts. You can exercise and use the sauna in the ?guest only? fitness center, or walk to several shops and restaurants in the area. The Royal Kahana is a true Hawaiian resort, from its extensive oceanfront lobby up to the flickering tiki torches. They say that staying at Royal Kahana makes you fell like royalty.

Any of these Maui vacation rentals will provide you with a memorable vacation experience, whatever for preferences or budget.

2006-02-10 Illustrations

Travel To Philippines: The Prized Archipelago

Fri, 10 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Somewhere in Southeast Asia between the Philippine Sea and the East China Sea, east of Vietnam, south of Taiwan and just north of Indonesia, lies a much neglected but historically and ecologically prized archipelago known as the Philippines. This understated cluster of 7,107 islands is the perfect tropical getaway balanced with just enough colonial cultural intrigue and undulating urban energy to keep you going. Despite the country's somewhat turbulent recent history, the Philippines has reached a level of stability making no better time than now to travel the wonders of the island-nation.

Colonial Legacy, Indigenous Heritage
The first western encounter with the Philippines occurred when Spain's Ferdinand Magellan arrived in 1521, initiating over 300 years of Spanish colonization. A tremendous amount of today's Filipino population is a fraction Spanish, although a negligible number of residents are completely Spanish. The United States took over colonization in 1899 until the Japanese invasion of the strategic islands during World War II. Following Japanese defeat, the Philippines received its independence in 1946. American cultural and military influence still permeates through island culture, although the last U.S. military base has finally been closed. Original human settlement in the region began about thirty thousand years ago when people crossed then-existing land bridges from Asia. Malaysian and Indonesian settlers joined the fray a few thousand years later to constitute a most interesting blend of semi-indigenous cultures still present in the Philippines today. Direct descendents of the first arrivals currently live in the northern province of Zambales.

A Pocketful of Paradise
The nation is divided into three main regions, each with its own metropolitan hub and particular points of interest. Luzon to the north is the most populated region, with the expansive capital city Manila as its main destination. Travel farther north to Banaue where a spectacle of rice terraces had been etched up along the hillside by the Ifugao tribespeople over 2000 years ago. Also, don't miss the truly isolating beauty of Hundred Islands National Park where you may just find a beach all to yourself, as there are literally hundreds to choose from. The central region of Visayas is mostly smaller island clusters and famous for Boracay Island's White Beach and surrounding resort and aquatic activity areas. Make sure to explore the island's less crowded, but just as white-and-turquoise beaches. The southernmost region of Mindanao is home to Davao, the largest city in the world by land area, and the stately Mount Apo, the Philippine's tallest mountain. Enjoy a thrilling river rafting trip in Cagayan de Oro or get back to basic Filipino life in the Tiruray Highlands where the remote shores of Lake Sebu are peacefully inhabited by the T'boli tribe.

While the Getting's Good
With nearly 40,000 kilometers of coastline, a fantasy-like landscape of tropical greenery, and world-class cities offering world-class cuisine and lifestyle, it's hard to imagine that this puddle-jump in Southeast Asia will remain a secret for long. See for yourself why the Philippines is one of the last remaining gems of biodiversity and indigenous culture in this ever-growing region of the world!

2006-02-10 Illustrations

Travel To Cancun: The Ultimate All-Inclusive Vacation Destination

Fri, 10 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Cancun is Mexico's premier resort destination, far outshining the role that Acapulco had once played for North America's top holiday vacation nation. If images of white sand beaches, clear blue water, jet skiing, scuba diving and lounging by the pool aren't enough of a draw, add to that image sensational nightclubs with larger than life shows and a plethora of ancient Mayan ruins and you have a sense of what the Cancun experience is all about.

Jutting into the Caribbean Sea, Cancun rests at the very tip of the Yucatan Peninsula on land that was commonly used as refuge for seafaring pirates. The resort town was built in the mid 1970s in close proximity to, and in some cases on top of, prized ancient Mayan ruins. The main drag is a string of beautiful Art Deco and high-rise hotels followed by a series of nightclubs ranging from exclusively posh or fantasy-like industrial to warmer more intimate discotequas with their own local groovy flavor. Regular 24 hour taxi service to and from anywhere in town makes choosing your accommodations almost as simple as booking your flight on cFares!

Ruins, Not Ruined
Although simple mention of Cancun alone evokes thoughts of extravagant parties and spring break benders, make sure to take it easy enough so that you may enjoy a day trip to the surrounding Mayan ruins with a clear mind and an appreciative attitude. The most famous ruins are at Chichen Itza in the center of the peninsula. Inhabited from 445 BC to 1204 AD, then mysteriously abandoned, these ruins are centered about a pyramid with steps that culminate at giant serpent heads. Visit during either of the equinoxes and the shadows will appear as though a giant snake is descending the pyramid. Closer to Cancun, Tulum is also a popular Mayan destination that overlooks the turquoise waters of the Caribbean. The Temple of the Frescoes has an ornamentally painted interior and the Temple of the Descending God is adorned with remarkably intricate bas-relief carvings. There are at least ten other major archeological sites accessible from Cancun by tour operators, and a few recently discovered minor ruins in the hotels' very own midst.

Cancun, and Then Some
If beach bumming, water sports and overall paradise make you a bit restless, there are more than enough excursions to engage in once you find yourself on the sandy white beaches of Cancun. On a daily basis, seasoned guides lead eager hikers into the jungle to discover where the wild things live. Also, horseback rides are available along the coast and up into the mainland. A short ferry or plane ride away is Cozumel, Mexico's largest Caribbean island and one of the world's hottest spots for scuba diving, not to mention you can find a few private companies who offer swimming with dolphins. If true escape is what you're looking for, Isla de Mujeres is your answer. Fifteen minutes from Cancun by boat, this small tropical asylum is a peaceful retreat from resort life on the mainland. Cycling is very popular around the island, as well as snorkeling and chatting up the occasional pirate that passes through. Take a peek at the mysterious stone statuettes of semi-clothed women left by the Mayas.

Cancun is clearly an easy number one choice for any beach vacation. Families, singles, couples and teens should feel at ease and at home in this Yucatan dreamland that Mexico has made into an all-encompassing, all-inclusive care free environment with the vacationer's desires right at their fingertips! Look no further for the perfect escape, because you've found it when you travel to Cancun.

2006-02-10 Illustrations

A Costa Rican Fairytale: Beauty And The Beach

Fri, 10 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

A Costa Rican Fairytale: Beauty and the Beach
Costa Rica literally translates into "Rich Coast," so named by Columbus for the gold necklaces worn by the native people when he arrived in the early 16th century. However misleading the name might have been for gold hunters, it appropriately describes Costa Rica's copious coastline, which is an endless paradise for surfers, scuba divers and those in need of tranquil relaxation.

Costa Rica is also a bastion of political tranquility, which has historically marked the country as an attractive destination for Central and South American travelers. Not a single gun-shot was fired when Costa Rica earned its independence from the Spanish Empire in 1821. Democratic development progressed after independence and in 1949 Costa Rica become the first country in the world to abolish its army, setting a historic precedent for other democratic nations in the region.
Spider Monkey Around
Without a military budget, Costa Rica has had the luxury of allocating a considerable sum toward systems of wilderness conservation and cultural preservation. Over 25 percent of the nation's territory, rich with biodiversity, is protected by national parks. While basking on the Caribbean shores, visit Tortuguero National Park to witness the most important nesting site of the endangered green turtle. If you are lucky, you may also get to see the giant leatherback turtle (the largest known turtle at an adult weight of 1,500 pounds!) nesting in the park's sand. Gain some elevation and venture through temperate forests until you come to Chirripo National Park, which protects Costa Rica's tallest peak. Scale the winding trails of mysterious cloud forests while spider monkeys swing from the trees and sloth lurk in the undergrowth as you get closer to the rainforests of Corcovado National Park along the Pacific Ocean. Observe jaguar roaming along the waters' edge while over 360 species of bird rustle overhead. Nature surrounds you when you travel to Costa Rica.
Urban Creatures
If you've had your fill of all things wild, Costa Rica's cities and towns will not relent on mesmerizing their visitors either. The capital city of San Jose is a fast-paced cosmopolitan playground and the beating heart of Costa Rican life. The remains of coffee baron mansions have been transformed into a splendid backdrop for boutique hotels and restaurants. The National Museum has a few of the nation's mysterious stone spheres on display, the origin of which is still up for debate today. For an unbeatable resort experience, visit the Gulf of Papagayo along the northwest coast. From intimate hotels and cabanas to luxury resorts, these beautiful beaches are a prize view from any perspective when you travel to Costa Rica.

You should need no other reason to travel to Central America other than the quintessential natural beauty of Costa Rica. The backdrop of peace and all-around serenity make Costa Rica a true gem among the countries of this tropical region.

2006-02-10 Illustrations

Phuket Island Attracts Millions Of Visitors Every Year

Fri, 10 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Every year, the island of Phuket attracts millions of visitors, with it's beautiful beaches and scenery. In the past, the island derived much of its wealth from tin production, which began in Phuket over 500 years ago. Patong, across the island from Phuket Town, is the noisy nightlife centre of the island with great beaches and facilities. On the other hand, the area to the south of the island (Phuket City today) was developed and became a tin trading center. But Phuket is much more than just a holiday island. We will hand-hold you through finding that dream property on beautiful Phuket island, and through the entire Thailand real estate buying process. Mainstream media also failed to explain enough that much of the damage on the island was distant from Phuket's main beaches. Our new Phuket edition is free to the public and available at an increasing number of distribution points throughout the island. Buses are also available to Phuket town and all major holiday destinations and beaches on the island. The airport on Phuket island is a well-equipped little airport, the staff is friendly and immigration officers are very efficient and work fast. Half of those killed were foreign tourists visiting the island of Phuket and surrounding resort areas. Thailand%u2019s largest island, Phuket is incredibly diverse, with rocky and sandy beaches, tall cliffs, forests, waterfalls and temples. Boats can be chartered to go to some small island south of Phuket. See the Phuket beaches page for an overall map to the main beaches and towns of the island. A comfortable Phuket hotel for groups, families and company meetings or large conferences. For detailed Phuket hotels information or to make a reservation, select a hotel and let asiahotels.com be your Phuket travel agent. You can look at Thailand best hotel prices and book the best hotel in Phuket. Book your Phuket hotel stay safely, securely and without worries. Set in its own tropical gardens, the phuket hotel boasts three magnificent pools and sundecks for soaking up the glorious sunshine over Phuket. Read Phuket hotels descriptions, reviews by former hotel guests or place your own Phuket hotels review. You can look at Thailand luxury hotel prices and book the luxury hotel in Phuket. Book your hotel in Phuket before you leave home and save money! Our hotel is one of the best-valued vacation resorts in Phuket. The location of the hotel was also great in relation to the nightlife in Phuket. We returned to Phuket at about 2.30 and we were taken back to the hotel. Find and reserve the right Phuket meetings hotel for your group today. http://www.phuketdiary.com/

2006-02-10 Illustrations

Manila, Philippines

Fri, 10 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

The Philippines has recently gained itself a bad reputation due to all the political on-goings in the country. Clashes between rebel forces and the government, rumors of coup, status of emergency declarations, and even suspected links to the al Quaeda ? no wonder some Western governments cannot help but release travel advisories against visiting this country.

Before you decide against a trip to Manila, you should bear in mind that the newspapers do not always give an accurate picture of a situation. Sensationalism is their business, and sensationalized news is what you usually get.

Manila is located in the northern island of Luzon. The terrorist stronghold is located in the southernmost part of the Philippines ? two big islands away ? in Mindanao. The status of emergency was indeed declared but civilians basically continued to live their normal lives even as it was in place.

It is very easy to get around in Manila. The jeepney is the Philippines? most common form of transportation. It is actually based on the US Army jeep but is longer and fits about 16-20 people. You can also get on buses, the Metro Rail Transit, and hire cabs. Language is not a major problem as even the people on the streets can speak rudimentary English.

Manila is well-known for its nightlife. You can find bars open until 3 or 4 in the morning. The Makati and Malate areas are where you can find the hottest clubs and bars. Makati is a bit more expensive but safer as well.

Malls abound in the metro. You can find anything from designer brands to nondescript but very cheap brands. Food is not a problem. Filipino food, American fast food, Japanese food ? you can find anything there.

Filipinos are very hospitable by nature. You will be surprised at how friendly and helpful most of them are. It?s actually a different form of racism ? they seem to treat Caucasians in a much better way.

Cost of living and traveling is so much lower than in western countries. So if you have dollars or euros, chances are you will have no problems availing services that meet your standards. Hotels and other accommodations are abundant and easy to find.

If it is the beach you want, then you can opt to go out of the city. The nearest beach can be reached in about 4 hours from the city. You can take a plane to other parts of the country if you want to see more.

Whether you are traveling alone or with your family, Manila is a good place to visit. It will be a rich cultural experience for you.

2006-02-10 Illustrations

10 Ways To Find The Best Price On Hotels

Fri, 10 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Planning a trip has become increasing difficult as there are so many options to choose from. After finding a hotel that suits all your needs you need to ascertain whether you are getting a good rate. When you ask a travel agent or refer to a brochure for rates what you get is the generally quoted rate for room. But if you are wise you can get a better deal and save a lot of money. 1. Surf the net and see what online travel sites like Expedia, Hotels.com, or Travelocity are offering. Or you could browse the hotel web site to find a good deal. Many sites list special offers as well as discounts. 2. Use a search tool to like BookingBuddy.com or Travel Axe to compare various offers and rates. 3. Look for what is known as "lowest rate guarantee" these are mainly on offer online but are subject to advance booking and very harsh cancellation policies. Even if the price offered online is attractive do call the hotel up and see if they are willing to better the rate. 4. Opaque-pricing travel sites like Hotwire or priceline do offer good rates for good hotels. The only downside is you cannot specify a hotel. All you can do is indicate where you want accommodation. The reservation needs to be made online and is non refundable and one cannot change plans or cancel. 5. Consider purchasing an Entertainment book discount for between US$22 to 45. Becoming a member entitles you to discounts of 50% on the rack rate of member hotels. But these discounts are only available when the occupancy rate of the hotel is less than 80%. Check out the great options at: http://www.entertainment.com/discount/home.shtml. 6. Ask about weekend rates. Often hotels that cater to business travelers have great rates on what they consider off season, weekends. 7. If you plan your trip well in advance you could get a discount of 50% or more during off season. 8. Some hotels have special rates for members of AAA, American Automobile Association and other professional bodies or clubs. Call the hotel of your choice and ask them if they do have such schemes. 9. If you are traveling in a group ask about group rates or family rates. Most hotels have different options for multiple bookings. Some even offer a day or two additional stay at no extra cost. 10. When you leave the airport or railway station or just drive in to a town stop at a gas station and find out if they have hotel coupon booklets. These many a time have great offers for visitors. To get the best deal you need to be thorough as well as flexible. Just as you spend time sourcing air tickets at bargain prices you can do the same for hotel bookings. Read all travel offers carefully, set aside any discount booklets your bank or credit card company sends you for use when you travel. If you are smart you will save quite a lot.

2006-02-10 Illustrations

Maui Fun For Everyone

Fri, 10 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

There is literally something for everyone in fabulous Maui. If you are planning a trip to this Hawaiian island than it is likely you already know about the many great things there are to do in Maui. There is literally fun for the entire family and there are many activities to choose from and sights to see.

If you are an active person, you can find Maui activities to keep you busy. If you?re a beach bum, there?s no better place to go. If you prefer to relax in a spa or resort, Maui has plenty of those as well. There are fine places to shop, to eat and even historical places to visit. You can enjoy a luau with authentic Hawaiian good and much, much more. There is literally Maui fun for everyone!

See below for an overview of some of the many different places to see and things to do while visiting in Maui.

See a Volcano

Have you ever been to a volcano? Maui has the world?s largest inactive volcano, Mount Haleakala.Called the ?House of the Sun? it is a sleeping volcano whose base it big enough to cover Manhattan! That?s right; it?s over 10,000 feet high. Any volcano is impressive but this one is truly amazing.

There are places where you can tour and hike in the craters and much more. This will certainly be something to write home about! Get pictures of yourself in the volcano and share with friends and family.

The Valley Isles

Maui is known as the ?Valley Isle? due to the two volcanic mountain ridges that go on the east and west coasts of the island. Maui is the second largest island of Hawaii and it measures 48 miles long and 26 wide, offering some 728 square miles of paradise to enjoy.

Maui has everything you'd expect from Hawaii, including lovely beaches, warm tropical waters, a fascinating history, high mountains, lush green valleys, fantastic waterfalls and sugarcane fields stretching to the horizon. It is a true tropical paradise for anyone of any age.

Activities

The island is full of many activities no matter what your style and physical fitness level. One favorite activity is golf and there are tons of resorts and courses to choose from. Maui is one of the most beautiful places on earth to golf and there are locations that are perfect for you whether you are new to golf or have been playing your entire life. There are also many affordable package deals you might be interested in.

You can go sailing, surfing or swimming in you enjoy the water. You can spend some time just tanning on the beach sipping tropical drinks, visiting the many shops and stores that are located on the shores. You can go shopping and buy authentic Hawaiian pieces or other souvenirs. You can visit many historical and nature sights all over the island as well.
Underwater Adventures

Many of the activities to do on Maui are underwater related. There are is the Maui Ocean Center to learn first hand all about the underwater life of Maui and you can also find places to go SCUBA diving or snorkeling. You can watch the whales come in to mate during the right season and you can also go fishing, dolphin watching and much more.
Dining

There are some fabulous choices for you when it comes to dining on Maui. There are literally hundreds of restaurants to choose from all with different, varying but delicious menus. Whether you want a simple, quick and cheap meal or eloquent dining at its finest, you will find a place that meets your needs on Maui.

Some of the finest chefs in the world have come here to Maui to enjoy the opportunity to cook in restaurants on this fabulous island. You can take advantage of this culinary delight and enjoy many different types of foods while you are visiting Maui.

Tour the Island

There are actually many different ways to tour the island. You can enjoy it by land, sea or even air. There are hikes, bicycle tours, driving tours and more as well as tours by plane and helicopter. You can go sailing, boating, parasailing, parachuting and almost anything else you can think of. There are so many different ways of getting a new and different view of the island of Maui.

Whether you are coming alone, as a couple, as a family, for business or any other reason, you will love Maui and you are sure to find something to keep you content and busy. In fact, you may find it really hard to do everything in one trip and you will likely want to come back to Maui again as soon as possible.

2006-02-10 Illustrations

Maui For Couples

Fri, 10 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

If you are looking for a great romantic vacation idea, then look no further than Maui. You probably already know that there are many great places to see and things to do on this fabulous, romantic island. Just think about it; sun, sand and surf all with the one you love right by your side. What could be better?

Whether you are planning on proposing to your sweetie on a magical Maui getaway or having a Maui wedding or honeymoon, or just taking a much needed luxury vacation with the one you love, you can find accommodations and more on this great island. In fact, a Maui wedding or proposal package is probably more affordable than you may have thought.

With the beautiful, exotic scenery, it is no surprise why Maui is considered such a romantic place and the island has played up on that fact to give you even more reasons to love Maui. There are couple?s resorts designed and tailored to meet the needs of couple just like you. The hotels are outfitted with larger beds, elegant bathrooms with Jacuzzi tubs and breathtaking views from the windows. You can order champagne or wine in your room and in some places; even meals specially prepared and brought to you.

If you are looking romance your sweetie in Maui, you might be wondering what different options you have and what you will do while on the island. All of Maui is beautiful and Hawaii itself is quite romantic but there are resources to help you make this trip extra special even if you are not a natural romancer.

Book a Couple?s Package

There are couple?s packages that include a ceremony for proposal, vows or renewal of your vows. Maui is a great location for newlyweds or those that have been together a lifetime. The scenery is beautiful and there are many different activities for you to take part in as a couple.

There are also packages that include dining, shows and more for couples to enjoy the full Maui experience together. If you are planning your couple?s trip to Maui, one of the first things you might start looking for is the accommodations. You can look into a Maui travel package which will help you get everything you need in one lower, more affordable price. It?s also easier when you know everything is included in a travel package, You can spend less time worrying about if you got everything covered and more time just enjoying each other.

If price is a concern for you, you will be happy to know that there are many Maui couple?s packages that are very affordable and you can get all inclusive hotel and travel accommodations that meet your budget. However, to be sure you are getting what you want, you will want to ask your travel agent or planner questions about available packages before you select one to be sure it includes everything you need and want.

Booking everything in a package deal typically gets you a great price and it also ensures you don?t forget anything important or wind up short at the last minute. The sooner in advance you can book your paradise trip, the better it will be for you as well. You have more time to try to get the best rates and more time to ensure you get a slot in the resort or hotel of your choice.

A Maui Wedding

If you decide you want to be married on the beautiful shores of Maui, there are many different options for you. You can book a wedding planner from Maui that specializes in weddings on the island and is also able to get you a great deal on your services and other needs. But even if you are planning the wedding without a wedding planner, there are many facilities and resources to help you. Join the millions of other happy couples that have been united on the magnificent Maui.

Package deals get you a traditional non-denominational Hawaiian wedding, a Luau and reception, a Hawaiian lei ceremony, assistance with your license and even your accommodations if needed. There are affordable package deals that literally cover all your wedding needs.

Some other vacation package ideas that are great for couples include the Indulgence Spa Getaway, Wellness Escape Spa, various romantic resorts and even the small bed and breakfast bungalows. You have so many places to choose from, you are sure to find one that suits your needs.

Choosing to get married or celebrate your honeymoon here in Maui is a guarantee you will make memories that will last a lifetime. It?s also a fantastic destination choice for a second honeymoon or just a great couple?s getaway. You can start planning your lover?s retreat right away!

2006-02-10 Illustrations

Top 10 Things To Do On Maui

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Are you planning a trip to Maui? You are not alone if you are one of the many people that want to see and visit this beautiful and amazing island. The second largest island on Hawaii, Maui is cram-packed with things to see and do. Time and time again it has been chosen as the best island in the world and it?s no surprise why.

If you are going to Maui, your question will not be of what to do but instead of what to do first? There are so many great sights to see, things to do, places to go and more that you might feel you can never see and do it all in one trip. (Maybe this is why so many people make repeat visits to Maui).

1. Go to a Luau ? You can?t visit Hawaii without seeing a luau and Maui knows how to do them right! Even some of the hotels that you might stay at in Maui have great beachside luaus as well as restaurant and resort package deals. Luaus will feature authentic Hawaiian food such as kalua pig, poin and haupia (coconut pudding) and usually a buffet spread of more familiar foods.

2. Go biking- If you don?t mind some physical activity, you should see Maui from a bike. In fact, there are few places in the world that are as bike-friendly as Maui. There are even bicycle tours that let you go from one end of the island to the other. There are downhill bicycle tours and slow-paced tours that let you see the farms and small towns of Upcountry and the beaches down at Paia. There are places all over the island of Maui for you to rent bikes.

3. Fine dining- There are fine places to eat and dine all over Maui. In fact, this island has the best dining in all of Maui. Many fine, experienced chefs from all over the country and even the world have come to Maui to work their magic in the restaurants here on the island. There is literally a restaurant for every taste so whether you like to experiment and try a bit of everything, or whether you are strict in your eating habits, you are sure to find plenty of great places in Maui.

4. Hiking- Another great idea while in Maui is to go hiking. There are fabulous trails that take you literally all over the island. You can even hike in the great craters such as the Haleakala and you can see waterfalls, plunge pools and much more. There is a hiking trail for everyone- no matter what your physical fitness level. Get ready to see Maui by foot!

5. Go for a drive- You would not believe some of the fantastic scenic drives on Maui. The Hana Highway is a 56 mile stretch of 54 bridges over winding lava shore, through old plantation towns, past miles of beaches and through towering forests. You might also want to take a drive to the summit of Haleakala. Haleakala crater appears like the surface of an alien planet and the views of Maui from the summit are amazing.

6. Go for a dive- Maui is the best place to visit the underwater world of Hawaii. There are many different locations for diving and there are two marine conservation areas. Molokini is a partially submerged volcanic crater offshore of Wailea. Both Lahaina and Ma?alaea have glass bottom boats and a pleasure submarine to let non-swimmers share in the beauty of underwater Maui as well.

7. Whale watching- You might already know that Maui has many beautiful and amazing sights that you can?t see anywhere else in the world. But have you ever been whale watching? From November through April each year, Maui welcomes the humpback whale and you can join in the celebration and catch some whale-watching of your own. The endangered species comes here to Hawaii to mate and it?s truly a sight like no other.

8. Shopping- Where would your vacation be without some fabulous shopping? With so many shops and stores to choose from, you simply can?t see Mau without leaving with some fantastic souvenirs. There are also many shops in Maui that contain specialty items unique to Hawaii and Maui such as one of a kind jewelry, glass work and more.

9. Sightseeing- You can?t visit Maui without enjoying the many great sights there are to see. There are many historic locations such as Lahaina, old Hawaiian churches, the whaling history museums and much more. There is so much to learn about the island and so much to see, you will wonder if you have enough time to do it all!

10. Swimming and Snorkeling- Well of course since you are here at the island, you must go swimming. Even if you are not an avid swimmer, you can take a quick dip and get your body wet. Or you might enjoy snorkeling at one of many great locations. Maui has over 80 beaches and over 120 miles of coast to choose from!

2006-02-09 Illustrations

Go Scuba Diving In Maui

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Do you want to see a side of Maui like never before? Check out the beautiful island of Maui from a different view- underwater! There are many places in Maui where you can go scuba diving even if you have never been before. You can go on a guided tour, learn from an instructor or rent equipment if you don?t have your own. Below is more information about snorkeling and scuba diving in Maui.

Diving Trips

There are many different diving trips for you to choose from if you are staying in Maui. Many places offer small group SCUBA trips to at least two different destinations on each day of the week. Set out with other divers on a fully-equipped dive boat and enjoy comfortable seating and amenities (such as a bathroom) while you travel to your dive location.

There are knowledgeable crew members and diving instructors that can help you no matter what your level of experience and most dives are very affordable. If you are concerned with price, you might also look into package deals to save you money or go with a group.

There are also many specialty diving opportunities such as diving in caves or caverns. There are special excursions you can take with a professional tour guide to show you sights you probably never dreamed of before.

If you are a novice diver or if you are in a party with snorkelers, then you might want to take a different boat trip or tank dive trip. You will have to contact facilities that offer these to find out all the details. There are also many introductory dives and diving courses for you if you are new to the underwater world.

Snorkeling Trips

In addition to scuba diving, you might want to try snorkeling. There are many places that let you view gorgeous coral reefs and much more as well as the many exotic underwater living creatures of the Hawaiian Islands. Set out on a boat with many other snorkelers whether it?s your first time or you?ve been doing it forever. Head out to a nice snorkeling location such as a coral reef and friendly, knowledgeable crew will help you even if you have never done this before. There are ?boogie boards? available to help you while moving through the water.

Even if you have been snorkeling before, you have likely never seen it like it is in Maui so it is well worth the time to go for at least one day and check it out. Snorkeling usually costs around $50 a day per person but you will have to call actual facilities since prices are subject to change. There are also group deals and discounts that you may be eligible for as well if you call and check into it.

Diving Courses

If you don?t know how to dive, you might want to look into getting some instructions first before you set out to go on a dive with people that know what they are doing. There are also many places that offer diving courses for those of you that may not have even been diving before. You can take classes on all the details of diving as well as go out on a boat with an instructor that will show you exactly how to do everything properly and safely.

If you are looking to find out exact pricing and diving schedules for different resorts and facilities, you will have to call them to find out all of the details. Equipment rentals can vary in pricing according to exactly what you need and what company you go through so you have to call to find out for sure. There are some places in Maui that offer trips and equipment that have their information available online and this may make it easier for you to plan ahead for your trip and find which location you want to use.

If you are going to be in Maui for vacation, you really need to take at least one day to go scuba diving or snorkeling and see the amazing underwater world in person for yourself. You might even want to take along an underwater camera to remember your adventure.

You can check into pricing, dive days and times as well as what certifications they have and what comes in their deals to help choose the one that suits your needs the best.

2006-02-09 Illustrations

Get A Taste Of Ibiza Closer To Home At Bournemouth

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Fancy a beach stag weekend in an Ibiza-like atmosphere that?s close to home? In this case, Bournemouth in Dorsett is the closest to your preference. What is it that makes Bournemouth so unique? While Bournemouth was previously branded as a blue-rinse paradise, this destination is currently populated with bars and clubs, all located within close proximity and thus turning this city to popular stag weekend destination.

However, stag weekends in Bournemouth are not all about night activities. There are lots to do in the daytime here as well. In fact, Bournemouth is also a popular team building event destination, with group packages available just for this purpose. For instance, activities such as the Mexican Railway and Ground Action Learning Tasks are some of the team building activities that can be organised by a corporate event organiser such as Chillisauce.

Other than that, your Bournemouth stag weekend will be short of exhausting as you are provided with a platter of daytime activities to choose from. Be a spy for a day as you enroll in the Spy School at Bournemouth. Learn how to use spy equipment, drive like a spy and more importantly, shoot like one!

If this is not extreme enough for you, learn how to be a Hollywood stuntman instead. Discover how knock-out scenes are done through hands-on workshops, and learn the secrets of firing semi-automatic and automatic guns in a movie setting.

Do you long for an exhilarating time in the water? Your Bournemouth stag weekend will not be complete if you don?t try out the 3 ? hour speedboat wakeboarding session across Poole Harbour. Show your stuff to the other lads as you are pulled by a 310hp Mastercraft, one of the fastest wakeboarding boats around.

End your stag weekend days with a wholesome session of night partying at the various pubs and bars lining the streets of Bournemouth. If you are up for more exclusive evening activities, you can bring the stag to a Bournemouth casino and gamble away at the variety of Blackjack, Roulette and Stud Poker. Otherwise, opt for a cocktail making session with lessons conducted by experienced bartenders, as well as cocktail games that would be fun for the lads.

2006-02-09 Illustrations

Philippines Travel: Exploring Sagada On A Shoe-String Budget

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Urban dwellers would normally prefer to rove around the metropolis and explore every side-street in search for ideal refuge, more than traveling to remote provinces. However, there are more than 7,000 reasons to explore the parameters of this archipelago, taking into account its profuse land and marine resources and myriad sanctuaries.

Among the many interesting regions in the Philippines is the mountainous terrain and savanna in northern Luzon as inscribed in the UNESCO World Heritage List. Part of this region is Sagada. With a measly P2,500, a determined explorer can take a fulfilling jaunt to Sagada?a serene mountain community in Mt. Province. The adventurous travelers would customarily take the 10-hour bus ride from Manila to Banaue, Ifugao (via Solano, Nueva Ecija route) that costs not more than P300.

In Banaue, travelers have the option to take the day off and trek along the well-engineered Banaur Rice Terraces or take a jeepney ride to Bontoc and from there, one can catch a bus ride to a more tranquil region, Sagada in Mt. Province.

Sagada has economical lodging houses and hotels to spend the night over. For as low as P200, a traveler can avail of a bedroom for two and a well-scrubbed common bathroom with sufficient amount of water?for an overnight abode. Even though electricity and water are accessible in these highland regions, one of the guidelines in immersing to remote areas is not to expect for urban amenities.

However, the lack of adequate necessities is not an hindrance to any devoted backpacker. Indeed, the remarkable view of the mountains, sight of abundant natural resources, and exposure to mountain community are enough reasons to enjoy the trip.

Trekking along the narrow mountain trails of Batad and Bangaan Villages in Banaue is one of the many leisure options where panoramic views of the terraces can be enjoyed. To keep track of the trail, a number of villagers can be hired for hours as tour guides.

The trip is truly breathtaking and for an amateur trekker, the long hours of walk should not impede them to reach the other side of the trail. There are a number of brooks along the curvy mountain range that are guaranteed to quench one?s thirst during the hours of hike. Meanwhile, the awe-inspiring endpoint is an antidote to muscle pain.

Batad is comparable to realizing the pot of gold at the other end of the rainbow. It boasts of scenic and unspoiled layers of rice fields forming a colossal amphitheater, where native Ifugaos mostly dwell. The terraces is still a functional source of livelihood and personal sustenance for Ifugaos, except for some where irrigation systems have been destroyed through seepage, landslides, prolonged drought, erosion, and other inevitable natural calamities.

2006-02-09 Illustrations

Philippine Travel: When And Where

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

When you?re about to embark on a journey to the Philippines, the two most important questions to ask is ?when? and ?where?. If you?re traveling to the Philippines, do be aware that the experiences you?re about to encounter is unlike anything you?d encounter anywhere else in the world. Each and every country has its own unique experience to offer you and when you travel to the Philippines, you should expect the same.

When Is It Best To Travel To The Philippines?

Are you allergic to rain? If so, it would do you good to avoid traveling to this part of Southeast Asia during the months of June till November as that?s when the occasional typhoon or two makes time to visit the Philippines. Traveling during the rainy season of the Philippines can be quite a hassle, especially if you don?t have a car. But if you do, you could expect smaller crowds to contend with as most people tend to stay indoors.

If you?re unable to take the heat and still be merry, then you should not travel to the Philippines during the months of March till May because that?s officially the summer season of the country. Everyone heads for the nearest beach so if you don?t want to feel crowded when you?re sunbathing, set your travel date for another time of the year. The Easter season is always busy for everyone in the Philippines so expect a difficult time on reserving transportation when it?s Holy Week.

If you?re on the lookout for the world-famous fiestas that only the Philippines could offer, schedule your travel date for January, May or December. The flower season of Baguio ? described as the summer capital of the Philippines because of its perennially cool weather ? is something to look forward to. And then there?s the Santacruzan during May and which each and every town parades its most beautiful residents in a walk around town.

Where In The Philippines Is It Best To Travel To?

There are so many types of places to visit in the Philippines that it?s hard to enumerate each and every one of them. Beaches, however, are one of the most favorite travel spots of the country so if you want to enjoy your stay in a beautiful paradise of clear blue green water and cool white sand, you could check out Tali Beach, the world-famous Boracay or try surfing the secluded beaches of Surigao and La Union.

2006-02-09 Illustrations

Subic Bay Philippines

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

For many centuries, Subic Bay was recognized as a deep safe harbour. Realizing Subic Bay?s potentials, the Spaniards used the bay as a port to defend and maintain the Philippines as a part of their empire in the 17th century. In 1885, it was built into a naval base that utilized the safe harbors and natural resources.

After their victory over the Spaniards in 1898, a naval repair and supply base in Subic Bay was established by the Americans. It was only reachable by sea until 1932 when the zigzag roads were opened linking Subic Bay and Olongapo to the rest of the Philippines.

The Japanese bombed Subic Bay in 1941 and was held by them until the US took back the Philippines in 1945. The naval base was returned to the control of the United States. The two invasions by the Japanese and Americans produced a number of bombed or scuttled naval ships in Subic Bay. Scuba divers from around the world are now enjoying these wrecks in their underwater graveyards.

Control and maintenance of Subic naval base remained under the United States despite the Philippines gaining their independence. The United States was given 99 years free access of the facility via an agreement signed between the Philippines and US. With the outbreak of the Vietnam War, Subic Bay became a strategic site in the maintenance of a strong US presence in Asia.

In 1991, the eruption of Mt. Pinatubo covered Olongapo and Subic Bay with nearly half a metre of ash. After the Senate of the Philippines rejected the renewal of the US bases treaty in 1992, the Subic Bay Freeport was established after the last of the American naval ships completed its pullout of forces.

Since then, Subic Bay Freeport Zone has now become a well-known economic, commercial and tourist hub. It is booming with world class restaurants and duty-free shopping.

Subic Bay is situated in Zambales Province on the west coast of Luzon 120 kilometres north of Manila. Mountains with lush jungles bound its coastal area. Mountains with lush dense jungles, suitable for trekking, surround the coastal area. The bay cuts out into the South China Sea.

Subic Bay brags of interesting wreck dives. It is home to a impressive combination of wrecks. The six wreck sites have an average depth of 45 ft.

Subic Bay boasts of its rainforest and a white sand beach. Its world-class facilities, which include a marina, yacht club, hotels, shopping arcades and food shops, are supported by Philippine tourism. An international airport is another attraction.

2006-02-09 Illustrations

Cancun Beach Being Restored At A Record Pace

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

When Hurricane Wilma swept through Cancun last October the mighty winds stripped away 8 miles of some of the most beautiful sandy beach in the world. Everyone from Mexican President Vincente Fox down to the local residents knew that the beach had to be restored or Cancun's future was in serious danger.

Within weeks the Mexican government pledged $21 million to restore the beach. Now they have made good on that promise, and a massive barge being run by a Belgian firm is working day and night to replace the sand.

The target date to have the brilliant white sand back in place is the end of April, and already the large earth moving machines are smoothing the sand dredged up from the sea bed.

**A long-standing problem

Cancun has some of the Caribbean's most beautiful beaches. But the resort town of roughly 300,000 is perched on the extreme southeast end of the Yucatan Peninsula, looking out into the Caribbean, and too often is directly in the path of hurricanes that come sweeping in from the sea.

The problem of beach erosion existed long before Hurricane Wilma. Local Cancun officials have known for years that the shoreline was eroding and the beach was being washed out to sea. That process was given a boost by Hurricane Gilbert which swept away about half the beach in September of 1988.

One of the positive outcomes of Hurricane Wilma is that it got the government to make the commitment to beach restoration. What seashore experts had been trying to do for more than 17 years, Hurricane Wilma did in a matter of days.

**An essential resource for Cancun

Erosion of coastlines and beaches is a problem around the world, but in Cancun, where it is the very lifeblood of the resort, the disaster of Wilma finally led to serious action.

Cancun consists of three distinct areas. Ciudad de Cancun, the actual town, has a population of about 300,000. Off the beach, the ecological reserve, has incredible lakes, forests and mangrove marshland. And then there's the Zona Hotelera, which is an island where most of the hotels and shopping malls are found.

Cancun is a mecca for tourists from the U.S., Canada, and Europe. It has more than 25,000 hotel rooms, hundreds of restaurants and several hundred shops. There are roads leading to the forest, making it an easy trip to see the forest and remains of ancient local Mayan culture.

Roughly 3 million tourists came to Cancun last year, spending about $4 billion. But Wilma has put a damper on tourism this year. Working flat out, local workers expect that by May, about 90% of Cancun's hotel rooms will be cleaned, redecorated and ready for guests. The restaurants, bars and malls will be reopened, and more than 10,000 new palm trees will be planted along the main streets of the resort town.

The thousands of tourists, who are already starting to return to this famous resort, will be back in droves once the rebuilding and restoration are complete.

2006-02-09 Illustrations

Tips For Travellers To The Tropics

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

I went on my first holiday to the tropics recently. I was afraid of catching a disease, so I did a bit of research, and took some precautions. Here are some tips I found useful.

1. Get your shots.

I spent a short time in areas relatively free of mosquito-borne disease. The key word is 'relatively'. A two week holiday in an urban area is probably alright. If you're staying for months, or in an area flagged as dangerous, get your shots well in advance. Don't leave it until the last minute, as by then it'll be too late! The drugs need some time to 'kick in', and your doctor may have to order them in advance.

2. Get an insect repellent.

I made one for mosquitoes by mixing citronella with olive oil. Citronella is an essential oil (an essence). I rubbed the mixture on all exposed areas morning and night, and after washing. Seemed to do the trick. I put too much oil in, I think, so it smelled a bit. Better that, than being bitten, I say!

3. Wear long sleeved shirts and trousers.

I also wore socks in bed. Give pests no purchase! Mosquitoes are just doing what comes naturally; they need your blood to live. It's just unfortunate that they can pass on parasites when they bite. Deny them a meal, and the only things you'll bring back from your holiday are a silly hat and some souvenir photos. To wear long sleeved garments in bed, you'll need a room with a fan and air conditioning. No need to set them to freezing; just cool, with a slight breeze.

4. Air conditioning.

Air conditioning and fans are supposed to deflect mosquitoes, which is good. Avoid 'going native', and thinking you're as hardy as the locals. They get malaria and dengue as well, be sure of that.

5. Use mosquito nets.

Do what you can to keep them at bay. Paranoia is good!

6. Avoid ice and salads

Ice can have faecal coliforms. It depends on what water it's been made from. Salads can be prepared by low-paid workers who've forgotten to wash their hands. In Muslim countries, they often don't use toilet paper, just a hose, so if the staff haven't been scrupulous about their personal hygiene ...

You may feel self-conscious about refusing. Would you like your holiday to be spoiled by a spell in hospital, in a Third-world country, just for the sake of avoiding embarrassment? People like people who are forthright, so stick to your guns.

7. Don't drink the water.

A country can have a veneer of modernity, but what separates the men from the boys is the sewage system. The tap water may not be filtered properly. Drink bottled water, or water you've boiled yourself. Get a kettle, and boil it up every day, then put the water in your water bottle in the morning. Easy.

8. Drink plenty of water.

A few sips every so often, rather than a litre in one go. You'll save on trips to the lavatory!

9. Stay out of the sun.

There's a reason the locals are laid back; it's too hot to run around like you do at home. Sun tanning is actually skin damage. Due to ozone layer depletion, you may be getting more than a golden tan. Who cares if you don't come back home bronzed? Ladies especially will appreciate this in later years, when their sisters have leathery skin from roasting on the beach. Nothing less 'cool' than a white man with sunstroke, either.

When travelling in the tropics, it's best to be paranoid. I hope you can still enjoy your holiday!

2006-02-09 Illustrations

Planning For Costa Rica

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

When traveling it is essential to plan ahead, so when you arrive at your destination, you lessen the chances of being at a loss of what to do. Knowledge gained from other's travels can be invaluable, especially when planning to travel to somewhere you have never been before. The advice on this page is helpful to everyone planning a trip to Costa Rica.

Money

The money used in Costa Rica is called colons. You can change dollars into colons at the airports in San Jose and local banks. The exchange rates can be from the low 200s to 400s colons for each US dollar. (Now everywhere in Costa Rica you can buy or pay in US dollars, but I think things are cheaper if you pay in colons.) Other ways you might get colons is if you pay for something in US dollars, you will receive change in colons. During my stay at Costa Rica, I once paid a cab driver in US money, and I received change in the local currency. You should also make sure your dollars are not torn. Local banks and businesses do not accept torn US dollars. I tried to exchange a torn $50 bill, and the bank would not accept it!

-Bringing Money

On my trip I brought my money half in dollars and the other half in American Express cheques. When a traveler cheque is used there will be a commission fee.

When to visit/weather

Costa Rica has two seasons ? the dry season and the green season (or rainy season). The dry season is from December to March. The dry season is the busiest time in Costa Rica. Prices are much higher and it is harder to find a place to stay. Now in the green season you will find much cheaper prices. The green season is from April to November. During the rainy season it generally rains for a few hours and then clears up.

Traveling within Costa Rica

Bus ? You can catch one to most parts of the country. There are a few places where the bus comes only once a day though?

Cab ? There are red cabs throughout the country. If the cab driver tells you the meter is broker, just get out. First it is illegal for a cab driver to drive with a broken meter in Costa Rica; secondly he might just be trying to rip you off.

Renting a Car ? You can rent a car, but to me personally I would find driving in Costa Rica difficult, since I?m not from the country and it seems there are a lack of street signs. Also the prices for a car rental can be pretty expensive.

Local airlines ? You can catch local flights to places throughout Costa Rica. They are regularly scheduled and reasonably inexpensive.

Cities and Towns

Cities in Costa Rica are San jose (The Capital) Alajuela, Cartago, Heredia, Jaco, Liberia, Manuel Antonio, park, Pochote, Puerto Limon, Puntarenas, Parismina, and Tamarindo.

2006-02-09 Illustrations

Scuba Vacations

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

For those who have taken scuba diving courses, scuba vacations are the next step to enjoying the treasures of the deep and perfecting their diving skills. In almost every country in the world that is by a warm water coast, there are scuba resorts and scuba vacations just waiting to be discovered. Popular destinations for scuba vacations include:

? Australia
? Honduras
? Tahiti
? Indonesia
? Hawaii
? Galapagos

and many other breathtaking locations. Depending on the time of year and the popularity of the destination, you might be able to find discount on scuba vacations. However, many die-hard scuba divers would rather spend a little extra money for the best quality scuba vacations. Nevertheless, much of that money is spent on fancy food and five star accommodations rather than on the quality of the scuba experience, so it is worth doing some research and take into account your priorities before selecting a scuba vacation.

A popular place to go for a scuba vacation is Montangi Island, which is close to Fiji. It is, however, a bit out of the way, and requires various forms of transportation to get there, but the spectacular beauty of the island and the large lagoon is well worth the trip. The lodging has gorgeous views of the ocean or the lagoon, and the resorts offer free tank refills as well as frequent transportation from the docks to the islands. Local nannies are provided for babysitting, if both Mom and Dad are going scuba diving, and many parents who go on scuba diving vacations to the Montangi Island report satisfaction with the local women as caregivers. The island is located around an extinct volcanic equator and has a striking 440 foot high promontory stretching upward. Many people who come to the Montangi island return for subsequent scuba vacations.

If you are looking for great scuba vacations in the states, try Hawaii, with its many islands and gorgeous locations. The Kauai island is one of the most popular place in Hawaii for scuba vacations. You can choose vacations that focus on other activities, such as tennis and pool swimming, in addition to scuba diving, or resorts that are ?scuba intensive? and provide opportunities for diving daily and sometimes at night. You should take into account your level of experience and be careful not to overstrain yourself; if you are a beginner, you can always warm up to diving and go on more advanced scuba vacations at a later date.

The most sophisticated scuba vacations offer 50 foot luxury speed yachts with doors and ladders designed for efficient entry into the water. The yachts should have an excellent record of safety and have a high ratio of guides to guests. Many of these yacht scuba vacations will last for 7 days, with options to dive every day and also a free night dive. When you are not diving, you can enjoy comfortable rooms, internet, a mini-bar, a laundry service, and other amenities.

Before embarking on your vacation, it is important to consider the focus of your trip. If you are the only person in your family who is interested in scuba vacations, you will want to choose a resort that is geared toward activities besides diving to keep other members of your family amused. However, if diving is a family obsession, you might want to consider dedicating your entire vacation to diving, and choose scuba vacations that focus more on the diving experience than on other activities.

2006-02-09 Illustrations

Irish Island in the Caribbean

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Irish culture is alive and well on the "Emerald Isle" of the Caribbean.

St. Patrick's Day is celebrated as a national holiday in only two places in the world - the country of Ireland, and the Caribbean island of Montserrat. The national flag of Montserrat depicts the legendary female Irish figure Erin playing an ancient Irish harp.

And the green shamrock is stamped on every visitors passport upon entry to the island, and the shamrock is also carved on the door of the Governor's house.

The national dish of the island, Goat Water, also has an Irish origin. It is a stew made of kidney or mutton, and is spiced with cloves and rum.

As you travel around Montserrat, you'll find familiar sounding Irish names such as Kinsale, Delvins, St. Patrick's and Cork Hill on the streets, establishments and towns. And, the islands phone directory lists the generations of the Ryans, O'Briens, Daleys, Sweeneys, Gibbons, and so many more.

You have to go back to 17th century history to find the first origins of this lasting Irish culture. The English defeated the Irish, and sent them to the island of Montserrat to serve as indentured servants, and they worked along side the African slaves.

As the Irish served out their servitude, some migrated to other islands in the Caribbean, but the majority of Irish decided to make Montserrat their home. It was in this period that six of the islands 17th century Governor's were of Irish descent.

Together the decendants of the original Irish prisoners, and African slaves blended a society that maintained the strong Irish influence mixed with the African culture. The present day society is certainly one of the most unusual in the history of the Caribbean islands.

Montserrat is currently making a comeback with tourism. Visitors are surprised to find the island rebounding from the destructive volcanic eruption in 1997 which buried the former capital city of Plymouth in ashes.

While the former capital remains buried, and is an unusual tourist site in the region, the rest of the island offers breathtaking green scenery. Volcanos bring new life, and Montserrat is no exception with its emerald green mountains, exotic dark sand beaches, and pristine reefs just waiting to be explored.

Montserrat, prior to the eruption, was once a vacation paradise for jet setters and movie stars. This island is posturing itself for a renewed tourist industry with a new capital city, and brand new airport. Visitors will find affordable lodging, plenty of restaurants, secluded beaches and a first class diving destination.

This isn't a destination for everyone, but if your idea of a Caribbean vacation is lots of natural beauty, extensive hiking trails, first class diving, uncrowded beaches, and an opportunity to see a former city that is a modern day Pompeii, then the Emerald Green Isle is the only place in the Caribbean that will deliver all that, and perhaps a bit of Irish culture.

2006-02-09 Illustrations

The Affordable But Comfortable Tropical Honeymoon: Tip List

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

The affordable but comfortable tropical Honeymoon: Tip List

1. Schedule your departure day two days after the wedding to give you ample time for rest after the activities and the celebrations. If you must travel immediately, remember to leave in the middle of the day and not the early morning so you'll get a good night's sleep.

2. Ask your travel Agent for honeymoon Packages, these usually offer the best destinations for honeymooners, not to mention discounts and freebies.

3. Never, ever overbook day trips, you're not just traveling, you're with your new Spouse, better save up some energy for the night's fireworks.

4. Don't be afraid to ask questions, ask about certain perks, events.

5. In addition to the above, don't be afraid to request extra stuff, like a big bathtub, a double bed, or a romantic view.

6. Don't forget to bring your marriage Certificate along with you, especially if the name of the bride is already under her husband's name.

7. Pack your camera and lots of film; you won't want to miss anything. You might also want to pack a disposable underwater camera and extra batteries, these are absurdly pricey in tourist spots, and you wouldn't want to overspend.

8. Mention to anyone, especially in the cafe or in the tour boat, that you're on your honeymoon, yes this may sound a bit embarrassing, but some restaurants give extras like free drinks or gifts for honeymooners. This also works for birthday celebrants.

10. If you want an active honeymoon, research and prepare for water sports; the tropics are a great place, to learn them, always remember to consult hubby before you try one though.

11. Stock up on sun protection. The higher the SPF the better, as you'll probably be spending whole days out in the sun; you wouldn't want to get skin cancer after just two weeks of marriage.

12. Some travel agencies include island hopping trips, these are great ways to explore, and enjoy. This is especially good because you'll get a change in scenery, and won't easily get bored, especially if you have an extended honeymoon.

13. Even if your valuables are inside your hotel room, keep them under lock, and if you decide to bring them with you, always watch out for stray pickpockets.

14. Bring with you a stock of candles and massage oils that you can place inside your hotel room for that romantic evening after touring and swimming.

And finally, have some fun, relax and enjoy youself.

2006-02-09 Illustrations

Sydney Beaches for Fun in the Sun

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Whether you're up for a Crocodile Dundee adventure or you'd just like a taste of the Australian sun, the beaches in and around Sydney can offer you all that and more. Being in the southern hemisphere, Australia's seasons are reversed from those in Europe, North American, and much of Asia, so if you're looking for good beach weather, make sure to travel some time from September to May — that is, spring to autumn. The Sydney shoreline encompasses over 200 miles of white sandy beaches, exhibiting a variety of atmospheres from cosmopolitan Bondi Beach to majestic Cronulla. For one Sydney beach, the name says it all — located at Sydney's northernmost tip on an extension of land ending at Barrenjoey Head, Palm Beach lies with the Pacific Ocean to the east side and the Bay to the west. Before checking out the golden sand, take a quick tour of the opulent mansions of millionaires from the art and film industries — many live on this small spit of land. Only about an hour from downtown Sydney, Palm Beach offers a long stretch of clean sand and water, with shops, restaurants, and entertainment at the southern end. With parking near the center of the beach, that leaves the rest of it as a sparsely populated, peaceful location from which you can surf or body board — but take care; without the huge crowds of other Sydney beaches, Palm Beach doesn't afford quite the safety level to be found elsewhere; volunteer lifesavers are on duty only on weekends and holidays. And if surfing's not your style, relax and take in the scenery, or amble up to Barrenjoey Head to see the lighthouse and catch the view across Broken Bay. For the big name beach, Bondi has to be your choice. Parking is difficult to find even on slow days, so consider taking public transport to this world-renowned beach in the eastern Sydney suburbs. Easily accessible by taxi, bus, and rail, Bondi Beach offers sun bathing, swimming, snorkeling, and all sorts of water sports fun. If you're in the mood for a bit of exercise, two scenic coastal walks will afford you great views and sights along the shore. The first, about 1 1/2 miles one way, starts at Bondi and heads south to Bronte Beach. Take in views from Mackenzie's Point, but don't try to swim in Mackenzie's Bay — it holds dangers such as hidden rocks and is not patrolled. Farther on, admire the sandstone cliffs at Hawkesbury and see the aboriginal rock carvings in Marks Park. Next enjoy the quiet charm of Tamarama, a small beach, not as popular or widely known to tourists. You'll finish your walk at North Bronte cliffs, where hopefully the Norfolk Island hibiscus will be in bloom, thrilling you with their exotic smell and colors. Your second option for a scenic coastal walk covers a little under two miles and takes you from Bronte Beach to Waverly Cemetery. Highlights include the Bronte Baths and Waverly Cemetery where many notable Australians are buried, including poets Henry Kendall, Doreothea Mackellar, and Henry Lawson. A bit farther on you'll find Bronte House, open to the public only once a year, but you can still see the waterfall at the top of Bronte park that feeds a charming stream winding its way through Coral trees, Eucalyptus, Norfolk Island Pines and Moreton Bay Fig trees. Another popular Sydney beach is Cronulla, known for its excellent waves and shady trees, the waves seemingly Heaven-sent for surfers and body boarders. The waves allow for every level from beginner to expert, and the golden beach usually isn't overflowing with packed, oiled bodies out for that heavy duty tan. Cronulla also offers sheltered waters for canoeing and kayaking, and jet boat tours will have you gasping for breath as adrenilin pours through your body at the speed with which you travel the seas! Cronulla is also one of the most popular beaches for scuba diving, offering clear waters in which to view marine life the likes of which you'll probably never have the opportunity to see again. Make sure to take a change of clothes, because after an adventurous day on the beach at Cronulla, you'll want to take in the nightlife — restaurants, clubs, cafes, and a whole host of other attractions. Consider Paddy's Irish Bar and Restaurant with its live bands and comedy nights, or just relax at an outdoor cafe and take in a movie at one of the cinemas. Most of the more populated beaches offer a wide range of activities, from theater to festivals and food and wine parties. Restaurants and shops abound, and if you're feeling adventurous, you can charter a yacht, hire a kayak, parasail, hang-gliding, snorkel, scuba-dive...the list goes on and on. Surfing lessons are often available at stops right along the beaches, and you might even end up at Ocean World to watch sharks being fed by hand and applaud the antics of the seals as they perform. Whether you're making a day of it or taking a romantic walk along the sand, remember that Sydney's beaches are each unique and draw different types of crowds. Some draw the tourists with their glorious views of the City Harbor, while others attract surfers and body boarders. Still others are dotted with family oriented picnic spots, and some draw nude sunbathers! No matter what type you are headed for, you'll find enough beauty and tranquility or adventure and fun to dream of Aussie beaches for years to come!

2006-02-09 Illustrations

Maui Vacation Resorts - Which Do You Choose?

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

You've finally made that big decision on where you want to go for your next vacation! Mexico? Caribbean? Europe? Nope...you've decided to visit the number one rated vacation island in the world. Look out Maui, here we come!

Now that you have made that big decision to take a Maui vacation, it is time to decide where you are going to stay. Is there really a difference in the quality of resorts on Maui? Actually, there is a BIG difference between Maui resorts but it's not necessarily the quality of the resorts. Actually, the decision on which Maui resort you pick should be based more on what type of experience you want to have during your Maui vacation!

You need to ask yourself several important questions regarding the type of Maui resort where you want to stay. They are...

Do you want to stay in a hotel or a condo. If you are planning on doing some cooking while you are on your Maui vacation, you will probably want to rent a condo.

Are you going to spend all your time away from the condo and you just, basically, want a place to sleep or do you plan to spend time relaxing at the resort and taking it easy?

Do you want the Maui resort to be right on the ocean or is a short walk to the beach okay?

Do you want the Maui resort to be in a specific location such as Napili, Kahana, Lahaina, Kihei or Wailea?

What kind of view do you want from your Maui resort condo? Do you want ocean front, ocean view, garden view or mountain view?

What is your budget?

Those are just a few of the questions you need to ask yourself before you go on your Maui vacation. Each one of those questions will have an effect how much you pay for your condo! There are other factors to be considered but that will give you somewhere to start.

Most people don't understand that careful planning prior to their Maui vacation can save them quite a bit of money. Depending on the length of time you are planning on staying on Maui, you could save $1,000 or more!

Which Maui resort is the best place to stay? I have been asked that question thousands of times and my answer is always the same. Tell me what kind of experience you want from your Maui vacation and I will tell you which resort would be the best!

Remember, careful planning can ensure you bring back wonderful memories from your Maui vacation. Take the time and effort to plan in advance and you certainly won't regret it!

2006-02-09 Illustrations

Your Own Private Paradise

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

You've battled packed parking lots and frazzled parents desperately seeking an Xbox 360, not to mention your overly inquisitive relatives, now it's time to follow the psychiatrist's... er, doctor's, orders and book a relaxing all-about-you vacation.

But the last thing you want is to surround yourself with boisterous throngs of people. Imagine relaxing beachfront on your own veranda, next to your private pool. Watch the sun rise and set, take soothing walks on the sandy beach, sip pina coladas and dine on traditional local cuisine. Cabo Villas, a division of Earth, Sea & Sky Vacations, have the perfect remedy for winter ailments: private beachfront villas, houses and estates in sunny Cabo San Lucas.

With more than 70 beachfront properties, you're sure to find one to fit your lifestyle and budget. Cabo Villas arranges special onsite services, from chef-prepared meals to spa treatments, to make your escape from the hustle and bustle of daily life complete. Basically, you won't have to lift a finger (that is, unless you need to break up the slush at the bottom of your margarita glass). Each property is unique, lending to a one-of-a-kind experience. The Villa Maria offers unparalleled ocean and mountain views from its hillside location. You'll forget all about the shoving match at the mall once you set foot in one of the elegant hacienda-style rooms, with marble and Cantera tile floors, ceiling fans, and colonial furnishings. Fall asleep in your king size bed with the doors to your terrace open, letting the warm ocean breeze wash away holiday stress. Wake up to the sun rising over the Bay of San Lucas and then head downstairs for a swim in your private swimming pool while your personal chef prepares a breakfast fit for royalty. This 6,000 square foot, 4-bedroom villa (sleeps 10) is available for $1,440-$1,800 a night.

If the holidays really got you down, Villa las Flores offers countless opportunities to undue the damage done by harsh winter weather and cruel holiday shoppers. Watch the whales swim by as you soak off negative vibes in your private Jacuzzi, or enjoy a massage or steam-bath in your master bedroom suite. Forget about overdone rump roast and lumpy mashed potatoes as you savor a gourmet dinner prepared by a chef on your spacious patio, surrounded by magnificent ocean and mountain views. You'll have plenty of room to roam among Villas las Flores- 12,344 square feet. This 7- bedroom estate is available for $1,440 - $2,200 a night.

Finding your own private hideaway is easy. Just log on to www.CaboVillas.com and search their listings- you can even view streaming videos of the properties online and make your reservations right then and there. You'll get all the amenities and prompt service you'd get at a luxury resort, with the benefit of having your own private space. Reserve your villa today.

2006-02-09 Illustrations

Limon Costa Rica

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

The famous east coast of Costa Rica with places like Cauhita, Puerto Limon, Tortugero and Barra del Colorado is a completely different thing then the west coast.

You can fly here or take highway 32 from San Jose and enjoy the amazing scenery while driving. You can drive through Braulio Carillo National Park and straight down to Limon or go north and pass by the Barva Volcano, followed by Puerto Viejo and Sarapiqui.

The temperature stays around high 20s all year but due to rain almost the whole year, the clouds will give some protection from the burning sun.. The best time on the year (to avoid rain) is in February to Mars, and August to October.

You'll find restaurants scattered all along the road if you feel the urge for eating.

Limon is also the place where almost all of Costa Rica's bananas are shipped when exported.

Crime has been found somewhat higher then on the west coast so beware.

The Beaches
Four kilometers north of puerto Limon are two small beaches. Playa Bonita with fine yellow sand, palm trees and some hotels. The water is not perfect for tourists though. Playa Portete has a dock where local fishermen land with their catches. Even further north is Moin where the government built a industrial harbor for freight ships back in the 1980?s. Going south you'll find the most visited place, the beach Cauhita.

Cauhita is a quite large village with many thousands of inhabitants and is a hot target for backpacking tourists. It can be hard to find a rental in Cauhita. White san beaches fringed with coconut palms, a relaxing atmosphere and a calm Caribbean way of life attract a lot of tourists.

There are also several smaller beaches close by Cauhita. Even further south Talamanca is the place to go. Close by are Playa Cocles, Playa Chiquita and Punta Uva.

Sights of Limon
Cahuita National Park. Over 1000 hectares of land with more then 14Km of beaches, all with nice mixes of coconut palm trees, mangrives and dense forrests,Snorkeling is offered all over the coast for those who would like to try it out.

In the south the Gandoca-Manzanillo Game Preserve is of interest. You can visit punta mona (Monkey Point), said to have received its name from Columbus himself.

Also plan a visit to Tortugeros and a trip on the canals. You'll most likely have to set aside 1-2 days for this trip as it is a long way to go. Make sure you bring clothes to change (after rain), insect repellant and clean drinking water and you'll have a much nicer time!

Not only will you find an extreme jungle here, you may also be lucky enough to encounter a sea turtle or two.

Parque Vargas in Puerto Limon with its tall attractive palms and other tropical trees, flowers and animals close to the waterfront is a pleasant way of enjoying the beauty of the tropics.

Eating
The food on the east coast is everything from local specialties, normal Costa Rican food, Caribbean food to French and Chinese. Be aware of the fact that not all food is compatible with all tourists!

Bars & Nightclubs
Night open bars and cantinas can always be found around the central parks in almost all Costa Rican towns. Puerto Limon is no exception. But many of these places in Limon should be avoided by tourists and single women should not be out after dark themselves without company.

Limon with Cauhita is different from other beaches. The much greener water on the Caribbean side of Costa Rica makes a nice contrast to the bluish west coast water.

You'll often find larger waves on the east coast as well.

2006-02-09 Illustrations

Jaco Beach

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Jaco Beach Costa Rica is the closest beach to San Jose, located between two of the most important beautiful countrie park reservations it?s only about 90 minutes on a paved road through lush mountains.

Costa Ricans as well as backpackers, surfers, single travelers and beach party crowds come to Jaco Beach's hotels and resorts to enjoy the exciting things Jaco, Costa Rica has to offer in nightlife. Playa Jaco, Costa Rica is considered one of the most developed coastal towns in Costa Rica.

The main street is where you will find most of the bars and restaurants. Food for every taste can be found in the many bistros.

Jaco beach has amazing things to offer:
The number one attraction is the surf and surfers love the consistent beach break here and in neighboring Playa Hermosa, the active village is full of life at all hours of the day and night, there are souvenir shops, local clothing and artisan shops, ice-cream stands, close to 100 restaurants and bars, four casinos and several discotheques where you can dance until the dawn...

For families, there is even a miniature-golf course, petting zoo and newly developed playground where you can have a blast!

You can rent a car for very reasonable prices and the fact that there are buses that come and go almost every hour, make this town a very popular destination for Costa Ricans and tourists alike.

A major point of attraction of the Jaco Beach is the Carara Biological Reserve: It is a protected area made up of dry forest and rainforest, where you can observe varied species of flora and fauna.

The things to do at Jaco Costa Rica are abundant, an important reason why Jaco tourism is very popular both inside and outside our country.

During the day you can enjoy the beach, one of Costa Rica marinas near Jaco (the biggest in Central America), and the diversity of tours, activities and national parks and reserves nearby. During the night, clubs open for dancing, dining and drinking for 24 hour beach fun you can find at Playa Jaco Costa Rica.

During Christmas and the Easter Week the area surrounding Playa Jaco gets crowded with energetic young people looking forward to having fun. At night you can mingle with the locals and other visitors at a disco, or just walk on the streets and meander in and out of beach clubs, restaurants or nice art galleries and gift shops. Jaco Beach Costa Rica attractions are varied and seem to never end. In the middle of town you'll walk on the main street which runs parallel to the coastline.

There are about ten streets that intersect the main street and run west to the shoreline. Surfers, sunbathers and swimmers all find their tastes met at Jaco Beach.

Also, if you want to explore the area, there are plenty of beautiful beaches in the vicinity, so it's just a matter of grabbing the car, the beach wear and going!

Explore the top Costa Rica entertainment, Jaco Beach area primarily appeals to surfers for the constant waves. Here you will find a variety of surf shops and the town gets bright and active when the yearly surf tournaments come along.

Many North American tourists that have visited the country on a trip decided to stay and started their own businesses here. The shops in this town provide clothing, souvenirs, surfing equipment, and bicycle rentals, anything you may need!
There are also real estate offices, pharmacies and internet cafes all over the place.

Ex-pats, residents and travelers have many services available in Jaco Beach: from nice tourism offices, entertainment venues and beach night clubs; Jaco has fun discos, restaurants and much, much more to enjoy Jaco nightlife.

Jaco Beach, Costa Rica has different professionals offer their services here as well, such as lawyers, doctors and dentists. Some of the bars resemble sports bars back in the U.S., providing TV's with different sports showing all day long. You will also find foosball games, pinball machines and pool tables to entertain yourself with after beach hours.

If you want to win, or spend a few bucks, then you may want to try out the casinos in the area...

Then, after a busy weekend the community comes together and assists in keeping the beach clean.

The town's coastline extends for 2 miles (3 kilometers) surrounded by lush tropical vegetation.

Besides surfing you can go horseback riding with a guide, go on a sports fishing trip or rent an ATV and play around the beach with it or go a canopy tour you will never forget!

Great surfing, beaches galore and a climate perfect for laziness, plus great night life!

2006-02-09 Illustrations

Easy Way To Discover Appropriate Bali Resorts Away From Bustling City

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

People are traveling with diverse desire one want to do business, to meet relatives or for holiday and total relaxation. If you are on vacation alone, couple or with your family and may be boring with the glint and the glamorous of the big hotel or the bustling city, why don?t you choose a place away from the beaten track?

Since few years ago villas or small resort became the popular choice to those who desire and insist to find fully relaxation for body and mind. Bali is a small island in Indonesia Archipelago the ultimate holiday island in Asia famed for its cultures, arts and the beauty of its breathtaking nature prepare you a lot of choice of luxury villas and small resort for self retreat with its best massage and spa treatments using either local ingredients or imported luxurious range of products.

You will be pampered by seaside or mountains breeze during massages and treatments offer exclusive service and expertise of Balinese hands. The superior ingredients and efficacy are used in combination with specially developed techniques to nourish, firm and hydrate the skin while enhancing the serenity and alleviating stress.

Understanding that beauty is not merely skin-deep. The resort usually offer yoga, meditation and stretching just ask to the manager. You can select hotel or small resort situated on the beach facing the ocean or beautiful resort in the countryside near the mountains.

The quickest and easiest way to find hotels or resort or villas at your destination is to go online and visit a hotel reservation or travel agent website. Do a search for the country, island and city you are traveling to and you will be presented with a list of available hotels/resorts in that area. As the wide choice can be confusing ? especially for the first-time visitors and it?s sometimes difficult to select the right Bali Resort. So just let your travel agent knows (by e-mail) your personal needs and your preferences that he can recommend those resorts he feels will suit you best.

For short information I try to present you with some of the nicest and pleasant place to retreat in Bali.

Waka di Ume Resort & Spa.
Boutique Resort is situated at Jalan Sweta, Sambahan Village Ubud about 3 minutes by car from the center of Ubud and 45 minutes from international airport ?Ngurah Rai? Bali. The resort offers very friendly ambience and situated within lush tropical garden and surrounded by a verdant terraces rice field. A real rural atmosphere.

The resort is built in traditional Balinese style using most of local materials like teak and coconut palm wood, stones, the elegant grass thatch roofs (alang-alang) and soft local fabrics. It is combined with all the modern amenities to complete your conveniences. The Resort offers excellent service of room, restaurant and spa.

Waka Gangga Resort & Spa.
The resort offers a fantastic view of the Indian Ocean and the most beautiful sunset (weather permitted). It is located at Sudimara Village Tabanan about one our drive from Bali International Airport "Ngurah Rai" after passing Kuta the way offer the road through an infinity panorama of verdant and fertile rice field. A truly place away from crowd.

The resort built in typical Balinese bungalows within the terraces rice field with the view of the thunderous of the Indian Ocean?s waves at the front and the spectacular view of the Mount Batukaru at the far back. For the total comport the room are furnished with local materials and modern amenities accompanied by smiling Balinese staffs with their most cordial services.

So for everyone who is reading this article and has chosen / will make Bali their preferred holiday destination; my thanks a lot; I am sure you will have the memorable holiday of a lifetime here.

2006-02-09 Illustrations

Golfing In Costa Rica

Thu, 09 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Few places in the world offer the amazing variety of natural beauty and environment Costa Rica can provide. This has made it possible for Costa Rica to allow some of golfs best designers to create an amazing golf experience for its visitors.

The courses are challenging and beautiful at the same time, as they reside close to the dramatic deep blue waters of the pacific coastline as well as close to the green volcanic mountains of the central valley.

Golfers from the US and Canada will find that Costa Rica is very accessible from the whole continent and the prices keeps dropping. Once in Costa Rica you can besides the golfing also enjoy luxury vacations with all inclusive in tropical heavens like Los Suenos Marriot Ocean & Golf resort.

You can also find fine cuisines, hot nightlife and family activities everywhere, so everybody in the family will find their preferred vacation activity among one of the friendliest peoples in the world, the Ticos!

While touring Costa Rica visit and play golf courses like, Parque Valle del Sol with its par 72, 6782 yards 18 hole course. Created by Tracy May or go north to the coast and try out the 18 hole course Hacienda Pinilla, a par 72, 7274 yards beauty created by Mike Young.

Some tips for a better golfing experience in Costa Rica.

Check with your airline to see if they charge excess baggage fee for golf clubs.
The least expensive form of transportation around the country, especially with a lot of golf clubs is to rent a car.
Rainfall is a problem in the late afternoon and evening during the ,green season,. Green season is from mid-May to mid-November, but the months of July and August normally see less rain and generally are beautiful with mild temperatures.
Apply sun block before leaving for the golf course. Use shades and hat.
Golf courses have dress code. The normal requirements are normally golf shirts with collars for men and proper attire for women. T-Shirts, bathing suits and short shorts are not permitted.
Wildlife sensitive areas are common in Costa Rica. Take note of and respect signage for safety.
The saying trees are 90 does not apply to dense tropical trees. Tree lined fairways is an expression that really has been taken to a completely new level here. So stay on the fairway.
When playing at the resort ocean courses, you will have to learn how to play the wind. You have strong winds from the sea almost all year. Use the tree tops to get a feeling for the wind. Want a perfect vacation with wonderful golfing experiences, go to Costa Rica! About The Author

Wally's is a different sort of dining experience, as the restaurant features not only the cuisine of the Bahamas, but also features international cuisine with a distinct French influence. The setting is lovely, though pretty might be a better word. This Marsh Harbor eatery serves a variety of foods and the cooks have a fine hand with their spices and fresh herbs. In addition to delicately flavored seafood dishes, there is filet mignon, tarragon chicken and lamb chops prepared just right. Entrees are served with house salads and vegetables. Reservations should be made for dinner. Wally's is open Monday through Saturday, from 11:30am to 3pm and on Fridays and Saturdays the restaurant is also open for dinner from 6pm to 9pm.

Dining in the Abaco Islands is a pleasant culinary adventure and a social delight. The excellent and varied cuisines are the perfect complement to an Acabo Islands Bahamas vacation.

2006-02-08 Illustrations

Fishing In Jamaica

Wed, 08 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Fishing in Jamaica is part of a dream vacation for many. There are many excellent fishing spots, as is evidenced by Jamaica?s international popularity as a fishing destination and tournament site. Deep-sea fishing trips are easily chartered, as are fishing tours of the region. As an island nation, fishing is important to the local economy, a part of the local culture. Thus, the savvy visitor may be able to arrange to do his fishing outside of the usual tourist spots, and instead enjoy a few of the places known and loved by local fishers.

Suzie-Q Deep Sea Fishing Charters operates out of Falmouth, which is close to Montego Bay, offers both 8-hour and 4-hour charters for up to 12 people. There are a wide variety of fish available in the fishing region, including blue marlin, white marlin, mahi mahi, wahoo, black-finned tuna, yellow-finned tuna, skipjack, kingfish, mackerel, and sailfish. Reservation must be made 48 hours in advance, and rates are $500 for 4 hours with up to 8 people, $900 for 8 hours. $30 per extra person, up to a total of 14, will be charged.

Jamaica Deep Sea Adventures, found at the Port Antonio marina, prides itself on the fine equipment it provides for its fishers. One of the special items is a chair designed specifically for supporting the fisher while he is struggling with large fish. Fishers can expect to be dropping their lines up to 6,000 feet into the beautiful salt waters that are home to numerous species of fish, including barracuda, tuna, and marlin.

Montego Bay is home to No Problem Fishing Charters. They offer half day charters for $360 and full day charters for $690. Also in Montego Bay are Pier One Marina, where chartered fishing excursions can be arranged, and North Coast Marine Charters, which operates out of Half Moon Hotel and Wynham Rose Hall Hotel.

Families will enjoy using Salty Angler Fishing Charters of Montego Bay, because children are welcomed and beginner?s lessons are readily available. It should be noted, however, that this is catch and release fishing only. They have a variety of fishing experiences available, including open water fishing, coastal fishing, night fishing, fly fishing and light tackle fishing.

At the Lost Beach Resort, located in Negril, a different sort of fishing trip can be arranged. For a fee, a trip with a local fisherman can be set up. Fishers will accompany the local fisherman in his wooden skiff and fish by line or by pot. It is a fascinating experience and a wonderful way to learn a bit about the local culture.

Near Treasure Beach and also around Port Antonio, small wooden boats can be chartered or rented for hand-line fishing. As with most fishing expeditions in Jamaica, the local hotels can help to locate and arrange the most suitable fishing experience.

Jamaica has a broad range of fishing opportunities, from adventurous and exciting to relaxing and peaceful. Tours and charters are not only for the sports fisherman, but also can be enjoyed safely by families. Jamaican waters draw fishers from all over the world, and for good reason. Each fishing day has the potential to be a one-of-a-kind experience.

2006-02-08 Illustrations

Dining On New Providence Island In The Bahamas

Wed, 08 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Good food is an essential ingredient in the making of a truly great vacation, and with the broad array of quality eateries for you to choose from on New Providence Island in the Bahamas, you?ll be sure to make your vacation a memorable culinary experience.

The Bahamian Kitchen, in Nassau, right next to the Trinity Church on Trinity Place, offers authentic Bahamian cuisine. It is the place to go if you?re interested in experiencing ?real? Bahamian food. Specialties include such dishes as stewed fish, curried chicken, fried red snapper, okra soup, corned beef and grits, pea soup with dumplings, all served with the traditional johnnycake. Food is also available for take-out. The restaurant is open daily from 11am to 10pm.

For luxury dining at its Bahama best, Chez Willie is the place to be. At these coveted tables ? and reservations are definitely required ? fine French and Bahamian cuisine are served. The seafood is divine, prepared careful and delicately seasoned with fresh herbs. Other superb dishes include lobster thermidor, beef Wellington, and grouper in puff pastry with crabmeat, served with a coconut cream sauce. This establishment strives for and easily achieves elegance. It is suggested that gentlemen dress for the occasion, jackets are considered a must at this West Bay Street restaurant. One of the best dining places in Nassau, the hours are from 6:30pm to 10pm daily.

Excellent North Indian cuisine is available at Gaylord?s on Dowdeswell Street at Bay Street, in Nassau. Offering a full array of traditional Indian favorites, including Punjabi dishes, tandoori dishes, kormas, and ? of course?curries, as well as fine vegetarian options, this restaurant will satisfy Indian food lovers and convert the uninitiated. Open Monday through Friday, from 12pm to 3pm and every day from 6:30pm to 11pm.

The Double Dragon Restaurant, located on Mackey Street in Nassau, presents Cantonese and Szechwan cuisines at reasonable prices. The best dishes are those of seafood, and the orange flavored shrimp are a local favorite. The hours are 12pm to 10pm on Monday through Friday. On Saturdays, the hours are from 4pm to 11pm and on Sundays, the hours are from 5pm to 10pm.

The Europe, located in the Ocean Spray Hotel on South Bay Street in Nassau, serves surprisingly good German food, and also has a variety of international selections. A host of traditional German foods, of excellent quality and reasonable price, are made available. Among these are pepper steak cognac, bratwurst, sauerbraten, and Wiener schnitzel. And, of course, the dessert menu includes a fabulous, classic German chocolate cake. Open Monday through Friday, from 8:30am to 11pm, this is definitely a culinary experience to try.

Capriccio offers fine Italian and international cuisine, at West bay Street, in Nassau. They serve an excellent pesto sauce, fragrant and rich, over perfect pasta. Other entrees include a delicious chicken breast creation, served with a sage and wine sauce and an array of fresh seafood. Reservations are strongly suggested, the eatery is open Monday through Saturday from 11am to 10pm and Sundays from 5pm to 10pm.

New Providence Island is a place where you can experience the cuisines of the world under a big Bahamian sky. Dining on this island is a true culinary adventure.

2006-02-08 Illustrations

Experience The ?Real? Jamaica

Wed, 08 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

There are many who believe the glitz and glitter of the tourist industries and the accompanying commercialization of both the areas around the tourist centers and the culture of Jamaica overshadow the ?real? Jamaica, the people and culture that exist beyond the tourist centers, the true heart of Jamaica. This has led to the creation of a variety of opportunities to visit the other side of Jamaica, to see people and life beyond the often stereotypical vision of Jamaica that most visitors see.

The Meet The People Program is one of these interesting, non-typical experiences. It is run by the Jamaican Tourist Board, and has more than 500 local participants. These local volunteers come from a variety of socio-economic backgrounds, and their interests and skills are listed in a database. Tourists who sign up for the program provide the same types of information, and then locals and tourists are matched up. Amazingly, this is a free program and provides unparalleled social and cultural exchange. Aside from social engagements, such as family style meals in the local host?s home, the matched groups together explore their shared interests in Jamaica.

Country Style is a similar program, bring tourists and residents together for more natural interaction than would happen in the usual tourist scene. After all, spending time with someone on an equal footing, as opposed to with someone who is paid to see to your comfort, is a different experience all together. Based in Mandeville, Jamaica, visits are arranged with interested and interesting residents throughout the island.

Jamaica For Real is the creation of Oliver Foot. His family has been in Jamaica for generations. In fact, he is the son of the last British governor to rule Jamaica. He provides what could be called reality tours of Jamaica. His goal is to share his love for Jamaica, a love that includes those qualities that may not be attractive to those who treasure Jamaica for the tropical pleasures of the island, for the stunning array of creature comforts and entertainment, and for its majestic beauty.

With his Jamaica For Real tours, Foot shares the special beauty to be found in struggle, the social struggles against oppression that resulted in the rich ?real? culture of Jamaica. Visiting such sites as the Borderline, once a highly charged area between two politicized neighborhoods during the social unrest of the 1980?s. He tours Trenchtown, an area notorious for its poverty, one that received international attention through the reggae music that spoke of the desperate conditions to be found there. He shows the beauty of the countryside and its people, and offers a vision of the beauty to be found in the ordinary life. He presents an amazing and enlightening vision of Jamaica in a tour that shouldn?t be missed.

These types of experiences are a wonderful way to explore Jamaica. Aside from the wonderful people you?ll meet, you?ll gain an insight into Jamaica that few outsiders rarely acquire. Once you have a view of the ?real? Jamaica, the island will never look the same again.

2006-02-08 Illustrations

Shopping In Jamaica

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

No vacation in Jamaica is complete without a little bit of shopping to bring home a souvenir or two from your Jamaican journey. Aside from souvenirs, there are a great number of local products that are available nowhere else. In addition, the local art community is famous for creations that can grace the collection of any art enthusiast. The first step to enjoying a successful shopping experience is to know where to look for those special, unique items that will allow you to bring home a little piece of island culture.

Harbour Street, in Montego Bay, Jamaica, features an open-air craft market, where locals come to sell their wares. Among the many varied offerings, you?ll find hand-made jewelry of beads and semi-precious stones, textile products, including clothing of varying style and quality, some of which are richly colored cottons and sturdy natural fibers. There are often hand carved, wooden household items and small wood sculptures, created by some of the island?s many skilled artisans.

Island Village, at the Turtle beach Complex in Ocho Rios, is the perfect shopping area for those interested in reggae and island music culture. With more than 30 shops offering a variety of Bob Marley souvenir items, reggae culture inspired clothing, books, posters, and, of course, music, you?ll need a full day to explore this village. Staying the day, though, will be no problem. There are many cafes and restaurants, and an assortment of sights to be seen, including a museum devoted to reggae and island culture.

For those who prefer a more upscale shopping atmosphere, Gloucester Avenue in Montego Bay is sure to satisfy. This busy thoroughfare hosts an eclectic blend of boutiques and strip malls, set amongst some of the best hotels and eating establishments on the island. Taj Mahal in Ocho Rios is a shopping mall built on a grand scale, featuring a variety of upscale products, and also offers some of the best coffees, rums, and cigars on the island. Kingston is one of the best places in Jamaica to buy quality artwork by some of the nation?s best artists. Frame Center Gallery and the Mutual Life Gallery are among the best known, and are recognized even beyond the island for the quality of art made available for viewing and purchase.

Those desiring a degree of authenticity, something representative of the culture beyond the tourist industries would do well to pay attention to the small shops and stands to be found throughout the island. The further away from the tourist centers the better when it comes to finding those special, unique items that reflect native culture. Some of the unusual take home items to be found in this way include the spices used in native cuisine and home items that are both artistic and practical.

There are many wonderful areas for shopping in Jamaica, whether it is local crafts and creations or upscale bargains that interest you. It is important to note that a certain degree of haggling over prices is expected, and is just a part of the experience.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

Eleuthera Island Of The Bahamas

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Eleuthera Island of the Bahamas could be said to be the first among many. While that phrase could certainly be used to describe its many watery charms, it is also a phrase to be used quite literally. For, Eleuthera was the very first of the many islands that make up the Bahamas to have a permanent settlement. Those early colonizers arrived in 1648, pursuing their vision of religious freedom, a concept held within the name they gave the island. Eleuthera is a Greek word meaning freedom.

Those who enjoy nature?s many wonders will have a lot to admire on and around Eluthera Island. There are caves, and underwater geological formations and reefs that attract divers and snorkelers from all over. The beaches are beautiful and the fishing is outstanding.

The caves draw many visitors. However, for safety?s sake, it is better to use a guide in the mile long Hatchet Bay Cave. In addition to a variety of other cave-dwelling wildlife, Hatchet Bay Cave is home to many bats. Preacher?s Cave, which is found on the northern part of the island, has a church-like size. Other geological sites of interest include Glass Window, which is a rock formation that frames a spectacular marine view.

The Current Cut is one of the more popular snorkeling sites, due to the reef area, which serves as a haven to a variety of marine life. The Devil?s backbone is another favorite reef area, shallow enough for easy exploration. Divers favor Ocean?s Hole, a diving site popularized by unique rock formations and other interesting sights.

The beaches of Eleuthera are simply superb, nature at its best and most natural. Pink Sands Beach is a favorite for diving and snorkeling, as well as wide open views of surf and sky. Gualding?s Cay is an isolated mile long beach with glistening white sand, surrounded by fragrant pines. The snorkeling is great, but its privacy lends a special enjoyment to swimming and sunbathing.

There are several resort communities on the island. These include Bannerman Town, which boasts an impressive view of Mt. Alvernia from its pristine beach. Rock Sound is the classic picture-postcard perfect seaside town, with well kept, richly hued cottages and homes, accented by very green gardens and very bright tropical flowers.

The food is good on the island. Jack?s Outback serves Bahamian cuisine at its finest from a very clean little establishment. Prices are reasonable, and meals are served every day from 9am to 10pm. Sammy?s Place is a must experience eatery, as much for the local crowd it attracts as the excellent food it serves. Located in Rock Sound on Albury?s Lane, Sammy?s Place serves a variety of fare, some Bahamian food, some Creole influenced dishes, some just plain good eatin? and is open daily, from 7:30am to 10pm.

As a vacation destination, Eleuthera Island is aptly named. This is a location in which visitors have the freedom to be at peace and the freedom to enjoy the perfect atmosphere for recreation and relaxation.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

Golf In The Bahamas

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

One of the world?s favorite vacation destinations, the Bahamas aims to please its guests, providing a wide variety of pleasurable activities that will ensure that visitors are able to make the most of their vacation journey. The golf courses of the Bahamas display exactly that principle, a pleasurable activity in a setting designed to highlight the natural beauty of the islands.

The Cable Beach Golf Club has the oldest golf course in all of the Bahamas. This often challenging 7,040-yard course is run by Radisson, and is a part of the Radisson Cable Beach Casino and Golf Resort on New Providence Island. The surrounding scenery is marvelous, and makes a pleasant playing atmosphere. The course is open every day from 7am to 5:30pm. Rates for those who are not club members or Radisson guests are $95 for 18 holes and $70 for a game of 9 holes. Carts are included in the fee.

The South Ocean Gold Course is located on the southern part of New Providence Island in the Bahamas. This 6,707-yard course is known for its beauty, as well as for the way in which the natural features of the land were used in the design of a challenging golf course featuring narrow fairways and tricky water traps. Built in 1969, this course has been a favorite among golfers in the Bahamas for a long time. Rates for those who are not South Ocean Golf and Beach Resort guests or club members are $90 for a game of 18 holes and $50 for a game of 9 holes. Carts will cost another $20. The course opens daily at 7am and closes at 6pm.

Other favored golf courses include the neatly manicured course at the Lucayan Park Golf and Country Club, near Lucaya Beach on Grand Bahama Island. Also on Grand Bahama Island, at the Mall South, is the Emerald Golf Course. This course is designed to be a challenge to even the most skilled golfers, and has many play hazards that require a more sophisticated golfing touch. The Reef Golf Course on New Providence Island features a course that, in addition to its beautiful and visually interesting setting, has a quiet and peaceful atmosphere that enhances concentration.

Many of the resorts and hotels offer golf vacation packages that include a variety of amenities, in addition to lodging, meals, entertainment, and ? of course ? golfing privileges on beautiful and well cared for courses. Several of the golfing facilities rent golf clubs of good quality for reasonable rates. Your hotel staff will be able to help you in making arrangements to play on the courses in your vacation area. Because golf is such a popular vacation pastime in the Bahamas, golf courses are often redesigned and improved to help create the best playing conditions possible.

Golfing in the Bahamas is an excellent way to enjoy the hospitable climate and the spectacular scenery. There are many excellent golf course scattered throughout the small islands that make up the Bahamas, each offering a unique and memorable golfing experience.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

Nightlife In Jamaica

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Nightlife in Jamaica showcases its rich and vibrant native culture and is flavored by the international blend of tourists that flock to this beautiful island nation. Whether your taste runs towards the quiet and secluded spot or towards wild, youth oriented clubs, towards tourist hot spots or the hang-outs favored by locals, you're sure to find a nightlife scene that will leave you with lasting memories of your Jamaican vacation.

Naturally, in a nation that has left its mark on the international music scene with its own reggae style, music is an important part of the nightlife of Jamaica. There are numerous music clubs, nightclubs, bars and restaurants that feature live music of all sorts, including island favorites — reggae, ska, calypso, and soca.

Alfred's Ocean Palace, located in Negril, is regularly features live music, with reggae bands three times per week and attracts both local and international performers. Situated on a beautiful seven-mile long white sand beach, the atmosphere is a delight, complemented by the fine food served at the restaurant and the eclectic blend of people in the bar. Guest rooms are also available on site.

Also located in Negril, Risky Business is a favorite among the college set, attracting spring breakers from all over. It features live music nightly, with some of the best reggae musicians in the area taking the stage. Rick's Cafe, internationally acclaimed party spot, is known for nightly reggae, a fabulous view of the sunset, and cliff diving for the more adventurous of their clientele.

In Port Antonio, the Blue Lagoon Restaurant features live jazz on Saturday nights. At the Little Pub, in Ocho Rios, visitors can enjoy a variety of Caribbean flavored performances throughout the week. Ocho Rios is also home to BiBiBips, which features live reggae and sometimes rap performances on Friday, Saturday and Sunday nights.

Dance clubs are numerous on the island. Jamaica, drawing tourists from all over the world, has a variety of dance club scenes, some having that Jamaican flavor, others being more American in flavor and still others having a decidedly high tech, international tone.

In Ocho Rios, Amnesia, at 70 Main Street, is a dance club with more of a Jamaican feel to it, and does attract a local crowd. In contrast, Jamaica'N Me Crazy, also on Main Street, uses high tech sound and light systems to create a definitely international type of club scene. Usually crowded, it tends to attract more tourists than locals.

Mingles, in Kingston, is known as one of the safest nightspots in Jamaica. It attracts a young and local crowd, and features primarily reggae and soca. Hedonism II, found in Negril, is counted among the wildest, attracting a rather uninhibited crowd of tourists who are definitely there to party.

Jamaica certainly offers a wide variety of nightlife options and adventures. Be sure to use common sense and good manners to keep your nightlife experiences pleasurable, memorable and safe. With that in mind, you'll truly enjoy the best of the Jamaican nightlife scene.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

Nightlife In The Bahamas

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Travelers to destinations in the Bahamas, in addition to enjoying the many fascinating activities offered by the islands, ranging from the traditional attractions of sun, sand and surf to the culture attractions of museums and historical sight to the simply amazing zoos and aquariums, have the opportunity to enjoy a vibrant nightlife in the company of an international mix of tourists and residence. There's always something interesting to do or to see in the nightlife scene of the Bahamas.

The Wyndham Nassau Resort and Crystal Palace Casino is one of the largest casinos in the Bahamas. It features all of the casino favorites, including more than 700 slot machines and 51 blackjack tables. Visitors can also try their luck at the roulette wheels and the craps tables, and there is even a baccarat table for those so inclined. There's a theater with an 800-person capacity, with a variety of entertainment offered through the week.

There are two other major casinos in the Bahamas. These are the Atlantis Paradise Island Resort and Casino and the Crowne Plaza Golf Resort and Casino at the Royal Oasis in Freeport While opinion varies as to which of the three are the best, most people do manage to try out all three.

However, nightlife in the Bahamas isn't just about gambling the night away in the glitter and gleam of the casinos. There are a variety of nightclubs, discos and bars, some open all night long.

One of the all-nighters is Club Waterloo, located on East Bay Street on New Providence Island. Housed in what was once a grand colonial mansion, there is one main bar, and five smaller bars. Each of the smaller bars has its own specialty and style. Among these smaller bars is Shooters Sports Bar, a Bicardi Bar, which is self-explanatory, and an outdoor, poolside bar. The cover charge is high, up to $30 on weekend nights, but in reality, you'll rarely pay that much. Many taxi drivers sell what are called visitors' passes that reduce the cover charge to a much smaller $5. This spot attracts a mixed crowd that typically includes locals and vacationers from Europe and the Americas.

Club 601 is another all-night spot on new Providence Island. It is a disco, and the music is usually of an international flavor, just like the crowd it attracts nightly. Other nightlife favorites in the Bahamas include the Blue Bee Bar on Great Abaco Island and Senor Frog's at the British Colonial Hilton, at 1 Bay Street in Nassau, New Providence Island. Senor Frog's tends to attract a young and energetic crown, though people of all ages enjoy the karaoke nights.

As in most of the most popular vacation destination, the nightlife scene in the Bahamas is interesting, exciting and active. You are sure to have a good time if you exercise a bit of common sense, caution and courtesy. Whether you choose a quiet bar tucked away in a lovely island corner, or dance all night at one of the discos or gamble until the dawn in one of the fabulous casinos, the Bahamas will offer you a memorable nightlife experience.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

The Exuma Islands Of The Bahamas

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

The Exuma Islands, a collection of 365 tiny islands collected under one name, which are part of the many islands that make up the legendary vacation destination known as the Bahamas, offers a prime example of what an out of the ordinary Bahamas vacation can be. It shows off the very best of the Bahamas, that parts that are often outshined by the glitter and gleam of its luxurious casinos and tourist centers. The Exuma Islands have history, culture, a deep regard for nature and a splash of adventure.

Great Exuma Island is the largest of the Exuma Islands and the location Exuma's capital city, George Town. Great Exuma Island is home to some of the island group's most interesting historical sights.

Patience House and the Shark Lady of the Exumas is an unusual museum and shop located in the home of Gloria Patience. Past 80 years old, she once met the Queen of England, barefoot with shell bead around her ankles. It's easy to imagine that she held her head just as high then, barefoot before the Queen, as she does now. Rumored to have caught more than 1,500 sharks, she is a formidable character, and presides over the amazing items she has collected through the years with a regal bearing quite her own. Her guided tours through her museum home provide a wealth of historical information and she is a fascinating and warm person.

Another historic site on Great Exuma Island is the Bowe Family Plantation. Today, this former cotton plantation lies in ruins, though in its remains, one can achieve a clear picture of the structural arrangement of the house, including the kitchen and the slave quarters.

Also on Great Exuma Island are two cemeteries of historical importance. One is the Rolle Town Tombs. An overseer and his wife, from the time of slavery, are buried here. There are a couple of interesting bits of island history associated with the surname Rolle. The name arrived on the island in 1783, carried by the slaves that plantation owner Denys Rolle sent from Florida for the cotton plantation he owned, but chose not to reside at. Because slaves were known by the surname of their master and after the Emancipation, many people kept the surnames they'd grown accustomed to, the Rolle name now belongs to more than half of the native population.

The other cemetery, called the Hermitage, dates back to the 1800's. Located 8 miles away from the capital city of George Town, using a guide will help to get the full effect of this marvelous site.

The vast Exuma Cays Land and Sea Park expands over 176 miles. This nature reserve is a fun and fascinating place, with fine beaches and a wide variety of wildlife. It has also played an important role in local nature conservation efforts.

The islands are wonderful for exploring underwater, with many caves and reefs for snorkeling and diving and there are many day tour packages available for these activities. Chartered boats for fishing excursions are also available, and at reasonable rates.

The Exuma Islands are an excellent vacation destination. This area truly demonstrates the very best of Bahaman qualities.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

Lighthouses In The Bahamas

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

The Bahamas are made up of several small islands spread out through a wide expanse of ocean. In the early days of the European settlements, the lighthouses served an essential purpose, guiding ships to shore in the darkness. During night storms when the overcast sky was unable to be used as a navigation tool, the lighthouse was what brought the ships in, sometimes meaning the difference between life and death for the ship and its crew and cargo. Some of these lighthouses still remain and can be visited today.

One of the best known of these lighthouses is found in Hope Town, on Elbow Cay, which is part of the Abacos of the Bahamas. This lighthouse is a remarkable red and white structure, and was opened in 1863. It is one of three lighthouses in the world, all of which are found in the Bahamas, that still operates in the old-fashioned way. The light is powered by kerosene and run by hand. The lighthouse keeper must adjust the cables and weights that keep the kerosene flowing properly. Due to the special lens inside, the light from this lighthouse can be seen up to 17 miles out into the ocean. Visitors are welcome to make the 101-step climb up to the top to admire the view.

Andros, of the Bahamas, is home to the Bird Rock Lighthouse, known especially for the ospreys that make their homes there. It began its operation in 1876, built by the British. It was run by hand, withstanding storms, hurricanes and even tidal waves. But, it did not withstand progress. In 1978, it became automated, ending its near century of continuous occupation. Soon, even the light was gone. However, in 1999, the light was relit and the restoration of this landmark lighthouse became a project of local interest and importance. The end result of the restoration efforts is a fascinating guesthouse that also houses a small museum devoted to the history of the area.

On the northern part of San Salvador, another island of the Bahamas, there is another of the rare kerosene lit lighthouses. The light at Dixon Hill Lighthouse was first lit in 1887, and it continues to be run by the manual efforts of its keepers. It is 83 steps to the top of this lighthouse, and visitors are welcomed.

Yamacraw Point, which is on New Providence Island of the Bahamas, is home to another lighthouse. The location is notable for its beautiful view of where the sky meets the sea, and the equally lovely beach that makes it possible to contemplate that distant meeting point in complete comfort and peace.

Lighthouses once were a vital part of the seafaring life. The lit beacon allows ships to find land in difficult dark weather, as well as prevented them from running aground upon a tiny island in the middle of the night. They remain an important part of nautical history, standing as a reminder of those brave travelers, who navigated the seas with simple tools and their knowledge of the sky above. Lighthouses throughout the world are being restored with loving attention, but the Bahamas are home to most those that are still run the old-fashioned way. Visiting one of these fascinating historical landmarks adds a nice touch to any Bahamas vacation.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

Natural Wonders In Ocho Rios, Jamaica

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

An island nation, Jamaica offers a wealth of natural beauty. Ocho Rios, Jamaica, is home to some of the most well-known of the island's natural wonders, including a glistening waterfall that attracts visitors from all over and the opportunity to swim with dolphins.

Dunn's River Falls offers a hiking experience that allows even the decidedly non-athletic to enjoy a beautiful view of the 600 foot high waterfalls. However, while the 900 foot climb to the top may seem like a cake walk to the experienced hiker, for those not accustomed to activities, caution should be taken and children should be monitored carefully to avoid injury.

With that being said, however, the experience is one not to be missed. The views alone are worth the walk. There are areas at the bottom and along the hiking path for wading and splashing in the cold and very clear mountain water.

At Dolphin Cove, visitors can enjoy up close and personal interaction with a family group of bottle nose dolphins. Located near Ocho Rios, at one of the most beautiful natural coves in Jamaica, the setting is lush and green, placed in the midst of 4 acres of rain forest.

There are three types of dolphin experience packages available, allowing visitors to choose the degree of interaction best suited to their comfort zone and experience. These include the opportunity to swim and interact with a group of dolphins, another that provides in water interaction with a single dolphin and another which is called a touch encounter package, which is best suited for non-swimmers and children. The traveler should make contact well in advance for individual package rates and to make reservations, as spots are limited.

Dolphin Cove also features other attractions, including a jungle walk trail, while not too physically challenging, offers a fascinating look at local flora and fauna. This is a particularly nice destination for children as there is ample opportunity to have an up close view of brightly colored birds and reptiles. Pristine beaches, perfect for those who enjoy the sun and sand, but not the crowds, and kayaking are also available to visitors, as well as a waterfall that is sure to be less crowded than Dunn's River Falls.

At Cranbrook Flower Forest and Riverhead Adventure Trail, which is open daily from 9am to 5pm, tourists can explore the grounds of this restored water mill. Its greenhouses and grounds are home to many varieties of flowers, including numerous types of orchids. Horseback riding is available, and is the perfect way to enjoy traveling the trails. Admission for $6 and $3 for children under 12 and horseback riding rates are $30 for 2 hours.

Ocho Rios, Jamaica, is surrounded by surprising natural beauty. Surprising, in that so many of these natural wonders are found in the midst of the bustling businesses of the tourist industry. Yet, despite the large amount of commercialism, the natural beauty still remains, often seemingly undisturbed by the unceasing flow of visitors. That which has attracted adventurers and travelers for centuries remains readily apparent and truly remarkable.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

Shopping On Bahamas' Great Abaco Island

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

For those who shop, either out of necessity or for sport, the Bahamas' Great Abaco will provide a shopping experience that is sure to satisfy. There are a wide variety of shops and fine stores, with many unique offerings.

Great Abaco Island is home to many stores selling quality perfumes, ranging from fine, classic scents to fabulous island originals. Abaco Treasures, found right at the Marsh Harbor stop light, is one of these stores. In addition to an array of perfumes, Abaco Treasures also carries fine china, crystal and a selection of gift items. John Bull sells quality perfume and cosmetics, including products by Iman and Lancome, in addition to Rolex watches and fine jewelry. Solomon's Mines, a duty-free shop, found right by the entrance to Abaco Beach Resort, carries high quality perfumes and cosmetics, in addition to better watches, including those by Tag Heuer and Patek Philippe and fine china.

Abaco Ceramics sells a broad range of pottery items, including their trademark design, white clay pots with blue fish. Iggy Biggy , easy to find, as it is housed in two bright pink cottages in Marsh Harbor on Queens Highway, offers a variety of island flavored clothing, sandals, jewelry and souvenir items. Island-style gifts, located in Royal harbor Village. Offers classic straw hats and woven baskets, in addition to household items, such as coasters and candlesticks ornamented with seashells and beautiful bed linens in quality natural fibers.

Java in Acabo is an enjoyable shopping experience. It's meant to be a comfortable place, it's meant for browsing. They even have a paperback book exchange. Shoppers can enjoy a good cup of coffee or an iced latte as they take their time in examining the broad array of beautiful, artistic craftwork. There are many useful and unique items to be found in this shop in the Royal Harbor Village. There are pieced quilts with artistically wrought patterns in vibrant, rich colors, and several styles of pillows. There are ceramics and hand carved goods. Some of these are for practical use and others are more artistic in nature, but all are beautifully crafted, a pleasure to see and a pleasure to touch. There is also a variety of works created by local artists. The staff is knowledgeable about the inventory and happy to provide information about the local artists and crafters.

Johnston Studios Art Gallery is another good place to stop and browse for those in pursuit of art, though the works displayed and sold here are of a different nature. The gallery is a little less than an hour's drive away from Marsh Harbor, and features original creations in bronze, which are the works of the Johnston's. The gallery also carries a line of gift items and art prints.

Shopping on Great Acabo Island is a pleasant experience, particularly in the smaller establishments where there is the opportunity for interesting conversations with local residents. The range of products available throughout the island is immense, from internationally known brands and designers at bargain prices to one-of-a-kind items produced by locals. It's a lovely way to spend the day.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

A Cat Island Bahamas Vacation

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

One of the outer islands of the Bahamas, Cat Island is a quiet
vacation destination for those who are really looking to relax.
Among its varied pleasures and activities, a little exploration
will turn up a historical oddity or two that add to the
individual character of the place. Beautiful beaches in natural
settings welcome the nature lover and peace seeker alike.

The Hermitage is a bit of an historical oddity, fascinating and
strange. The hike up to see this religious site will take
visitors through small villages along beautiful trails, full of
island flora and fauna. It is located at the top of Mt.
Alvernia, which is 206 feet above the sea and the highest point
in the Bahamas. The Hermitage itself is made from the limestone
of the cliffs, with each piece painstakingly extracted, shaped
and set by hand by the Canadian mule-skinner turned Anglican
turned Roman Catholic priest known as Father Jerome. The Father
built the structure to scale, designed it to fit his rather
diminutive form. Beloved by the island people, the priest
passed away in 1956 after reaching the ripe age of 80.

Other historical sites include an Arawak cave, found at
Columbus point, and plantation ruins, left over from the
islands efforts at joining the worlds cotton growers. Deveaux
mansion was once the residence of Andrew Deveaux of the US
Navy, who participated in the 1873 battles to get Nassau back
from Spain. Another well known ruins is the remains of the
Ambrister plantation, near Port Howe.

For those interested in water sports, the Cat Island Dive
Center is the place to contact. They operate out of the
Greenwood Beach Resort and have a variety of diving and
snorkeling packages available, and there are many fine areas to
explore, offering a wealth of marine life and fascinating
geological formations. They also have water sport equipment to
rent.

Cat Island is the sixth largest island in the Bahamas, and
boasts extraordinary beaches. There are literally miles and
miles of virtually undisturbed beaches, where swimming and
relaxing can be done in near complete privacy.

Fine meals can be had at several locations on Cat Island.
Hawk's Nest Resort and Marina serves a variety of dishes, but
among the best are the fresh, grilled fish and the roasted rack
of lamb. Fernandez Bay Village is the place to go for creative
and delicious native dishes, served either in the dining room
or a patio table by the beach. Greenwood Beach Resort's Bahaman
cuisine is complemented by their marvelous breads, which are
baked every day.

Cat Island is an excellent choice for vacationers who are
seeking a natural beach experience, and enjoy a peaceful and
very laid-back atmosphere. The island can be explored at a
leisurely pace, which is a much better way to enjoy the local
flora and fauna, as well as to enjoy the local culture. Because
it is so much smaller in population than many of the other
islands, it's easier to get a real feel for the people and
their way of life. Cat Island is an interesting place that will
make a lasting impression on its guests.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

Enjoy Great Golf In Jamaica

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

A vacation destination for decades, Jamaica is home to a number of quality golf courses. The temperate climate is a welcome part of the golfing experience, as is the general atmosphere of the golf courses, with many being notable for their outstanding customer service focus and their beautifully kept grounds. It should be noted that while many of the golf courses are private, most of the more exclusive facilities do make day passes available for vacationers.

Half Moon Golf Club, in Montego Bay, Jamaica, is known among tournament players throughout the world for its classic lines and challenging set up. Open and beautiful, one of the most challenging aspects of this golf course is the wind. Over 7,000 yards long, this course offers a good work out, in addition to a fine game.

Luxurious, enchanting, and uniquely challenging are apt descriptions of the White Witch Course, a recent addition to the famed Ritz Carlton Rose Hall Resort of Montego Bay, Jamaica. The course is named for the infamous Annee Palmer who is said to haunt the area, and rumored to have indulged in illicit relationships with the slaves she held and treated brutally during the 1800's to run her huge sugar plantation, and also said to have murdered three husbands before turning up strangled herself.

This magnificent course was designed by Robert Von Hagge, Rick Baril and Mike Smelek, and has a slightly different style from the typical Caribbean golfing experience. While there are stunning ocean views to be had at 16 of the holes, they rest upon high ground, as the course wanders through strong hills and players are cooled by the unobstructed ocean breeze.

Three Palms Ocean Course, found at Wyndham Rose Hall, is renowned through Jamaica and well beyond the island for the amazing scenery that its 6798-yard course is built around. Golfers will play alongside of the family graveyard of Elizabeth Barrett Browning and the ruins of an aqueduct from the 18th century. There will be ocean side holes, canyons, waterfalls and gorges. This is a truly beautiful and historic course, and can only be an unforgettable golfing experience.

The Tryall Golf Course, at the Tryall Club in Montego Bay hosts the Johnny Walker World Championship and is a favorite playing spot of golfers all over the world. The 6,772-yard course extends from flowering forest to cool seaside, and includes mountain and ocean views that are simply spectacular. Fascinating relics of history along the course include an 18th century water wheel.

There are several other notable golf courses in Jamaica. These include the Manchester Club, one of the oldest facilities of its nature, which also makes available tennis and billiards, the rugged terrain of the Negril Hills Golf Club, which is known to be a challenging and exhilarating play. Breezes Golf and Beach Resort offers truly upscale play.

Whether you're planning a vacation devoted to enjoying the very best courses that Jamaica has to offer or you are a casual golfer seeking fun greens for a day or two's play, Jamaica is home to some of the finest golfing opportunities in the entire region.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

Choose The Best Beach In Jamaica For You

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

People, obviously, have different needs and different styles. What constitutes a great beach for one person may not be all that enjoyable for another. What makes Jamaica a great travel destination is that, as an island nation, there are a variety of beaches to choose from. Knowing what you want and where to find it will help you to make the very most of that precious vacation time.

There are the classic Caribbean beaches that feature the traditional joys of pristine white sand and blue, blue waters. But, there are also the craggy, undeveloped beaches that are perfectly suited for those hoping to avoid crowds or for those who best enjoy nature in its natural state. There are beaches known for the gentle waters that are perfect for families with children visiting Jamaica and still others with rougher waters and currents that attract surfers. There are beaches known for their active social scene and others that are serene and quiet.

In Montego Bay, Doctor's Cave Beach is one fine example of the classic Caribbean vacation beach. Five miles of fine, white sand beach that borders clear, cool waters attract visitors to Jamaica from all over. Because of its broad popularity, it is likely to be frequently crowded. Cornwall Beach is another lovely, white sand beach found in Montego Bay.

In Negril, some of the most wild, untouched areas by the sea can be found. Craggy cliffs, amazing beauty, solitude — all of these are what bring naturalists to these shore areas in Jamaica. Crane Beach, by Black River, is a beach that has not been overdeveloped and is notable for the naturalness of its environment.

For families, especially with young children, there are several beaches in Jamaica known for their gentle waters that lack the strong currents and undertows found in other areas, making swimming safer for young or inexperienced swimmers. Among the best of these are the Walter Fletcher Beach in Montego Bay, San San Beach in Port Antonio, Blue Lagoon Beach, which is also in Port Antonio, and Dunn's River Beach, located in Ocho Rios, fairly close to the famous waterfalls of the same name.

Surfers love Boston Beach, where surfing equipment is easy to rent. The beaches of Long Bay are said to offer the most consistent waves in Jamaica, and on the southwest coast, Treasure Beach can offer adventure to the surfer. Swimmers should take care, though, as the undercurrent can be strong.

Those in search of beaches that combine the joys of sun, sand and surf with an active social scene or party scene will certainly enjoy Frenchman's Cove in Port Antonio. Another favorite spot is Seven Mile Beach in Negril.

Jamaica is a lovely island nation with approximately 200 miles of beaches. There are beaches to suit most every taste, ranging from family beaches to nude sun bathing beaches, from peaceful and natural surroundings to the pristine white sands and full services of the resorts, from beaches perfect for active water sports beaches to known for their active social scene. A little planning will help you to choose the best beach in Jamaica for you.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

Eating Out On Grand Bahama Island In The Bahamas

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

An internationally known and loved vacation destination, quite naturally, Grand Bahama Island has many fine eateries. Seafood figures prominently on most menus, as it is sure to be high quality and fresh. The culinary traditions of the island should certainly be explored, but there are also many restaurants featuring international favorites.

For a fine dining experience, Luciano's, found at Port Lucaya Marketplace and Marina, should not be missed. In business for more than 20 years, this restaurant offers classical cuisine from both Europe and the island in a formal setting that is sure to make the evening a special one. The dishes are made of the freshest ingredients, with each plate cooked to order.

Diners can choose to start their meal with such luxuries as Beluga Molossol Caviar, Foie Gras, Oysters Rockefeller, or with such appetizers as Cassolette d'Escargots, Cocktail de Crevettes Rose, which are jumbo shrimp on a bed of lettuce with a specially created red sauce, or Coquilles St. Jacques Provencales, which are deep sea scallops sauteed with garlic butter and served with tomato concasse.

In addition to delicious house soups and creative salads, there are many delightful choices on the menu. Seafoods and pastas, fine meats, freshly prepared vegetable side dishes and a host of delectable, elegant desserts and fine after dinner coffee selections make for a dining experience to remember.

The Prop Club, in addition to being a sports bar and dance club, boasts of offering the biggest burger on the island. Portobellos offers a wealth of Italian dishes. The Corner Bistro and Bar, at Count Basie Square in Port Lucaya, offers a wide variety of foods, specializing in Asian and international cuisine. Open from 5:30pm to 11pm every day, except for Wednesdays, they offer daily specials. In addition to their dinner-sized entrees, they also offer pizza, sandwiches, soups and salads.

Club Carib Bahamas is a beach bar and restaurant that serves wonderful seafood appetizers, including fried calamari, shrimp scampi carib, and a variety of sandwiches, salads, and entrees, including a delicious mango jerk chicken. This place welcomes children, and has a children's menu. There's live calypso music on the weekends, making for an enjoyable and relaxed atmosphere.

The Ferry House Restaurant is one of the most upscale restaurants in the entire Bahamas. Found in the Port Lucaya area of Grand Bahama Island, it serves continental classic cuisine of the highest quality, as well as a sort of culinary fusion that brings together Caribbean flavors with a more globally influenced cuisine than typical of continental cuisine.

Because the freshest ingredients are used, the menu varies with what is in season. Food is cooked to order, and from start to finish, diners should expect to spend about two hours at their meal. The restaurant opens daily for lunch from noon until 2:30 pm and is open for dinner every day, except for Monday, for dinner between the hours of 6pm and 10pm. This is a truly unique culinary experience, and if at possible, should be included in your dining plans.

From formal to casual, there are many satisfying dining experiences to be had on Grand Bahama Island in the Bahamas. You'll remember the food long after the tan has faded.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

Dining On Bahamas' Paradise Island

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

When it comes to opportunities to enjoy good food, Paradise Island of the Bahamas is aptly named. On this small island, the cuisines of the world are represented. There are a wide range of cuisine choices and dining settings.

Anthony's Caribbean Grill, located at the Paradise Island Shopping Mall, serves Caribbean and American foods. While the Caribbean is — to be truthful — rather Americanized, the quality of the ingredients is high, and the food, whichever culinary genre it may properly or officially belong to, tastes good and is satisfying. Among the eatery's offerings are pizzas with a plethora of available toppings, barbecued chicken and ribs, fried chicken, ribs with Caribbean-style barbecue sauce and a host of large sized salads that serve as meals. A broad range of mixed drinks is available. The hours are from 7:30am to 11pm, and it is open daily.

At The Water's Edge, a nightly seafood buffet is served. The culinary influence is decidedly Mediterranean, and in addition to an abundance of seafood, there are many pasta dishes, including penne a l'arrabbiata. Pizzas of various types and styles are also a part of the buffet. The dining area itself is beautiful and works to set the tone of the meal. There are immense chandeliers and an artificially created miniature lagoon with three waterfalls adds an interesting touch. Reservations are strongly suggested for this establishment, found at the Atlantis. It is open daily, from 6pm to 10pm.

Mama Loo's specializes in Asian cuisine, though there are a few dishes with a Caribbean touch. The decor of the restaurant, with its ceiling fans and potted palms, does add a sort of Far East mystique that is enjoyable. Szechwan, Cantonese, and Polynesian cuisines make up most of the menu, though there are a few Caribbean dishes as well. The specialties of the house are the stir-fried lobster, beef, and broccoli with ginger, the shrimp in spicy chili sauce with a peanut sauce, and the deep-fried chicken filets with honey-flavored garlic sauce. Reservations are strongly suggested for this restaurant, located in the Coral Tower of the Atlantis. Mama Loo's is open Tuesday through Sunday from 6pm to 10pm.

The Cave, located at the Atlantis, offers simple fare that is delicious. Burgers, sandwiches, salads and ice cream draw a casual crowd, many right off the beach which is close by, and many families with children. The prices are reasonable and the hours are from 10am to 6pm every day.

Villa D'Este serves what many consider to be the best Italian food on the Island. Located in the Coral Tower of the Atlantis, this restaurant serves a variety of traditional favorites that take their influence from the Tuscany region of Italy. Some of the more interesting dishes are whole roasted rack of lamb coated with red wine sauce and rosemary potatoes and pan-fried chicken breast with artichokes and mushrooms in a lemony white wine sauce. Reservations are essential and the hours are 6pm to 10pm, Thursday through Tuesday.

Paradise Island is indeed a heavenly experience for those with an adventurous and discerning type of culinary taste. There's a lot to choose from, and certainly nobody will have to leave the island hungry.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

Dining On Bahamas' Long Island

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Dining in the Bahamas always offers the possibility of a grand culinary adventure. This is particularly true in Long Island, where the strong influence of local culture shapes the cuisines offered there.

The Forest offers Bahamian cuisine and American casual fare in a rustic, simple sort of atmosphere, just outside of Clarence Town. Among the culinary offerings are a variety of finger foods, such as hot and spicy chicken wings, potato skins, cracked conch, barbecued chicken, and grouper fingers. There is a bar and pool table, an invitation to linger. Live music and dancing are a part of every other weekend's festivities. Credit cards are not accepted, so you should remember to come prepared to pay in cash.

Once the exclusive domain of the ultra-rich and famous, including such illustrious names as the Kennedy, DuPont and Kellogg, the Cape Santa Maria Beach Resort has a fine restaurant that serves a variety of well prepared dishes, clearly influenced by the local cuisine. The seafood is fresh and plentiful and the broiled lobster and conch salad are especially good.

Max's Conch Grill and Bar is simply fabulous, a must visit for both the quality of the food and the atmosphere. It's a fun place, drawing as many, if not more, locals as tourists. Open from 9am to 9pm every day of the week, staying open later is there's a good flow and vibe in the bar. The conch salad is exceptional, as are the conch burgers, and the conch dumplings tasty. Daily specials include baked ham or steamed pork. On site, there's general store and a miniature golf course that is free to play.

Kooter's offers simple food in a casual atmosphere, with daily specials that sometimes can be seafood, on other days, ribs. Conch burgers that are counted among the best of the island and club sandwiches, served with homemade French fries are popular favorites. They also serve ice cream. Most like to take their food and drink out on the deck, where there is a lovely view of Mangrove Bush Point.

Earlies Tavern, aside from being a popular nightspot among the locals, also serves excellent quality, simple tavern style food. The menu includes burgers, sandwiches, grouper, cracked conch, lobster and fish. Boxed lunches for picnic or just general take out orders are available upon request. This too, like many of the eating and drinking establishments, is a cash only operation. You'll need to come prepared to pay cash.

At Chez Pierre Bahamas, at Millers Bay Beach, Chef Pierre does amazing things with his homegrown ingredients and fresh caught daily seafood. This small, ocean side restaurant is worth seeking out. The food is exquisite.

Jeraldine's Jerk Pit, serving tradition jerk foods and conch salad, and Mario's Blue Chip, serving among many other satisfying dishes, grouper fingers and fresh crayfish, are both popular roadside stands on Queens Highway.

The food on Long Island is clearly heavily influenced by local cultures and cuisine. It makes for a rich culinary exploration of the subtle qualities of Bahamian cuisine. Your meals here will be satisfying and memorable.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

Dining In Bahamas' Exuma Islands

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

The peaceful, beautiful atmosphere of the Exuma Islands is the perfect place to enjoy a good meal. Fortunately, there are a number of dining options that will provide that — a good meal — and better. The food is excellent on the islands.

Club Peace and Plenty serves fine quality Continental, Bahamian, and American fare on Queens Highway. This restaurant prides itself on using the finest ingredients possible to carefully create classic dishes that are authentic and original dishes that are creative. Among the appetizers are conch salad, a salad made from the heart of an artichoke, and another featuring hearts of palm. Some of the lunchtime favorites are homemade soups, conch burgers, chef's salad, and deep-fried grouper. Popular dinner entrees include Bahamian steamed grouper, simmered with onions, sweet pepper, tomatoes, and thyme and a roasted herb-flavored Cornish game, and, of course, fresh seafood dishes. At breakfast time, the full range of traditional favorites is usually available, including the traditional Bahamian breakfast of boiled fish and grits. Reservations are essential for dinner and the hours are from 7:30am to midnight, every day.

Sam's Place is another special dining establishment. Located on the second floor, this restaurant and bar enjoys a clear, beautiful view of the capital city's harbor. The atmosphere is a truly tropical type of laid-back cool. The food is excellent, and offerings range from morning breakfast foods to delicious curry chicken to roast lamb to pan fried grouper. The dinner menu changes daily, but diners can always be assured that something tempting will be there. Sam's Place is open daily from 8am to 9pm and is right on Main Street.

Coconut Cove serves Italian and Mediterranean cuisines, in addition to some Bahamian dishes, from its location in the Coconut Cove Hotel in George Town. The appetizer list includes such things as seafood salads, linguini marinara, onion soup, jalapeno peppers, breaded mozzarella sticks, and breaded calamari with oregano and parsley sauce. The dinner menu rests heavily upon seafood, with some of the more remarkable dishes being prepared with stone crabs or crayfish. Steaks and pizzas are also served. The prices are definitely fair at the Coconut Cove, and the days and hours of operation are Tuesday through Sunday, from 6pm to 9pm. Reservations are necessary to ensure a table.

Fisherman's Inn is yet another unique dining experience on this island. Hidden far away in the countryside, this restaurant is about an hours drive from the capital. Reservations are essential, as that's a long way to travel without being sure that there will be anything left to serve you and the hours of operation tend to be a bit unpredictable. The menu is made up of hearty traditional and authentic local fare and the food is absolutely excellent, well worth the drive. Credit cards are not accepted, so it is important to remember to bring cash. In the most general sense, the restaurant is open every day from 7am to midnight.

There are some very special eating establishments in this part of the Bahamas. If at all possible, you should try to visit each one mentioned above. Those will be culinary experiences that you'll remember for a long time to come.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

Bimini In The Bahamas

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Bimini, one of the several islands of the Bahamas, is a wonderful place to vacation. Many sights of natural beauty await the tourist, as well as a few interesting landmarks, beautiful beaches, and exhilarating outdoors activities. And all of that is made that much more pleasant by a welcoming climate and a laid-back atmosphere conducive to real rest and relaxation after the day's adventures are done.

An unexpected pleasure, Compleat Angler Hotel in Alice Town Bimini, houses a variety of artifacts that belonged to none other than the famous American writer, Ernest Hemingway, who spent two years there, from 1935 to 1937. These items include manuscripts, letters and photos.

The Bimini Museum, on Kings Highway, is housed in a two-floor house that was built in the 1920's. The exhibits are primarily composed of a hodge-podge of souvenirs left behind by famous people that have spent time on the island. Items that once belonged to Dr. Martin Luther King, Jr. and Ernest Hemingway are among those on display. Other exhibits are made up of various historical items from the island. The museum is open Monday through Saturday and charges an admittance fee of $2 for adults. Children are admitted free of charge.

Marine life and activities are a big part of the Bimini experience. Among the most popular are the dolphin interaction experiences. There are a variety of tour packages available to tourists, allowing for different water skill levels and creature interaction comfort zones.

Scuba divers and snorkelers will have plenty to explore in Bimini. There are numerous underwater geological formations and coral reefs, ripe with a broad variety of marine life. Among the favorite sites are Bimini Wall, Bimini Road, Tuna Alley and the Stones of Atlantis.

Fishing boats can be chartered at the Bimini Blue Water Marina. Another fine place for those interested in fishing and boating trips is the Bimini Big Game Resort and Marina. Keefe's Bimini Under the Sea offers many diving and snorkeling packages, as well as a wild dolphin adventure package. They've also recently started a bed and breakfast program.

A fine meal can be had at the Red Lion Pub on Kings Highway in Alice Town. The cuisine is primarily Bahaman, and well prepared seafood a main feature of the menu. House desserts include a delicious key lime pie and banana cream pie. The dining room has a nice view of the marina, and the atmosphere is comfortably casual. Dinner is served Tuesday through Sunday, from 6pm to 10pm.

Interesting handcrafts can be purchased at the Bimini Straw Market. Usually around 20 vendors present, and the goods range from handmade jewelry to fresh baked bread. Pritchard's Grocery is another favorite for quality local breads, as well as a variety of other needs. At the Gateway Gallery, in Alice Town, a variety of locally created crafts, fine arts, sculptures and music are available.

Bimini is a peaceful hideaway from the world, which is perhaps why it has attracted so many public figures to its shores. It's slow pace and focus on natural pleasures make it an ideal place to engage in true rest and recreation.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

Bike Riding Tours In Jamaica

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Bike riding tours are a wonderful way to explore Jamaica. Traveling by automobile just can't provide the same experience. You miss so much, like the scents carried by the wind — the smell of the ocean, the tropical forests, the mountains, and the abundant flowers and other plants. The slower pace allows you to really see what you're looking, to talk to local people, and to really savor the experience of Jamaica.

Blue Mountain Bicycle Tours, Ltd., located at 121 Main Street, in Ocho Rios, is one of the most well known providers of these sorts of adventures. Their specialty is a day long bike tour that begins 5,600 feet up in the Blue Mountains, which are the highest mountains in the Caribbean. Blue Mountain Bicycle Tours, Ltd., makes these tours available out of both Ocho Rios and Kingston, Jamaica, providing charter bus service from these points to the mountain for groups as large as 150, with the average group being made up of about 40 people. All necessary biking equipment is also provided, as are meals, and rates are reasonable -- $93US for adults and $65US for children under 12 years of age.

The bicycle tour is all down hill, which makes it appropriate for almost all age groups — age 7 is the youngest recommended for participation -- and means that you'll be able to devote your most or your energy to enjoying the magnificent scenery. And, magnificent it is! Bikers pass through stunning mountain vistas that include the remarkable coffee plantations that produce the Blue Mountain coffee beans that are becoming well known to coffee connoisseurs for their superior taste and quality, and enjoy wild life sights that are found nowhere else in the world outside of Jamaica. They'll see waterfalls and have the opportunity to enjoy a refreshing swim in the cool, clear mountain water. You'll want to remember to bring a swimsuit, towel and camera.

Manfred's Jamaican Mountain Bike Tours, located in Saint Elizabeth Parish, Jamaica, offers a wonderful one-week get away tour. Participants enjoy quality lodging and excellent local cuisine on a 500 acre farming estate in Apple Valley. Each day features a bicycle tour to a different part of Jamaica, revealing parts of the country far beyond the usual tourist destinations. This experience of the real Jamaica — beyond the glitter and glitz of the tourism industries — is simply unparalleled.

In Negril, Rusty's Xcellent Adventures offers a variety guided bicycle tours at different skill levels. Biking equipment and, if necessary, biking instructors, are available. For those who prefer independent exploration, there are numerous places throughout Jamaica that offer bicycle rentals, as well as rentals of scooters and the like.

Bicycle tours are an excellent way to explore Jamaica. In addition to enjoying the natural Jamaica, its �real' people and culture, you'll be doing so in away that has less of a negative environmental impact. Bicycle tours allow you to slow down and to savor your surroundings, collecting memories — and perhaps even a newfound cultural awareness and understanding -- that will last a lifetime.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

Beautiful Andros Of The Bahamas

Tue, 07 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

A journey to Andros is a lovely respite from the world. There are many qualities that make Andros stand out from the other islands that make up the Bahamas. It's a small, intimate sort of place, rich in natural beauty and wildlife.

Andros is an eco-tourist's paradise. The fifth largest landmass in the Caribbean, it is an ancient island, gradually emerging from the sea with each layer of coral limestone. There are as many fascinating sights to be seen below sea level as there are to be seen above. Underwater explorers will see a wide variety of marine life, so varied and diverse that Andros attracts researchers from all over the world. On the top side of the island, there is an abundance of flora and fauna, including species and varieties found nowhere else on earth.

Small Hope Bay Lodge Eco-Tours is a wonderful way to explore these many natural wonders. Environmentally concerned and conscious, Small Hope Bay Lodge has been offering a variety of eco-tours for more than 40 years — long before the word or concept of eco-tour came into vogue. Their caring and knowledgeable staff make wonderful guides to accompany visitors through this largely unexplored island. In fact, Andros remains one of the largest tracts of unexplored land in its hemisphere.

Among the nature activities available through Small Hope Bay Lodge is the Snorkel Safari on Fresh Creek, in which participants travel along Fresh Creek in a dive boat. Occasionally, visitors are able to snorkel with dolphins, however this is not a guaranteed activity, because these are wild creatures, not the tamed and trained dolphins usually featured at dolphin swims. It is a different experience all together. As the boat glides along, visitors will view a wide variety of plant and animal life. The fee is $45 for adults and children 12 and older. The rate for children under 12 is $25.

Small Hope Bay Lodge also does a Shark Observation Dive. This allows close observation of sharks and their behaviors. This activity takes place a few times a week and costs $85 per diver and $45 per snorkeler.

They offer a variety of dive programs, of varying skill levels. Some explore the many underwater blue holes found on Andros. Others explore the barrier reefs that are plentiful around the island.

One of the more intriguing of the sights to be seen on Andros is Red Village. Just over 25 years ago, a fascinating indigenous tribe ruled by a chief, organized in the traditional native style and still adhering firmly to the ways of their ancestors, was found to be living in the area of the village. Tourists do visit the area, and of course, that has changed some things for this indigenous group, but the ways of their ancestors still reign supreme.

Andros definitely offers a unique travel experience. It is one of the great wilds of the region, a haven for birds and animal, as well as a place in which breathtakingly beautiful wildflowers are free to blossom at will. This is a Bahamas vacation spot that will offer experiences and memories that will last a lifetime.

2006-02-07 Illustrations

Charles Manson and The family

Mon, 06 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

'A criminal is not a criminal by birth but made by the world'. This holds true in the case of Charles Manson. Born on 12th November 1934 to an unwed teenage mother in Cincinnati, Charles never knew his biological father. His mother later married William Manson who gave Charles his last name. His mother was a thief who sold him off for a pitcher of beer.

When all other kids his age were in school with the security of loving parents, Charles was moving from one reform school to another. His mother put him in a foster home as her alcoholic ways and prostitution could not afford to provide for Charles. When Charles ran back to her from the home she rejected him and threw him out on the streets. This was a turning point in Charles's life. He started to steal and at 19 years of age car thefts kept him in and out of jail for a while. He was very intelligent and sharp and psychiatrists judged that he possessed a high I.Q. Once out of jail he married 17-year-old Rosalie Jean Willis in 1955, and wished to move to California and start a new life. But it was not to be. He stole a car soon after marriage and was arrested. On giving birth to a son, Willis ran away with a truck driver.

With personal life in shambles law enforcement agencies tried to rehabilitate him. Psychiatrists said Manson showed marked degree of rejection, instability and psychic trauma. He was unpredictable and showed signs of assaultive tendencies. In spite of his age he was criminally sophisticated. In 1960 he was arrested again for soliciting prostitution and got a jail term of 10 years. Here he met Alvin Karpis the famous bank robber from whom he learned music and to play the guitar. He wanted to become a famous musician like Beatles. Had that happened, crime rate in America could have been considerably reduced. While in prison or on probation, he had stolen cars, pimped inmates, raped another inmate and forged federal checks. By the age of 33 he had spent more than half his life in prison.

Charles Manson had a 'family' of hippies made up of like minded people like him. He was bisexual and his women worshipped him. All these girls had sexual relations with him. He told them that "they belong to themselves and not to him". One of the girls Susan Atkins said that she would do anything for Charles. She killed Actress Sharon Tate and said that 'it was the most exciting sexual experience of her life'. The gruesome killings chilled and paralyzed America in 1969. The Manson Family was responsible for several murders, known collectively as the Tate-LaBianca murders. The motive behind the murders was that he was rejected by the music industry and wanted revenge. So he asked some members of his family to go to the house of record producer Terry Melcher and kill whoever was on the premises. They entered the compound of Roman Polanski, the famous Hollywood Director and his wife Sharon Tate who was eight months pregnant. Before entering the house they first shot dead Steve Parent, an 18 year old who was the friend of the gardener because he had seen the intruders while getting into his car. Frykowski and Folger, who were staying in the house until Polanski's return from London, were able to escape from the living room but succumbed in the lawn. Frykowski was stabbed fifty-one times, shot twice, and pistol-whipped over a dozen times. This was allegedly inspired by the Beatles song "Piggies". Folger was stabbed 28 times by Krenwinkel after being tackled on the lawn.

Inside the house intruders asked if anyone had money, and, in replying that she did, Abigail Folger, heiress to the Folgers Coffee Company, was led to her bedroom to empty her purse. She was led back to the living room where the four occupants of the house were tied together. Jay Sebring, a noted hairstylist and friend of the Polanskis was visiting, and when he attempted to defend Tate, he was shot by Watson, who then kicked him several times in the face.

Tate, eight months pregnant, begged for the life of her unborn child and was rebuffed by Atkins, who coldly replied, "Look bitch, I have no mercy for you" before stabbing the actress sixteen times.
The killing of wealthy super market executive and his wife, the La Bianca couple, is another cold blooded murder by Charles Manson and his 'family'. On this occasion Manson himself went along to show his accomplices how to perform the 'act'. He tied the couples and then instructed Watson, Krenwinkel and Leslie Van Houten to stab them. Watson killed Mr. La Bianca while the girls stabbed his wife even after she died. They carved out the word 'WAR' upon her chest and left the fork embedded in her body. With her blood on a piece of paper the words 'rise' and 'death to pigs' were written. On the wall was 'Healter Skelter' misspelled from the Beatles song Helter Skelter. Manson also killed high school music teacher Gary Hinman because he apparently owed him some money.

Manson is now languishing in jail in California and probably for the rest of his life. He is known to shock people especially when in media glare. He is eligible for parole in 2007.

By Carlos Cabezas Lopez

Original Article Source http://www.casoabierto.com/Cronica-Negra/Cronica-Negra-Internacional/Charlesmansonenglishversion.html

2006-02-06 Illustrations

Philosophy & Ideas: Hot & Cold Evil

Mon, 06 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Have you ever heard of hot and cold evil? A few years ago a friend introduced me to the concept. Hot evil, he said, was the kind that outraged most people immediately. Examples might be a violent crime against innocent children, or an attempt at genocide. Cold evil was far more insidious--the kind of evil that many of us have participated in through apathy or seeming powerlessness. What Adolf Hitler did to the Jewish people and other minorities was hot evil. Those who were aware of that atrocity and participated in it by doing nothing took part in cold evil. This philosophy and idea poses the question, is one evil worst than the other? Surely they were both horrible. Of course, the perpetrator of evil is reckoned worse because of direct involvement. But as Edmund Burke said, the only thing necessary for the triumph of evil is for good men to do nothing. So the so-called powerless can be implicated very seriously. It's a familiar thought, and one echoed in a statement from American political philosopher Hannah Arendt. She once wrote about Adolf Eichmann, who was convicted of horrific war crimes against the Jewish people. She said, "The trouble with Eichmann was precisely that so many were like him, and that the many were neither perverted nor sadistic, that they were, and still are, terribly and terrifyingly normal. From the viewpoint of our legal institutions and of our moral standards of judgment, this normality was much more terrifying than all the atrocities put together." So which is worse, hot evil or cold evil? Does it even make sense to choose between one evil and another? The point we so easily forget is that in choosing between two evils, whichever choice we make, both are still evil. The problem here, as Arendt pointed out, is that ordinary human nature can lead to some pretty awful behavior. How many times have we regretted doing nothing and allowing another to suffer the impact of evil intentions? Are we our brother's keeper? That famous phrase comes from one of the most ancient accounts in Western culture. It's the timeless story of Cain and Abel. What happened to those two brothers is a powerful warning of what can happen when hot evil is not mastered on an individual level. The account of their fateful encounter is in the book of Genesis, chapter 4. It's a primal account of the way human nature can take any of us when unrestrained. When you read the account of the two brothers, the difference in attitude is apparent. Genesis says: "Now Abel was a keeper of sheep, but Cain was a tiller of the ground. And in the process of time it came to pass that Cain brought an offering of the fruit of the ground to the Lord. Abel also brought of the firstborn of his flock and of their fat. And the Lord respected Abel and his offering, but He did not respect Cain and his offering. And Cain was very angry, and his countenance fell. So the Lord said to Cain, 'Why are you angry? And why has your countenance fallen? If you do well, will you not be accepted? And if you do not do well, sin lies at the door. And its desire is for you, but you should rule over it.' Now Cain talked with Abel his brother; and it came to pass, when they were in the field, that Cain rose up against Abel his brother and killed him" (verses 2b-8). Abel was doing the right thing, but Cain was not. He allowed his obsessional hatred to drive him on. He failed to master it. Cain, in fact, was obsessed with his brother's right behavior, and his own inadequacy became a source of Cain's animosity. The Bible Knowledge Commentary puts it this way: "It is as if he could not wait to destroy his brother--a natural man's solution to his own failure." In Genesis the account continues: "Then the Lord said to Cain, 'Where is Abel your brother?' He said, 'I do not know. Am I my brother's keeper?' And He said, 'What have you done? The voice of your brother's blood cries out to Me from the ground'" (verses 9-10). What is the source of this kind of behavior? The apostle John makes the answer clear in one of his letters to the early Christian Church. He says in reference to Cain and Abel: "In this the children of God and the children of the devil are manifest: Whoever does not practice righteousness is not of God, nor is he who does not love his brother. For this is the message that you heard from the beginning, that we should love one another, not as Cain who was of the wicked one and murdered his brother. And why did he murder him? Because his works were evil and his brother's righteous" (1 John 3:10-12). So the antidote for hot evil lies in the mastery of sin and in the individual overthrow of the power of the ultimate malevolent force. And what about cold evil? The account of Cain and Abel also hints at the concern we must express for each other in the concept of being our brother's keeper. Are we our brother's keeper? Yes, indeed we are. Are we subject to wrong influences and impulses? Yes, we are. Is there a way out? Yes, there is. The answer lies in changing human nature. But is changing society and culture a simple task? It sounds impossible. But is it?

2006-02-06 Illustrations

China Auto Industry: Running Fast

Mon, 06 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

The Chinese automobile industry is growing at an unprecedented pace. American car manufacturers take China as a burgeoning market that could aid them make up for declining profits. European and Japanese carmakers also hold big hopes for Chinese automakers. China's entrance in WTO (World Trade Organization) in 2001 restrained its tendency of selling dated cars & Chinese customers with growing amounts of disposable incomes now require the latest & the greatest products. Thus, incredible opportunities for business are available for overseas companies in China's automobile industry. However, foreign companies have faced great amount of difficulty in getting access to the Chinese automotive market. These foreign bodies have to deal with government bodies of China and the Chinese companies. To make the Chinese automotive market accessible to foreign companies, a detailed study has been done on the potential of this sector. Due to this comprehensive study, the Chinese automobile industry has become accessible to foreign players. Chinese automobile industry has, at last, become favorable and shown resemblance to its Japanese or South Korean counterparts. New laws, regulatory and financial backing, growing economy of China, cost-efficient labor and a huge population, all are making Chinese automotive a lucrative sector. Currently, China has over a dozen state-run automakers. As per analysts, Chinese-built cars work better and are more fuel-efficient. More importantly, these vehicles are being made at prices that beat the blistering rate of economic growth of China. Thus, for further information about Chinese automobile market and its growth potential, read the report: "China Automobile Industry (2005-2015)" published by RNCOS at: http://www.rncos.com/Report/IM023.htm RNCOS is an industry leader in the field of online business research. We specialize in industry research on various business verticals. To read our other reports, visit us at: http://www.rncos.com/Report.htm or email us at info@rncos.com To get the latest news visit our newly launched Blog section at http://www.rncos.com/Blog/

2006-02-06 Illustrations

The Territorial Conflict on Shebaa Farms in the Middle East

Mon, 06 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

The Shebaa Farms and International Law By Gabriel Sawma Esq. Background Following World War I and the fall of the Ottoman Empire, the territories of Lebanon and Syria, which were considered one single political unit prior to the War, were mandated by the League of Nations to France. The principle underlying the Mandate was expressed in Article 22 of the Covenant of the League of Nations. The Mandate proceeded until November 26, 1941, when General Georges Catroux, de Gaule's choice for governing the mandated territory, proclaimed in the name of his government and its ally the termination of the mandate and the establishment of "sovereignty and independence" of Lebanon and Syria. Lebanon became a constitutional republic in 1943. The internationally recognized borders between Israel, Egypt, Jordan, Lebanon, and Syria are governed by the 1949 Armistice Agreements. Those agreements ended the 1948 Arab-Israeli War, and established the armistice lines between Israel and the West Bank, also known as the Green Line, until the 1967 Six-Day War between the Arab States of Jordan, Egypt and Syria on one side and Israel on the other side. The Armistice Agreement between Israel and Lebanon was signed on March 23, 1949. It points the following • The Armistice Line ("The Blue Line") was drawn along the international border. • The international border between Lebanon and Israel are considered to be a de jure international border (i.e. by law). • Israel withdrew its forces from 13 villages in Lebanese territory, which were occupied during the war. With the exception of the Lebanon-Israel Armistice Agreement, the other agreements were clear (at Arab insistence) that they were not creating a permanent or du jure borders. The Israeli-Syrian Invasion of Lebanon On March 15, 1978, Israel launched a major military incursion into South Lebanon, called the Litani River Operation, and struck at PLO bases and staging areas south of the Litani River, up to 10 kilometers deep inside the country. The operation prompted a formal statement of "United States Concern with the Territorial Integrity of Lebanon," calling for Israeli withdrawal and discussing a United Nations role in Lebanon. On March 19, 1978, the United Nations Security Council adopted Resolution 425 calling for Israeli withdrawal and establishing an international peace-keeping force for South Lebanon, the United Nations Interim Force in Lebanon (UNIFIL), to enable establishing of a buffer zone in southern Lebanon free of PLO bases. By June, 1978, Prime Minister Begin, under intense American pressure, withdrew Israeli forces, which were replaced by UNIFIL. The withdrawal of Israeli troops without having removed the PLO from its bases in southern Lebanon became a major embarrassment to the Begin government. The cross-border cycle of attack and retaliation continued, and the PLO expanded its bases, forces, and armaments in Lebanon. Finally, Israel responded with its 1982 invasion and occupation of southern Lebanon. The UNIFIL force is still deployed in 2006. UNIFIL was unable to prevent terrorists from infiltrating the region. Cross-border conflict between Israel and various forces in southern Lebanon continued to intensify. Civilians on both sides, and UNIFIL peacekeepers, were killed as the fighting continued to escalate, and Palestinians were shelling the northern Israel. In June 3, 1982, the Defense Minister Ariel Sharon ordered the invasion of Lebanon with a massive force in an operation called Peace for the Galilee. Israeli forces drove all the way to Beirut. The PLO's leadership was forced to move to Tunis. This military operation, although planned for limited duration, became bogged down and continued far longer than expected. The army lost 650 soldiers. For three years the Israel Defense Force (IDF) remained deep in Lebanon, until it withdrew, in 1985, to the international border. Some territory in south Lebanon was retained as a security zone. The area was monitored jointly by Israeli Army (IDF) and its Southern Lebanese Army (SLA) ally. The Lebanese Civil War, which started in April, 1975, provided the pretext for Syrian Military intervention in Lebanon. Alleging the fear of a Christian-Muslim partition of the country and/or a PLO takeover, Hafez Assad of Syria sent, on June 1, 1976, 12,000 regular Syrian troops to Lebanon. By September of that year the number reached approximately 25,000 men. The Syrian force was operating under what came to be known as the Arab Deterrent Force authorized by the Riyadh Summit held in October 1976. Syrian troops acted to disarm some Lebanese militias at the same time that the national army of Lebanon disintegrated. By 1977, the number of Syrian troops exceeded 30,000, with over 200 tanks. On October 13, 1990, Syrian forces captured the presidential palace at Ba'abda, southeast of Beirut, and defeated the Lebanese Army units, which were under the command of General Michel Aoun, who declared 'a war of liberation" against Syria. Syrian military occupation of Lebanon incorporated the entire country with the exception of southern Lebanon, which was under the control of the Israeli Army and the Southern Lebanese Army. On May 23, 2000, the Israeli military carried out a unilateral withdrawal from the south and the Bekaa Valley, ending 22 years of occupation causing the collapse of the 6,000 SLA members. With the withdrawal of Israeli forces, many Lebanese began calling for a review of the continued Syrian presence in their country. On June 16, 2000, the United Nations Security Council adopted the report of the Secretary General verifying Israel's compliance with UNSCR 425 and the withdrawal of Israeli troops to their side of the demarcated Lebanese-Israeli line of separation (The "Blue Line") mapped out by UN cartographers. In August, 2000, with the permission of Syria, the Lebanese Government ordered the deployment of 500 police and 500 soldiers to areas of south Lebanon evacuated by the Israelis. This force was not allowed to disarm Hizbullah guerrillas or to take up positions along the blue lines. Hizbullah maintained observation posts and conducted patrols along the Blue Line. In the summer of 2004, Syria pressured the country's cabinet into endorsing a constitutional change designed to let President Emile Lahoud extend his expiring six-year term for three more years. Prime Minister Rafik Hariri had for years been a fierce foe of Mr. Lahoud and had strongly opposed amending the Constitution. But suddenly he changed his mind after a night meeting with the Syrian chief of military intelligence. On September 2, 2004, the UN Security Council adopted Resolution 1559, coauthored by France and the United States. The Resolution "calls upon all remaining foreign forces to withdraw from Lebanon" and "for the disbanding and disarmament of all Lebanese and non-Lebanese militias." Syria made few moves to comply with the Resolution until the assassination of Rafik Hariri, the former Prime Minister of Lebanon, on February 14, 2005. International pressure and mass demonstrations that were labeled 'the Cedar Revolution' prompted President Bashar Assad of Syria to announce on March 5, 2005, his plan to "bring his forces home." On April 26, 2005, after 29 years of occupation of Lebanon, the last Syrian troops left the country The Shebaa Farms Isuue Shortly after the Israeli withdrawal from Lebanon, The UN Secretary General, Kofi Annan, dispatched his special Middle East envoy, Terje Roed-Larsen, and a team of experts to meet with Israeli and Lebanese officials and verify that both sides were in agreement on the conditions required by Resolution 425. The UN team reported that the Lebanese Government "informed the United Nations of its new position regarding the definition of its territory." The claim included that Israeli forces seized a piece of Lebanese territory during the Six-Day War, called Shebaa Farms, located on the western slopes of Mount Hermon in the Golan Heights, and has been occupied by Israel since the 1967 Six-Day War with Syria, Egypt, and Jordan. The Farms are presumed to be owned by the residents of the nearby Lebanese town of Shebaa. Before the Six-Day War, most Shebaa landowners and farmers lived in a Lebanese village of Shebaa. The Shebaa farms, a separate piece of territory, about 14 kilometers (8.7 mi) in length, and averages 2.5 kilometers (1.6 mi) in width, lie inside Syria. The farmers used to cross the land from Shebaa city in Lebanon to the Shebaa Farms in Syria. Its fertile, well-watered farmland formerly produced barley, fruits, and vegetable for 14 farms, but now desolate. After Syria lost the land in 1967, the Lebanese farmers of the city of Shebaa were no longer able to commute and to farm the land at Shebaa Farms. Israel maintains that the Shebaa Farms was officially part of Syria when Israel occupied the region. Syria and Lebanon claim that the territory is in fact part of Lebanon, since Lebanon did not play a role in the Six-Day War, they claim, Israel must evacuate the territory in accordance with UN Security Council Resolutions. It is worth to mention here, that the 1949 Armistice Demarcation Treaty between Lebanon and Israel followed the pattern of demarcation that was instituted by Great Britain and France in 1923. Nevertheless, there was no official border between the two countries. "On maps, the French clearly marked Shebaa Farms as Syrian territory, while marking the village of Shebaa, whose residents owned the farms, as the territory of Lebanon." In other words, the town of Shebaa is considered to be a Lebanese territory, while the Shebaa Farms is Syrian land. During the 1950s and early 60s A joint Lebanese Syrian commission was formed to determine the border between the two nations. In 1964 the commission determined that the Farms belong officially to Lebanon. However, maps printed after 1964 did not incorporate the determination of the commission, the maps printer after that period rather shows that the Shebaa Farms are still Syrian territory. And in 1960, Syrian authority ordered the inhabitants of the Shebaa Farms to replace their Lebanese identification cards with Syrian ones. The Lebanese government showed little interest in the views of the inhabitants. While the commission was conduction its work to determine the border identity, the Syrian Government maintained control over the Farms. In 1955, the Syrian military built an outpost on one of the farms, and military bases in the area. Those military posts in and around the Farms confirmed the identity of the Shebaa Farms as Syrians. During the Israeli invasion of Syria in 1967, the territory was captured by the Israeli forces and remained occupied until this time. No Lebanese or Syrian newspapers or any other discussion about the identity of the Shabaa Farms as being Lebanese territory, nor was there any hint in the UN Security Council at the time by the Lebanese representative to this effect. At no time, prior to the Israel's withdrawal from Lebanon in 2000, did the Lebanese Government claim the Shebaa Farms to be Lebanese. In 1974, the United Nations Disengagement Observer Force (UNDOF) was established at Camp Faouar in Syria. Its mandate includes: (1) to supervise the cease-fire between Israel and Syria; (2) to supervise the disengagement of Israeli and Syrian forces; and (3) to supervise the Areas of Separation and Limitation, as provided in the Agreement of Disengagement between Israel and Syrian forces of May 31, 1974. The UNDOF maintained the border with the Shebaa Farms as part of Syria. In March 19, 1978, the UN Security Council passed Resolution 426 establishing the United Nations Interim Force in Lebanon (UNIFIL) headquartered in Naqura, Southern Lebanon to oversee the withdrawal of Israeli forces from South Lebanon. The Lebanese Government made no attempt to claim the Shebaa Farms. On May 4, 2000, three weeks after the withdrawal of the Israeli troops from Lebanon in compliance with Security Council Resolution 425 and 426, 1978, the Lebanese Government officially filed a grievance with Israel to the UN Secretary General Kofi Annan. He called the Lebanese move a "new position". Lebanese officials claim, without giving an explanation, that in 1951, Syria had given the Shebaa Farms to Lebanon. They claim also that there is no record to such a transfer at the United Nations. In fact one senior Lebanese official stated that the Syrian transfer of Shebaa Farms to Lebanon occurred in the form of "oral agreement" between the two countries and "nothing was documented." In May 29, 2000, the Lebanese Newspaper, 'The Daily Star' described the land deed of one resident of the Shebaa Farms as "handwritten and signed on a yellow piece of paper in pencil and ink." Furthermore, the Lebanese government presented the a forged land deed to the UN representatives date back to the 1940's, years before the alleged transfer took place, an indication of inconsistency on the part of the Lebanese Government. There are documents from the 1920s and 1930s that indicate some local inhabitant in the region who considered themselves to be part of Lebanon. Some have even paid taxes to the Lebanese government. But the demarcations from that period under the French mandate show that the Shebaa Farms lie within the borders of Syria. Detailed maps produced by the French in 1933, and again in 1945 point out to the same conclusion. U.S and French archives leave no doubt that the Shebaa Farms belong to Syria. All maps belonging to the period before 1967 save one, an apparent forgery, show the land as being on the Shebaa Farms on the Syrian side of the border. In fact, on February 13, 2006, a Lebanese newspaper Beirut Times article quotes a Druze Leader Walid Jumblatt, member of the Lebanese Parliament displayed and map and revealed that it was a "fake map," with the boundary shifted. In an interview, the Druze leader said the following: "The question of the Shebaa Farms was invented by Syria and Iran using Hizbullah as a pretense to have an armed presence in Lebanon. This must end." Lebanese army map published in 1961 and 1966 indicate the Shebaa Farms area, including Zebdine, Fashkoul, Mougr Shebaa, and Ramta as being part of the Syrian territory and lie inside the border of Syria. Every single Syrian map and every single Lebanese Ministry of Tourism map show the Lebanese border runs west of the Shebaa Farms. These maps make it clear that the Shebaa Farms are in fact a Syrian land. The UN Secretary General issued the following report, disputing the claims of Lebanon on the Shebaa Farms, he states the following: 'On 15 May 2000, the United Nations received a map, dated 1966 from the Government of Lebanon which reflected the Government's position that these farmlands were located in Lebanon. However, the United Nations is in possession of 10 other maps issued after 1966 by various Lebanese Government institutions, including the Ministry of Defense and the army, all of which place the farmlands inside the Syrian Arab Republic. The United Nations has also examined six maps issued by the Government of the Syrian Arab Republic, including three maps since 1966, which place the farmlands inside the Syrian Arab Republic...' Nancy Solderberg, a high-ranking official with the U.S. delegation to the UN, made a similar observation. She said: "When it was clear the Israelis were going to withdraw fully from Lebanon, Syrian and Lebanese officials fabricated the fiction that this small, sparsely populated area was part of Lebanon. They even produced a crudely fabricated map to back up the dubious claim. I and United Nations officials went into the map room in the United Nations and looked at all the maps of the region in the files for decades. All showed the Shebaa Farms clearly in Syria. Hizbullah's claim over Shebaa Farms In June 18, 2000, the UN Security Council issued a statement confirming the identification of Israeli withdrawal, and noting that both sides would respect the Blue Line as identified. Moreover, the Security Council took note, "with serious concern," of reports of violations by Hizbullah that had occurred since June 16, 2000, and called upon the parties to respect the line drawn by the United Nations. On October 7 of that year, Hizbullah launched a daring attack into the Shebaa Farms and abducted three Israeli soldiers. In February 16, 2001, another attack was conducted by Hizbullah, it killed an Israeli soldier. In the meantime, the former Lebanese Prime Minister, Hariri was reassuring the world that there will be no more outbreaks of violence in south Lebanon. In an interview, he was quoted as saying: "We have a clear agreement with our Syrian brothers in this matter...There will be no provocations on our part." Hizbullah, founded in 1982 with the mission of expelling Israel from all Lebanese occupied land. The organization presents itself as being a charitable organization. It holds several seats in the Lebanese parliament, and two cabinet seats in the current Lebanese government of Prime Minister Fouad Seniora. Hizbullah is mainly funded by Iran and operates under the auspices of Syria. The Lebanese Government allows Hizbullah's militia to act despite Security Council Resolutions which call for all militias in Lebanon to be disbanded. In fact the Lebanese Government maintains that Hizbullah is a "national resistance group" and doe not fall under the requests of the Security Council. Although Syria withdrew its forces from Lebanon in compliance with Security Council Resolution 1559, it still maintains control over Hizbullah. Syria uses the organization to force its will on Lebanon and to keep the Israeli forces engaged until such time comes when Israel ends its occupation of the Syrian territory Hizbullah's critics charge it with simply using the issue to justify its existence as an armed force and to continue serving as an outpost of Iran's Islamic revolution. But would-be peacemakers say that if Israel relinquishes the area, Hizbullah will have no excuse to continue its armed role and could better be pressured to transform itself into a normal political party. This suggestion has been made by the Lebanese Prime Minster Fouad Seniora. In an interview with Aljazeera.net, the Prime Minister of Lebanon said his government "cannot force Hizbullah to disarm as long as Israel continues to occupy the Shebaa Farms." For Israel, the Shebaa Farms have little strategic importance and has always been subject to return to Syria in a peace negotiations. Israel might probably accept a pullback from the Farms if Syria formally ceded the area to Lebanon. So far Syria has been supporting, verbally, Lebanon's claim to the area, but it has shunned any official redefinition of its borders because it still regards the territory of Lebanon, Jordan and Israel to be part of the Greater Syria that existed before World War One. The Dispute under International Law The International Court of Justice is the principal judicial organ of the United Nations. Its prime function is to arbitrate international disputes. The court's decisions are binding, and its broad jurisdiction encompasses cases which the parties refer to it and all matters specially provided for in the Charter of the United Nations or in treaties and conventions in force. The court may be asked to give advisory opinions at the request of the General Assembly or the Security Council or at the request of other organs and specialized agencies authorized by the General Assembly. Paragraph 1 of Article 36 of the Statute of the International Court of Justice (ICJ) states the following: "The jurisdiction of the Court comprises all cases which the parties refer to it and all matters specially provided for in the Charter of the United Nations or in treaties and conventions in force." In Paragraph 2 of Article 36 of the Statute, the states may at any time "declare that they recognize as compulsory ipso facto and without special agreement, in relation to any other state accepting the same obligation, the jurisdiction of the Court in all disputes concerning...(b): any question of international law..." Chapter IV, Article 65 states that "the Court may give an advisory opinion on legal question at the request of whatever body may be authorized by or in accordance with the Charter of the United Nations to make such a request." Accordingly, the Lebanese government may request an "advisory opinion" from the ICJ to resolve the dispute over its territorial claims over the Shebaa Farms. Syria could be called on by the ICJ to submit an affidavit supporting Lebanon's claim to the Shebaa Farms. The United Nations General Assembly and the Security Council may submit a request to the ICJ for an "advisory opinion". None of that has happened yet. Since its inception, the ICJ has ruled on many cases regarding the territorial claims. The following is an example: • In the Case Concerning Sovereignty over Certain Frontier Land (Belgium v. Netherlands), the court traced developments that had begun before the 1839 separation on the Netherlands from Belgium, and in its judgment, on June 20, 1959, it indicated that sovereignty over the disputed plots belonged to Belgium. • On July 8, 1991, Qatar filed in the Registry of the Court an Application instituting proceedings against Bahrain in respect of certain disputes between the two States relating to "sovereignty over the Hawar Islands, sovereign rights over the shoals of Dibal and Qit'at Jaradah, and the delimitation of the maritime areas of the two States. Bahrain contested the basis of jurisdiction invoked by Qatar. Finally the Court issued its ruling on March 16, 2001. • On December 1, 1978, the Minister of Foreign Affairs of Tunisia notified the Court of a Special Agreement in the Arabic language signed at Tunis on 10 June 1977 between the Republic of Tunisia and the Socialist People's Libyan Arab Jamahiriya. The government of Tunisia requested the Court to render its judgment on the principles and rules of international law which may be applied for the delimitation of the area of continental shelf appertaining to the Republic of Tunisia and the area of the continental shelf appertaining to the Socialist People's Libyan Arab Jamahiriya. • On November 26, 1957, the ICJ issued its ruling on the case concerning right of passage over Indian Territory between Portugal and India. The Portuguese Government requested the Court to recognize and declare that Portugal was the holder or beneficiary of a right of passage between its territory of Damao and its enclaves of Dadra and Nagar-Aveli and between each of the latter and that this right comprises the faculty of transit for persons and goods, including armed forces, without restrictions or difficulties and in the manner and to the extent required by the effective exercise of Portuguese sovereignty in the said territories, that India has prevented and continues to prevent the exercise of the right in question, thus committing an offense to the detriment of Portuguese Sovereignty over the enclaves and violating its international obligations and to adjudge that India should put an immediate end to this situation by allowing Portugal to exercise the right of passage thus claimed. The application expressly referred to Article 36, Paragraph 2, of the Statute and to the Declarations by which Portugal and India have accepted the compulsory jurisdiction of the Court. • In its advisory opinion on the question put by the Security Council of the United Nations, "What are the legal consequences for States of the continued presence of South Africa in Namibia notwithstanding Security Council Resolution 276 (1970)?" On June 21, 1971, the ICJ issued its advisory opinion by stating that "the continued presence of South Africa in Namibia being illegal, South Africa is under obligation to withdraw its administration from Namibia immediately and thus put an end to its occupation of the Territory." • In a case between Libya and Chad, the two countries submitted to the Court a territorial dispute relating to the Aozou Strip in the Sahara. Libya's claim as made in the case extended far to the south of that strip of land. The Court, in a judgment on February 3, 1994, found wholly in favor of Chad. After and agreement on the implementation of the judgment had been concluded between the two nations, Libyan forces, monitored by an observer force deployed by the Security Council, withdrew from the Aozou strip by May 31, 1994. In the Middle East, as elsewhere in the world, there are territorial disputes including Sudan and Egypt on international boundary around the "Hala'ib Triangle," a barren area of 20580 sq km. Libya claims about 19,400 sq klm in northern Niger and part of south-eastern Algeria. Kuwait ownership of Quruh and Umm al Maradim islands is disputed by Saudi Arabia. Iran occupies two islands in the Persian Gulf claimed by the United Arab Emirates: Lesser Tunb (called Tunb as Sughra in Arabic by UAE and Jazireh-ye Tonb-e Kuchek in Paersian by Iran) and Greater Tunb (called Tunb al Kubra in Arabic by UAE and Jarireh-ye Tonb-e Bozorg in Persian by Iran); it jointly administers with the UAE an island in the Persian Gulf claimed by the UAE (called Abu Mussa in Arabic by the UAE and Jazireh-ye Abu Mussa in Persian by Iran)-over which Iran has taken steps to exert unilateral control since 1992, including access restrictions and a military build-up on the island; the UAE has garnered significant diplomatic support in the region in protesting these Iranian actions. Iran and Iraq, after their eight-year war, restored diplomatic relations in 1990 but are still to settle disputes concerning border demarcation, freedom of navigation and sovereignty over the Shatt al Arab waterway. Iraq also disputes over water development plans by Turkey for the Tigris and Euphrates Rivers. And Indonesia is in dispute over two islands with Malaysia, who is in dispute with Singapore over two other islands. About the Author Gabriel Sawma is a lawyer specializing in international law, mainly the European Union Law, the Middle East and Islamic Shariaa Laws. Authored many articles on private as well as public international law. http://www.gabrielsawma.blogspot.com; email: gabrielsawma@yahoo.com

2006-02-06 Illustrations

Are We Humans Really The Masters Of This Planet?

Mon, 06 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Are we humans beings really the masters of this planet? Do we have the authority to self-righteously assume global dominance? The following article is my view to the questions. It is certainly not definitive. It is just an expression of my own thoughts and opinions. In my opinion, perhaps we should not assume that our species is central to the world and planet at large. A human economic system should ideally also take into account the well being of the entire ecosystem, which is body of Mother Earth. I will tend to regard the Mother Earth as a living consciousness with her various elements (water, air, wildlife, etc) constantly seeking to remain in harmonious equilibrium. Come to think of it, isn't this quite like the way the body of a living being functions? Perhaps, economy and civilisation's progress should not be about humans for humans only. We tend to see 'less-than-holistically' and believe that money-making has little or nothing to do with the welfare of our Mother Earth and the ecosystem. But the fact is we humans do take sustenance from the atmosphere, animal and plant kingdoms; therefore we are dependent upon other species and resources on Earth. As such, human activities should be accounted for within a equation that does not place the human species upon a pedestal (which is being treated as superior); but rather assigns the 'so-called intelligent biped' objectively with other species and elements of this diverse planet. In my opinion, the current human activities are simply too self-absorbed within our own kind. The truth of things is that everything, 'however insignificant it may appear to be, is in actual fact, unique. "Feeling special" and "above others" are simply beliefs concocted by the human psyche, and have relevance only in a human society. Holistic & equitable replenishment & redistribution amongst all elements and species on Earth should be the a central theme for sustainable living, instead of the human biased "competitive" model. I feel that perhaps recycling of used materials may not be enough. Humans, being the so-called intelligent life form on Earth should actively develop sciences that deal with replenishment of plants, animal kingdoms and elements, keeping resources in equilibrium. To achieve all that, perhaps the very mindset that first sets competition in motion has to be re-evaluated. Well, this ideal is certainly easier said than done. Thank you for reading. I hope it has been interesting for you.

2006-02-06 Illustrations

There are people in more trouble than you

Mon, 06 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Last week I was not able to sleep very well one night so I was just surfing the TV channels and then I came accross a movie channel where they were showing a movie The Pianist.It is a very famous movie (Accademy award for Best Director) about a Jew Pianist in Poland , about what he faced in the period of world war and that to just because he was Jew. My wife told me not to see such movies at night because i would have lost sleep for whole night. But I told her that we must thank god that we were not at that place.We must see such movies to know what people have faced and how they tried to overcome those things.We will come to know the price of life which we are living right now , we will come to know the price of Freedom. There are few occassions when we are sad, we worry a lot. But at that time we must remember that there are (and were)people who are/were in deep sorrow than us.We should not give a sigh of relief after thinking that but we should motivate ourselves to come out of the trouble.We should think the ways in which we can help ourselves as well as people. To conclude I would like to give example of current electricity crises due to increased demand at this portion of year in our state. In some part of our state [other than Mumbai the city where I live (also called as Bombay)] there is load shading(electricity goes off) for 4 hours a day.People think that they are in deep trouble.Indeed they are in deep trouble but they should also think that there are other parts of the state in which there is power shading for 11 to 12 hours.Think what they must be suffering.Electricity is essential thing and we must try our best to come out of this problem.As the production is not in our hands, what we can do is.... use it like very expensive thing and by not wasting it.There are many suggestions given by the electricity board like not using pumps,heaters,AC etc. in the evening when there is very high demand for electricity and there are some other measures also.If the people who have less loadshading comply with these things then, the load shading in other areas will reduced with these areas too.So the question is about understanding each other.They don't have electricity but atleast they are getting water.There are many parts in the world where people have to dig the water from ground.We must salute to those people.So the key is to be greater than a problem and never let the problem get bigger. Guys this is my very first blog in my life and if I am wrong somewhere please suggest me corrections.

2006-02-06 Illustrations

New Delhi gets its First Convenience Store

Mon, 06 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

It was the last week of January 2006, when Delhi got its first 24x7 convenience store. Changing lifestyle and increased purchasing power of Indians is encouraging the rapid growth of shopping malls and new retail chains in the country. The Indian customers now prefer international shopping experience to the traditional retail shopping. Indians are welcoming this 24x7 retail culture because traditional shopping culture doesn't fit the needs of the consumers of today. They find it nearly impossible to spare some time to go to the market. Convenience stores, on the other hand, offer them the flexibility to go for shopping the moment they get some free time out of their daily hectic schedules. As per market experts, the range of products and services offered under the same roof is the biggest force why these convenience stores are becoming popular amongst the consumers. Besides processed fresh meat or other edibles, cut veggies or fruits for instant cooking, these convenience stores offer certain other facilities such as courier services, utility bill payment services and so on. People in developed countries are highly dependent on these convenience stores for their day-to-day needs. Convenience stores have been making waves in U.S. for years. In America and Canada, hundreds of convenience stores cater to the requirements of more than six million customers at present. As per a recent research report titled "Asian Convenience Store Industry Analysis (2005-2009)" published by RNCOS, the C-store market has recorded a 14% extra growth as compared to that of the global market growth in 2004. China exhibited an outstanding growth in C-store market as it crossed a figure of 20,000 in 2004. Though southeast isn't a good option to go for while choosing the right location. East -Asia seems to be a better location for the growth of the industry, whereas retail opportunities are tremendous in the South. As per the report, China is the instant opportunity provider for this industry whereas India offers stable market for it. Countries like India & Pakistan seem to be decent locations for the C-stores, as there's less or in fact no competition at present in this parts of the world. On the other hand, the beauty and charm of convenience stores has been completely ruined by severe competition in U.S.A and other countries. Convenience stores are believed to drastically makeover the lifestyle of Indian consumers, as their buying habits are going to see a revolutionary change in the near future. The Indian collaboration with foreign retail & consumer goods companies will help in uplifting the life-style of the people of the country. As the Indian retail industry is altering tremendously, prominent business groups plan to open a series of C-stores in India. To purchase your copy: http://www.rncos.com/Report/CP12.htm For more information please visit www.rncos.com

2006-02-06 Illustrations

US QDR Impacts the World Scene

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

US QDR Impacts the World Scene By Brig Gen (ret) Muhammad Aslam Khan Niazi@ US Quadrennial Defense Review Report-2006 is a document that combines in it the attributes of philosophic prose of realities and phenomenal wishes studded with Mr. Rumsfeld's impact of steely personality. It is an instrument that focuses on translating National Defense Strategy-March 2005 to a plausible 'Operational Strategy' for the US forces. Besides, the US Department of Defense rightly claims to be transitioning from 20th to 21st Century vintage with urgency relevant to the scale of pernicious threats posed principally by terrorism, that, when seen through references and quotes in QDR, stands personified as Al-Qaeyda, Osama bin Ladin and Ayman al-Zawahiri. It emerges crystal clear that the lone super power is confronted with multiple super challenges when its Cold War culmination-euphoria and the continental insularity have fallen major casualties at the hands of the terrorists. Taking holistic view of QDR is restrained by the enormity of its scope; only four points may be discussed briefly, other strengths and merits of the document notwithstanding: • At page v it reads, "We also have been adjusting the US global military force....moving away from a static defense in obsolete Cold War garrisons to.... • President Bush's quote at page 9 defines strategy to fight a long war against terrorists that by implication is deemed as a part of the text and a beacon to guide the planners. • The reservoir of 'hope' the QDR generates, and • Lastly the 'despair' it permeates to the peace lovers. First point about military force strategic posture and evolution of rapid 'surge' capability, visible effort has been made to appease some opposing international actor(s) of Cold War era through a veiled deception by ostensibly moving away from obsolete garrisons. The ground realities point to the contrary. Analysts clearly see the beginning of an era when, instead of bases of smaller stretch, whole countries have been occupied with puppet rule on the mantelpiece. The realities of misguided operations "Iraqi Freedom" and, "Enduring Freedom" are now boomeranging on US in a pattern that has the potential to catapult the world peace. In both the areas of ongoing major conflicts, nothing has 'endured' except destruction and detailed devastation. Expansion of NATO, allocating additional tasks to US Central Command and US European Command, military presence in Kyrgyzstan, Azerbaijan, Georgia, Eastern Europe and seeking nuclear collaboration with India have become a subject of serious controversy. Such justifications that radical Islamists are bent on destroying US culture, democracy and values are losing their propaganda weight and thus no longer a spicy recipe to sell for winning public support. All is set to point toward US imperial 'hubris', incidentally focused on Muslim countries, the malice Franklin Roosevelt and Dwight Eisenhower took pains to dismantle during the last century, that too was the work of European powers of the time against their largely Muslim colonies. QDR credibility would have gained tremendously, had it admitted its objectives to achieve the series of 'Greater,' or 'Broader' prefixed to Middle East, Central Asia and Israel, dilution of Iran and Syria, and placing Pakistan back to the non-nuclear perspective under bunch of pretexts in certain point of time, terrorism and WMDs slogans available anyway. Even Western scholars have come to see a very mystifying coincidence between the maps of war on terror and the hydrocarbon reserves of Middle East, Central Eurasia and Africa. However there is silver lining on the dark cloud, lurking on the Muslim horizon if one reads US Ambassador to Pakistan statement(The Nation: 5 April 2006) about Islam that it is fast expanding in America. It leaves Muslims with little pretext to hate Jews or Americans. In fact they never hated their public but the bogy threat of 'hate' erupts at intervals not because there is any sense in that threat and not because Islam has gone barbaric but the establishment in US and some others need such crutches to hold on to 'chair' by hook or crook. Large population in the West has come to recognize that Islam is a religion of peace, justice and universal brotherhood, that is why when I lament the human losses in futile wars of 'grab and deceit' I feel not only concerned about the innocent Muslims caught in the cross fire but also for the US, UK, Canada, Italy, Poland and German soldiers falling on the battlefield. The scathing remarks by Carla Seaquist (The Christian Science Monitor, 4 April 2006), if mine, would have labeled me as a terrorist but the justice appears to be germinating from the strata of same very culture whose rulers are intoxicated and heed no reason. She writes while castigating trundled gun of insult and provocation against Islam in Denmark, "As if! As if Abu Ghraib and Guantanamo, invasion and occupation of Iraq, and other varieties of "regime change" the West envisions for the Arab world were not offense enough. And how bizarre that offensiveness is held up as civilized, rather than seen as fueling the clash." A long time trusted US friend, Mikhail Gorbachev also feels certain that US was 'intoxicated' by its power and should not impose its will on others (The News: 3 April 2006). Mr. Gorbachev is a living legend who sacrificed an empire for the safe future of not only Russia but of whole Central Eurasia. Second point, claiming that terrorists are to be kept on the run and starved, appears redundant by simple arithmetic. QDR projects colossal budgetary increases, revamping entire forces structure, seeks to expand presence beyond 130 countries through deployment of about 0.4 million US troops and 3 million direct employees of US Department of Defense. Ongoing plans and US achievements by contrast, have made little dent on the terrorists as is evident from their visible representative, Aymen al-Zawahiri's fresh demeanor. In fact Usama-bin-Ladin is heard pinpointing new targets and areas of struggle to his 'mujahideen' in a recent video telecast. About a dozen of their major acts of terrorism the world over have forced the super power to stretch on the whole planet and also in space, for cyber war. Military 'pundits' can not be bluffed on giving the neutral verdict as to who retains the initiative, forcing universal attrition-prone 'dispersion' effect, the terrorists or the US? Third point is about the feeble hope the document generates. Hope is characterized by the US resolve to dominate the threats through 'deterrence posture' that would enable her to obviate the chances of conventional mega conflagrations of which the mankind, particularly Europe bore the brunt twice during first half of 20th Century. Hope may be guesswork of a genius but guesswork after all. Fourth concern is the degree of despair QDR permeates. When US Administration is seen committed to assure the world that global war on terror is going to be a long war, one apprehends that it has stopped just short of saying that it is "never ending war". Those yearning for peace, and each one of us should, regret this scenario. Fear of being caught in the cross fire of the warring giants forebodes a gloom that would grip world's 'less-privileged' particularly when US is seen advocating reinforcing or building up fighting capacity of its coalition governments. The recipe may work well with some trepidation if it is Italy, Poland and Britain but not the third world authoritarian countries where governments have the least popular support and survive on the resuscitation mechanism, engineered by US, thus emboldening them to wreak tyranny on innocent masses under the pretext of war on terror. Such repressive acts hatch out ready terrorists or 'mujahideen'. Brutal massacre of innocent masses by some authoritarian regimes is going on beyond the western world fancy. Even US public may shudder on knowing it in later point of time. Instead QDR should have homed in on an exclusive strategy to tackle "terrorism" through dialogue and by striking at its roots precisely in a manner Marie Corelli did it, over a century ago(1895) with his pen, on the opening line of first page of his novel (The Sorrows of Satan) that reads, "Do you know what is to be poor?.....but really poor, downright, cruelly, hideously poor with a poverty that is graceless, sordid and miserable?...This is the grinding curse that keeps down noble aspirations....this is the moral cancer that eats into the heart of an otherwise well-intentioned human creature and makes him envious and malignant and inclined to the use of dynamite". One would wish Mr. Rumsfeld had a couple of Marie Corellis in his team. End to war on terror is not in the sight and QDR does not rightly commit on its time schedule but in the process the planet is drifting to the precipice that in certain point of time it may spin off the orbit of peace. Mother 'Earth' as a metaphor in the words of a Shakespeare's character, 'Portia' in 'The Merchant of Venice' may turn around to ironically implore Usama bin Ladin and George W. Bush: "O love, be moderate; allay thy ecstasy; In measure rain thy joy; scant this excess; I feel too much thy blessing; make it less, For fear I surfeit";

2006-02-05 Illustrations

Gas Prices, Hurricanes and a Madman

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Crude Oil and Gas Prices, Ready to Pay More, Much More? Did you think the non-inflation adjusted record high in oil and gas prices form hurricane Katrina last September was just a blip on the radar? If you did, you may be in for a very rude awakening. Directly below are some very compelling reasons why this may be the case. In the late seventies and early eighties automobile ownership in China was virtually non-existent. China's roadways, once synonymous with packs of bicycles, are experiencing an explosion of car traffic driven by the nation's ever growing consumer class. Last year, automobile sales in China exceeded 5 million units. China is now the world's fastest growing auto market. However, even with this recent surge of automobile ownership in China the market remains virtually untapped. At present, its estimated that significantly less than two percent of China's population, 1.3 billion people, owns an automobile but with cheaper models and a growing used car market, auto ownership in China is steadily increasing. The oil production decline rate, sometimes referred to as Hubbert's production curve or peak oil, at several major global oil fields has been considerably steeper than expected. For example, the U.K. has now become a net importer of crude oil and its production is dropping fast. Presently, crude oil production in the U.K. is below 2 million barrels per day and has appeared to reach its absolute peak of 2.9 million barrels in 2000. Shortages of unleaded gas could potentially occur this summer because the U.S. ethanol industry can't keep up with the demand for fuel-grade alcohol to mix with gasoline. Imports of ethanol could possibly meet demand but are currently subject to a 54-cents-per-gallon tariff. The current standoff between the United States and Iran, OPEC's no.2 oil producer, over Tehran's nuclear energy ambitions also applies upward pressure on the crude oil market. Although Iran has claimed in the past they will not use oil as an economic weapon that could change at any moment. Iran recently has officially gone nuclear with the first successful enrichment of Uranium. So the whole Iran situation is tense at best. AccuaWeather has forecasted the 2006 hurricane season, which starts June 1 and runs through December 1, to be more active than normal. Considering the current fragile status of refining capabilities within the U.S. any potential damage to those facilities from hurricanes this summer could have a dramatic effect on prices. Due to political instability and rising violence in Nigeria, oil companies have suspended the production of over 600,000 barrels per day of crude oil. Don't expect any quick resolutions to these long-term problems in Nigeria. At present, over 20 percent of Nigerian production remains at a stand still following attacks by militants. Crude oil demand is rising at a very fast pace. At present, it's increasing around 1.75 million barrels per day. Even with Saudi Arabia's vast crude oil resources the market will be unable to cope without some drastic measures. Furthermore, the water content is rising in the old supergiant oil fields of Saudi Arabia. Referred to as the water cut, there are rumors now circulating that water content is over 50 percent. When it reaches 80 it's for the most part game over. Of course the water cut is considered a State secret in Saudi Arabia for obvious reasons. Many of the world's major oil fields are very old and potentially are nearing or have already surpassed their peak in production. There are about 120 oilfields in the world that produce half of the world's crude oil supplies. The top 14 fields, which make up 20 percent of global supply, are over 50 years old. In Saudi Arabia, which contains a quarter of the entire global oil supply, there are only five major fields producing 90 percent of their supply. It was estimated after the Iraq invasion that this area would produce close to 5 million barrels of oil in future. However, plans to develop Iraq's infrastructure have been scrapped because of relentless insurgent attacks as well as the threat of potential civil war. Although, even with a peaceful Iraq, the two oil fields that comprised about 80% of their crude oil production in the past are in very poor condition. Crude oil prices recently broke out of a long-term bullish symmetrical triangle trend continuation pattern. For those without a working knowledge of technical analysis this is a very common type of trend continuation pattern. All of these points really lead to the potential "perfect storm" in regards to oil pricing. Petroleum is utilized in many of the products we purchase on a daily basis. There are some people that agree with our predictions and believe that we should just turn to alternate sources of fuel. This is a good idea but it is truly logistically impossible to just stop using oil. So how does this affect the ordinary person? The only way one could potentially deal with such potential calamities, as any of these many scenarios will pose, is proper preparation. I am afraid just driving a hybrid will not cut it.

2006-02-05 Illustrations

Bhutanese Refugees in Nepal

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Between 1989 and 1993 more than 95,000 Lhotshampas (Bhutanese Nepali-speaking Hindus of Nepali origin who live(d) in the southern plains of Bhutan), nearly a sixth of the kingdom's total population of approximately 600,000 have been forced to leave or forcibly evicted from the country by the Bhutanese Government. This has made Bhutan one of the highest per capita refugee generators in the world due to the implementation of the "Driglam Namzha" (Cultural Code of the Ruling Elite) with a "One Nation, One People" policy which imposed the language, dress code, and customs of the northern Bhutanese on the entire population. The crackdown on the southern Bhutanese continued as the government began closing schools and hospitals in an attempt to force out those of Nepali origin. Often the countries most overburdened with refugees are already among the poorest in the world. Nepal continues to be ranked as one of the poorest countries in the world in terms of human development yet hosts more than 100,000 Bhutanese and 20,000 Tibetan refugees. Nepals inadequate social and physical infrastructural services are overstrained by such an influx of refugees. There are seven camps with a population of 101,000 refugees, about half of whom are located in Beldangi camp. The camps are situated on the plains of east Nepal, spanning two districts (Jhapa and Morang) which are the most heavily populated in Nepal. To get to the refugee camps, one has to drive on winding dirt roads through fields or forested land for at least half an hour. The forest clears out all of sudden and distinct rows of huts appear in the clearing. It seems as if you have come upon a civilization long hidden from the rest of the world. In the seven camps there are 45 schools, 40,000 pupils and 956 teachers. The student/teacher ratio is an average 40:1 but in reality the classes are much bigger than this as the number of teachers includes headmasters and teacher trainers which are given very few periods, if any at all. A school environment provides more than just basic needs to read and write, but also provides an outlet for children to experience a sense of normality, safety and routine after many years upheaval. Most of the classrooms are temporary structures (often made of a mixture of brick, bamboo and grass) due to the limited life-span of the camps. Many of the lower classes do not have desks and the children are sitting on jute mats which have been manufactured in the camps during the income generating activities initiated by Oxfam. However, all classrooms are provided with a table and chair for the teacher. The blackboards are portable with an easel. Each school has a large open space where assemblies can take place. On structural appearances the schools are identical to many seen in the rural areas of Pokhara and Kathmandu Valley. No land is available to refugees for cultivation yet the vast majority of the refugees come from rural backgrounds. Artificial life in the camps for more than ten years is therefore not preparing the younger generation for a farming life back home in Bhutan. Most of them have not been involved in farming for the past decade and there is a fear that they are losing their knowledge and experience in the area where they will have to make their future livelihoods. Although vocational training programmes and income-generating projects have been initiated, they are not a substitute for the agricultural work to which most of the refugees will return. In contrast, access to medical care, food rations, education and training has resulted in improved conditions for many of the refugees. The Author started the green directory and 5% of turnover goes to charities in Nepal. See http://www.gannepal.org/ for a UK charity working in the education sector in Nepal.

2006-02-05 Illustrations

TV Evangelist Pat Robertson and Muhammad — Do They Think Alike

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

One group of people is sailing up a roller coaster ride of emotional rises, falls twists and turns driven by daily news flashes and bits of the latest gab from around the globe. The other group spends the time to get the history or the background of a matter and through some open minded consideration and comparison, often arrive at a more balanced and honest view of any particular issue.

The most cursory examination of Pat Robertson's remarks about the inspiration of the Islamic religion would lead to the fact that Mr. Robertson was far from the first person to entertain this possibility. Far more shocking is the fact that the first person in history to think that the visions of Muhammad were satanically inspired was the Prophet Muhammad himself.

Muhammad, born in Mecca in 570 lived through a turbulent childhood being passed back and forth from his mother to his nurse Halima. On one of the occasions when Halima returned Muhammad to his mother, she voiced her fears about fits and other behavior that made her think that he may have been demon possessed. She finally returned the care of Muhammad to his mother when he reached the age of five. But the thoughts she and others had about his possible connection to evil spirits did not end there.

Muhammad was disturbed by the moral decadence around the hub of Mecca and began pondering what might bring the Muslims to recognition of a greater power and a return to a more moral life. That compunction drove him to the caves around Mecca where he began to meditate and search for a connection to that higher power or God.

He had many dreams, visions and revelations as a result of his search, however, those visions troubled him so much that he was driven to the brink of suicide. Muhammad was the first one to doubt that his revelations had anything to do with God at all. He thought his visions were a product of the "Jinn" or satanic spirits.

We can thank his wife for talking him out of that doubt. She told him that the visions were truly inspired by divinity and should be made known to the world. There is little doubt also that Muslims would give credit to a woman for starting Islam, considering the status women hold in that religion, but by all accounts she should be credited with it. He was inclined to take no credit for it at all.

A basic fact almost always overlooked by Islam or any other religion in the world is that "not everything that is supernatural is Divine." Can Satan give people visions and revelations? Let's just say you can bet your life on it. And that is what you would have to bet but what price is the losing?

As for Pat Robertson's remarks about Islam not being a peaceful religion it is certain that he is far from the first to come to that conclusion as well. Rev Franklin Graham the son of evangelist Billy Graham was one of the first voices to go on record after the events of 9/11 in New York City. If the adage that "deeds speak louder than words" is true then the radical Muslims who perpetrated the infamous deed were the first to go on record saying Islam is not a peaceful religion. Subsequent acts of terror spawned by radical Islam all over the world have kept that message alive and well ever since.

Over 600 homes and many churches in the town of Tentena a province of Central Sulawesi were burned down or destroyed by jihad driven Islam. The group called "Laskar Jihad" in that region is said to be bent on the destruction of all Christianity since November of 2001. Over 15,000 Christians have fled the area since then. In Indonesia alone over 9000 Christians have been killed or uprooted since 1999. That's a heck of a record for a so called "peaceful religion" Is anybody listening?

How can the most educated generation in the history of the world not notice that the Islamic jihad is part of the message of the Quran itself? It is the doctrine of Islam and is central to all Islamic view and behavior. If the constitution of the United States had as one of its tenants the destruction of every other political system in the world wouldn't somebody notice that? If the Bible had a New Testament call for the death of anyone who wouldn't believe it, would any one take note of that? Yet we are asked to ignore the very essence of the writings of the Quran in favor of a promise that after all "Islam is a peaceful religion." There is a word for this juvenile notion and in keeping with its juvenile premise lets just say that word is "baloney"

Muhammad went into a cave and since he came out people have been dying all over the world but never so much as lately. Jesus went into a cave as a dead man and came out alive and with a message and a promise of life to anyone who would believe. Wow, what a blatant contrast. But will that change anyone's mind on a large scale? No, it will not, but on a one to one basis it has been changing minds and hearts for centuries and it will continue to do so till the end of time. But don't be discouraged even Jesus knew that the world would turn their backs on his greatest accomplishment and said ..."If they hear not Moses and the prophets, neither will they be persuaded, though one rose from the dead." Luke 16:31

Rev Bresciani is the author of two Christian books. One book entitled An American Prophet and His Message or Questions and Answers on the Second Coming of Christ is published by Xulon Press. He also has hundreds of articles on religion, politics, advice and current events published both online and in print. Visit www.americanprophet.org

2006-02-05 Illustrations

Meaningful 'Giants' in Eurasian Balkan

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Meaningful Giants in 'Eurasian Balkan' written by: BrigGen (ret) Muhammad Aslam Khan Niazi, 28-Feb-06 Introduction Five newly independent Central Asian Republics (Kazakhstan, Turkmenistan, Uzbekistan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan) and three South Caucasus countries (Georgia, Armenia, and Azerbaijan) have been termed as 'Eurasian Balkan'. Two possible candidates to join the arena are Turkey and Iran. The sensitivity of the area could not have been spelt out better with a single term what Mr. Brzezinski did about a decade ago. As is evident from the map, Azerbaijan is South Caucasus country as well as a Caspian littoral. Similarly Kazakhstan and Turkmenistan besides being Central Asian countries are also Caspian littorals for having direct coast on the Caspian Sea. Iran is a Middle Eastern country as well as a Caspian littoral. Russia gains added significance when it is a Caspian littoral and a Caucasus as well as a European country simultaneously. Uzbekistan is not a Caspian littoral but is considered a part of Caspian Region, only in the hydrocarbon geological context. Titans in the Arena with Responsibility? Scholars see geo-strategic and economic interests of US and Europe inseparable; yet through some variants in the interpretation, particularly in the backdrop of oil depletion scenario by mid of the century. Whatever the emphasis to prove whether economic interests are contingent upon the geo-strategic constraints of 'Eurasian Balkan', a focal point has emerged that geo-economic rivalry in the region is helping geo-strategic competition to flourish as the New Great Game. But there are some exceptions like Stephen Sestanovich who testified otherwise in 1998, maintaining that US policy does not begin from an assessment of our economic interests, but rather from geo-strategic stand point. Shall one assume that by asserting his country's geo-strategic stance; and being a US Govt functionary, he was by implication conducting a counter maneuver 58 years later as a response to, what Joseph Stalin and Adolph Hitler had conspired in November 1940 against USA to keep it out of Eurasia for geo-strategic implications? Yet the world knows US economic interests' priority is far higher than any other consideration because of the Caspian Region that constitutes the nucleus of 'Eurasian Balkan.' The Region's petroleum geology holds tremendous potentials; with 4 to 5% proved reserves of the world total proved reserves each in oil and natural gas. US involvement in and across Caucasus has picked up distinct momentum since mid nineties. For the Persian Gulf, an instrument of energy security in form of Carter Doctrine was already in place but debate heated up on the desirability of extending umbrella to Caspian-Caucasus Region as well. That meant additional task for US CENTCOM, which, in the event of simultaneous engagements could run out of breath. Therefore another military alliance, NATO, was to roll over the region of interest with expanded scope and tasks. US Govt thus made her fractured energy policy rather conspicuous. Some pertinent questions can be raised. Why did US resort to a sort of knee-jerk action in this regard when 'energy security' concerns could be addressed even through the instrument of 'diplomacy' in Eurasian Balkan? Did US conceive the ramifications of trampling over Caspian-Caucasus sensitivities particularly when the region is skirted around by four regional powers, Turkey to the west, Russia to the north, Iran to the south and China to the east? Partial answer to these questions is available through Douglas Blum comments, saying, it is difficult to escape the conclusion that America's Caspian Policy has been predicated on the illusion of a unipolar moment: the notion that Washington can orchestrate and subsequently can maintain a convivial alignment of international forces. The implication is that it is possible to fashion relations in the region so as to constrain Russian decision making with little or no blowback from Moscow. When such is the frank confession as well as approach, other actors in the 'game' would not like to take it lying low. In fact US struggle can be viewed even beyond the boundaries of 'New Great Game' when it is now seen struggling to construct an energy order in Middle East and Africa as well. Therefore as a part of grand energy strategy, US would perhaps never shy to foster 'the West' friendly integration of Mediterranean as well Caspian-Caucasus countries that would, of necessity need force projection and hence at least in the first stage the emerging proof is in sight: the expansion of NATO. Steve Levine has apt remarks to make that the new approach, coordinated by the US National Security Council is designed to break Russia's grip on Central Asian oil export. The objective is to protect the survival of independent states in the region and to protect US corporate interests. Completion of Baku-Tbillisi-Ceyhan Pipeline, being celebrated by the Western camp as a unique marvel and a feat of engineering, has certainly the potentials to divert oil flow from north (Russia) or south (Iran) to the Western's west. In over all perception when policy appreciations of the Western think tanks clearly point to the need of engaging Russia and other actors, such perceived blow to a fragile balance of power in 'Eurasian Balkan' though credible achievement for the West, introduces an element of dichotomy of their acts and facts. At least in oil and gas context: it amounts to blowing hot and cold in a single breath. Carter Page's admission sounds realistic that current US Govt policy towards Caspian Region could come under increased pressure in the years to come. He is of the view that the proximity to the conflicts in Afghanistan and Iraq as well as the possibility of sustained high-energy prices could potentially sharpen the US public's attention on this region at some stage. As regards Iran, US till recently had been caught up with ambivalence. Iran Libya Sanctions Act (ILSA) in place since 1996 has emerged as haunting US tool for Iran. There had been tense diplomatic war moments when each contrived a crooked title for the other. US fears about Iran abetting terrorism, push for WMDs and scuttling Middle East process have stayed green though occasionally streaks of reconciliation were also visible. However the mistrust has grown to a degree that it would take Herculean effort for both the Govts to garnish public mood to any compromise. Therefore in immediate scenario, Iran is compelled to react, the only trump card in Iran's hands. On the US part, increased commitment of forces in the region may be perceived as a 'stabilizer' but suspicions get even more intensified with these two countries (Russia, Iran) and recently China joining their stance. Stephen Blank quoting Washington Post, comments that the Pentagon also recently allocated areas of responsibility...US European Command got the Caucasus and the Central Command received Central Asia. Although this is as much an administrative device to supervise the ongoing programme of military cooperation...it also represents a major step for contingency planning, and Moscow knows it. It is rather simple to include Iran and China in the 'know-list' as well. Since Clinton era, Caspian Region has been assumed as a back up source for oil and gas to the Middle East. In fact, gradually the bellicosity is exaggerating that shapes the aggressive mood of the US Administration. Some US analysts call on the United States not only to take the lead in pacifying the entire area now, arranging peace in Georgia, Nagorno-Karabakh, North Caucasus, Tajikistan, Afghanistan and perhaps Kurdish war with Turkey, but also to over throw the government of Iran or to orchestrate a grand coalition advocated by Brzezinski. While the larger portion of such a prescription sounds merit, Iran centric part violates all norms of international relations, forgetting that Iran is doing comfortable business with the whole comity of nations with a few exceptions. The scrutiny of the revealing events suggests that US have neither met any considerable success nor are likely to: courtesy; the Iranian intransigence and the play of power politics of other actors conceived with a stretch of imagination to any limit possible. Searching the soul of US role; two prominent thrust lines emerge; first that US genuinely desires to bring an elements of peace, stability and pluralism in Caspian-Caucasus region at terms pliant to her interests. Secondly, any threat emerging to energy security scenario shall outweigh all the other considerations to stem out that threat. This recipe of US specific orientation; call it a grand strategy or New Great Game is bound to work with certain trepidation till such time other actors also assert their role in the arena to challenge her. In a desperate setting Russia, Iran and China have wherewithal to target her Eurasian interests because none other in the region is potent enough to even care about itself. In a lingering stalemate scenario, present honeymoon between US and some Caspian-Caucasus states may be encroached upon by the time factor (Uzbekistan is an example). In that eventuality, Russia, Iran or China could emerge as acceptable hegemons. By dint of US presence, hopes are on the extreme. One; that the energy resources, the region harbors, are ordained to raise the Caspian littoral societies to the Western level and second is, what Michael Mandelbaum said it, like a metaphor of a pressure cooker, what comes out of pressure cooker is always a matter of taste but on one point all cooks agree: the least desirable outcome, the one to be avoided at all cost, is an explosion. While whole world including Europe may agree, does the US, the leader too? Recommendation When the world is getting hoarse on the sight of 'pressure cooker', unfortunately no platform at the Eurasian Balkan level is being evolved for the dialogue among the Titans that may be long drawn process to test the guts of their energy wizards and the diplomats. Consequently international relationing remains prone to tremendous stress, yet none is inclined to admit the presence of such malady lest it may be labeled for the loathsome game. In an Asian dialect, they say that if pigeon closed its eyes, not willing to recognize the impending danger, the cat would devour it anyway. Waiting for the cat would not certainly be a prudent option. Onus to avert such a scenario lies on the leader (US), as a command responsibility that it has taken up so willingly! Author Brig Gen (ret) Muhammad Aslam Khan Niazi has military experience of about 32 years in Regiment of Artillery. Recipient of sitara-e-imtiaz (military) he served on various command, staff, instruction, administration, operational, research and evaluation appointments during his career. Holds first class Masters' degree in International Relations from University Of Peshawar. Has appeared as defense analyst on PTV World channel for a couple of times. During the service and after retirement in September 2001, has contributed several articles and brief research papers in Army Defense Journal, Pakistan Army Green Book, other national/international English journals and the dailies. Currently, he is pursuing his doctorate at advance stages since 2002 in Area Study Center (Russia,China and Central Asia) University of Peshawar, Pakistan. (makni49@yahoo.com).

2006-02-05 Illustrations

Conflict in Jammu and Kashmir - PART II

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Operations Other Than War Operations Other than War (OOW), relate to activities devolving around the strategy of 'Winning the Hearts and Minds'. It focuses on people as the Centre of Gravity, it believes in Conflict Prevention. For in the strategy of Conflict Prevention efforts are made to stymie the ills of conflict resolution, which deals with mechanisms required to resolve a conflict. Since conflict is a pattern of expression of human restraint, perhaps it is right to assume that it has come to stay. However, to prevent escalation beyond tolerance level, the essence of ensuring it remains within wraps is essentially information upload. OOW's important objective is the information domain. It aims at meeting peoples aspirations through progress and development. It has to be visible and has to be a sustained meaningful drive towards achievement of excellence. The key to 'Winning the hearts and minds' campaign is to be understood, for it is the people who have to kept in mind, their needs, their culture, their values, their sensitivities and above all the need of speaking to them the language they understand, and that is the language of the heart. Surprisingly, the requirements of the people are very small. They just want to get a feeling of being cared for, a feeling of being heard and understood. The Army has taken on this strategy in a big way by streamlining the activities toward four major focus areas. These are, education, health and family care, women empowerment and community development. All these areas are being addressed with the support of the Government machinery either at the State level or at the level of the Central Government, because it is important to give due recognition to the local administration and local authorities. The major implementation advantage is that the troops of the Indian Army are deployed right across, where the civil administration perhaps has very little direct contact with the people. It is in facilitation that generates goodwill and goodwill generates bonding and bonding is the fabric of the information thread. It is by these methods that there is a hope of drawing the people away the support base of the terrorists, of taking away the oxygen from the terrorists. In brief, therefore, this strategy is the base of winning a conflict and it requires sustenance and should be people driven rather that personality driven. Personalities keep changing and many take along with them the concepts or thoughts leaving a vacuum in the area of operation, but if you engineer a people's movement who are the tools of successive personalities in the game of conflict prevention, it is only then, that their involvement and requirements cannot be brushed aside by any successor in the field. To conclude I would like to once again browse over the factors covered during the course of my series on conflict in Jammu and Kashmir and would like to remind you that conflicts have become a part of our system and we have to cope up with this new challenge by essentially being watchful. There are no boundaries, no rear lines beyond which it will not be possible for the enemy, seen or unseen to reach. It is a vast playing field where the stake holders are the people, driven by certain mis-represented ambitions fabricated by a select few in perseverance of blind goals. The conflict in the State of J&K has been a long winded effort to destabilise successive governments and to ensure curtailment of progress and growth. The importance of this realisation that we have to adopt different strategies to suit the time, and believe in the concept of conflict transformation, cannot be over emphasised. The demands of human security include a balanced view of tragedies that are the result of terrible omissions as well as dreadful commissions. Since security is often considered only in the context of military challenges and violent deeds, it is necessary to emphasise the massive toll of human neglect. An adequate concept of human security in the contemporary world must include at least a clear focus on human lives and should not only relate to security in the military context. The importance of defining the role of society cannot be undermined and social arrangements in making human lives more secure in a constructive way need to be thought out in a very deliberate way.

2006-02-05 Illustrations

Thoughtfulness

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Of paramount importance and relevancy to true and lasting human accomplishment is the way we deliberate between short term gain and long term accomplishment. The overriding consideration must be our degree of thoughtfulness. Thoughtfulness means an honest examination of the desired objectives over time. It means adherence to the primary value of truth while addressing perceived short term needs, without distorting the long term goals. Those trusted with overseeing the mission must be ever vigilant in not allowing principle to yield to exigency, especially when the wiles and demands of the surreptitious or loud and aggressive are insinuating themselves into the mix for personal gain.

If the self interested are allowed to dominate or eclipse principle through corrosive influence, the consequent decline in overall diligence becomes the acceptable norm. Capitalism today, the most pervasive and influential system in industrialized society, has become a predominate fixture in perpetuating this decline. International conglomerates wield unchallenged power over people and nations only to satisfy their own narrow ends, with no regard for external ramifications, yet they survive and flourish essentially unfettered and unchallenged.

Corporations today are predominately fixated on stock price and maximizing profit. In a small town where scale is manageable and knowable, a business realizes is place, role and efficacy in the economy of the area. It needs a profit to survive, a condition understood and accepted, but kept in balance by the ethics, wherewithal and means of the community. In a healthy environment, it is a contributing member of the whole in both usefulness and service adding to the overall welfare and ambiance of the community. Corporations on the other hand lavish outrageously excessive rewards on the higher-ups while they in turn establish destructive precedents that compensate managers for short term results; treat employees as easily expendable pawns, and sacrifice substance to image enhancement. Products and services possessing intrinsic significance become irrelevant. Hyped value with no regard to consequence, but profitable, is the primary consideration.

Corporations dominate the landscape. The majority of us toil in increasingly meaningless, stressful and time demanding occupations, with credit and consumption heralded by the mass media our reward. A relentless barrage of commercial miasma invades our psychic at every venue, branding their version of morality into the fabric of our daily lives. Image makers, indiscriminately selling manufactured desire, have elevated the irresponsible personality to social prominence, even hero worship. Without intervention, and none appears likely, the declining circumstance of all our lives will continue to deteriorate as greed and intolerance perpetuates itself. Fateful decisions should not be made in a vacuum by people with vested interests, which unfortunately is exactly the situation we now find ourselves in. We have abdicated our intuitive duty to build a more sustainable existence by giving power over our lives to the purveyors of fear and greed.

In a perverted antithesis to the quest to find relevancy and meaning in the world, mass media advertising is providing manufactured identity, through product worship, to target audiences, most egregiously to the young and searching. Mass marketers cater to moral insecurity and foster irresponsibility through aggrandizement of inane idols. They endorse and promote immediate gratification and intimidation through peer pressure. They supplant the quest for substance and meaning with drivel and triviality. In attempts to appear righteous they unabashedly employ insidious public relations tactics to play on emotion or loyalties. The absurd and demeaning circumstance of popular culture shows how much we hunger for access to meaning within ourselves, and how far short we have fallen in attempting to find it.

Most of us go about life as though meaning where something outside of us, the purview of philosophers or poets. We focus on results with little regard for process. Our present mind set and world view of exploitation and quick fixes, without regard for resource husbandry or spiritual interconnectedness, has gained us temporal abundance but depressing materialism and its attendant waste. Individual freedom is now overshadowed by individualistic irresponsibility; decency corrupted by self-righteousness and moral superiority. We confuse justice with revenge, accept the decline of authenticity, and support the misconception that fear can be overcome by preemptive violence.

We have evolved to the point in time where we should be utilizing every means and opportunity available to us to intensify the search for meanings within the interconnected whole. But there is no venue or leader or guiding principle that can be trusted to launch such a campaign. Because of our pragmatic approach to life, we no longer have authentic heroes, heroes with any transcending relevance, to show us the way either in parable or deed. We have been reduced to contrived and orchestrated mass adulation for anti intellectual success icons, race car drivers and ball players. We seek to mark time with trivial diversions with no inkling or thought to embarking on a hero's journey to forge a sustainable new paradigm world view, or to explore the spirit within.

Mankind needs and seeks to find meaning, but settles for beads and trinkets. It can only be through widespread thoughtfulness on an individual level, focusing on things that have intrinsic value, that we can hope to regain some semblance of authenticity in our lives.

2006-02-05 Illustrations

Denmark Cartoons or Islamic Caricatures — Six of One or Half Dozen of the Other

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Denmark's Jyllands-Posten newspaper issued an apology and whisked it off to the Jordanian news agency Petra for publishing cartoons that supposedly were insulting to the prophet Muhammad. The arguments about the poor taste of the cartoonist notwithstanding, Anders Fogh Rasmussen, Denmark's prime minister says he and his government cannot apologize for the country since the newspaper is independent and not an agency of the government. To most people this makes sense but Islam is not most people.

It would seem that this entire tip toeing around Islam is far above absurdity and much closer to insanity. Can anyone remember an apology coming to Indonesia for the bombings there by radical Islamists? Did the British get an apology for the bombings of its subway? Who has heard one representative of any radical Islamic group apologize for the death and destruction wrought in America on 9/11?

Is the apology offered by the Danish newspaper for there lack of taste and discretion or is it for other reasons? Is it because boycotts of Danish products like milk, insulin and food stuffs? Or finally is it the fear or reprisals in the form of terrorist attacks on embassies, public places, schools and homes. Perhaps it is only a reasonable attempt at diplomacy that a free nation would employ under any circumstances in a civilized world.

Terrorism by any other name is still just terrorism, insulted prophets notwithstanding. If free nations have decided not to negotiate with terrorists on any level then we are forced to ask, why then are we making apologies for cartoons? Last time I looked, no cartoon had ever toppled a building or killed a child in the street.

The behavior of radical Islam is creating a cartoon all on its own. It is more like a caricature than a cartoon. A caricature by nature is a cartoon that depicts something by exaggerating it's most prominent or obtrusive qualities. The "would be" beauty has hips and other feminine features exaggerated to say she is voluptuous. The guy who wants his strength accentuated has the artist draw muscles way out of proportion to his body to accentuate that point.

Islam has been creating a caricature not with brush or pen for the last several years all around the globe. It has exaggerated features including the bombing of men, women and children almost always without mercy, without warning and without reason. Not one apology has ever been offered for this dreadful radical Islamic cartoon.

I have been warning Christians for over thirty years of the coming portent of the world's last dictator commonly referred to as the Antichrist. It is well known to them that the bible clearly predicts that he will exalt himself above every other world leader before him and above every kind of worship of God, be it the worship of the true God or some aberration, heresy or cult. II Thessalonians 2:4 "Who opposeth and exalteth himself above all that is called God, or that is worshipped; so that he as God sitteth in the temple of God, showing himself that he is God."

It is barley known to the Muslim faith and certainly would not be heeded or even acknowledged but that last dictator will make no apologies to them either. He will endeavor to crush every major religion in the world. He will momentarily succeed but not with warfare of force but rather by drawing the entire world into an economic system that no one will escape.

Only a handful of westerners have ever converted to Islam in its entire history because of pictures it draws much like the Danish cartoon. Those pictures make a caricature of its ugliest components which are death, judgment and punishment, both on an unwarranted and unreasonable scale. Maybe civilized people still prefer pictures of a gentle Savior with children around him. Or a woman caught in adultery saved from stoning by a merciful Messiah who came to save the world rather than judge it. Millions of people have been converted by these pictures and will be much more until the end of time.

Rev Bresciani is the author of two popular Christian books, one on the second coming of Christ. He has hundreds of articles published both online and in print. Visit the website at www.americanprophet.com

2006-02-05 Illustrations

The Hurricane Katrina survivors will be victims again... GUARANTEED!

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

This time it will be our own governments mostly that will do the victimizing but some businesses will get it on it as well. Its simply one of the biggest revenue generating processes utilized by various levels of governments that very little is known of by the regular citizen. It causes family savings to be lost, assets to go uncovered and even inheritances to disappear over time. It victimizes the poor disproportionately than any other class in our society. It takes away from those who need it the most... like poor, middle class and poverty level citizens. But this process has also been known to victimize people of all classes and races in the United States. What are we talking about? Unclaimed Money is the name of the game. Millions of dollars that were in utility deposits, savings bonds, bank accounts, family properties, safe deposits contents and a slew of other unclaimed assets and money is turned over to various government agencies every year, with only a small amount ever being returned to the rightful owners or heirs. This unclaimed money windfall is actually multiplied TENFOLD because of disasters like Hurricane Katrina. During these times there is a very very large portion of those who lose their home and important papers in the process, to also forget the location of many of their assets. Once these assets go unclaimed for a specified amount of time, they are usually turned over to a government agency with the hope of finding the owners of record. But history has shown that these unclaimed assets and unclaimed money accounts are seldom recovered because the government does a very poor job of tracking the unclaimed accounts owners or rightful heirs. This is the same government that can track you down for past taxes, criminal behavior, outstanding tickets and summonses, child support and just about any outstanding debt you may owe them. But they seem to have an inability to deploy these same tactics to return your unclaimed money and unclaimed property when these came into their coffers. Can you imagine how many THOUSANDS or even TENS OF THOUSANDS of bank accounts, family deeds, bonds, insurance policies, store and utility deposits information has been lost due to the recent disaster? The sad part is that these are people who are victims already, and they are also prime targets for this unclaimed property victimization that comes later... courtesy of the state and federal governments. Did you know that it is estimated that 7 out of 10 people have unclaimed money that they don't know about? That is an AMAZING 70%! How would you like a business where people placed their valuables with you but only 30% of them ever came to claim their property later? That would be a very desirable business venture wouldn't it? Well it is also estimated that these government agencies are now holders of over $1 TRILLION dollars of unclaimed money and unclaimed property. Have you already been a victim of this practice? Has a present or deceased family member been a victim of this unclaimed money and unclaimed property practice? Do you have unclaimed money owed to you? Don't delay and find out today because the truth of the matter is that most of the people that are reading this article already have money owed to them, or they will have money owed to them in the future. The key is knowing all of the places to look.

2006-02-05 Illustrations

Conflict in Jammu and Kashmir (J&K) PART I

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

India and Pakistan have in the past fought four wars over J&K and held several talks to resolve the 56 year old problem, but till now no tangible results have emerged, except for a composite dialogue. Although, both India and Pakistan are trying to move the peace process ahead, yet there are very few indications in a policy shift. Pakistan continues to stick on to the line of Kashmir remaining a dispute territory and an 'unfinished agenda' of Partition, India maintains its stand on J&K "Accession document" which remains final and complete and the problem which remains is cross border terrorism. Most conflicts around the world remain unresolved; however, there are exceptions and dialogues have resulted in signing peace agreements like the signing of the Aceh accord, the Northern Ireland peace accord and the diffusion of tension in the North Korean nuclear issue after the six party talks. Notwithstanding the above, tension is still rampant in a number of places after a brief spell of peace and sensibility. There are no 'rear lines' where democratic societies are safe and actually a 'war against terror' is a misnomer, because it is difficult to wage war against an unknown enemy. The phases of conflict in J&K have followed different patterns and have been terrain and climate driven. The shift in strategies in the conflict has been dependent on the target and visibility, of a seen or an unseen enemy of a stable or an unstable Government and to apply appropriate pressures, the masters remotely separated from ground situation, at times apathetic, institute checks and balances through their respective styles of governance. In this overall process, the centre of gravity, the main focus of all strategies in combating terrorism, the people of J&K have become secondary and the Security Forces deployed for the security of the people, at times forget the purpose of their stay resulting in a paradigm shift in the overall security of the entire region. To offset the impasse, a continuous process of refinement, in policies with changed scenarios, keeping the new world order as a calibrated system of progression, is an inescapable commitment for bringing about peace and stability in the entire state of J&K. Pattern of Conflict The pattern of conflict has varied from a mix of seen and unseen enemy presenting different targets in the State of J&K, to a conventional type of declared war scenario. In the initial phases of the first conflict of 1947—48, Maj Gen Akbar Khan of the Pakistan Army orchestrated the infiltration of the Kabailies, who created mayhem, in looting and arson in the Kashmir Valley and at other places and tried to capture Srinagar. They nearly succeeded in their effort and could only be stalled in their tracks on the arrival of the Indian Army troops on the 27th of October 1947, a day after the signing of the 'Instrument of Accessation'. In 1965m Operation Gibraltar with the Pakistan military disguised as civilians tried to make inroads and incite the civilian population to rebel and tie the security forces down while the Pakistani army would attack along the Line of Control, a mix of seen and unseen enemy. The 14 days war of 1971, which was fought in J&K was essentially a war with a visible enemy and then came a phase of an unseen, insular force which became difficult to identify a friend or foe and it is 16 years since, which has given birth to the concept of a proxy war or a limited war. It will now be pertinent to see a shift in the pattern of the proxy war scenario from 1989 onwards and the jig saw puzzle of the change in locations of the thrust of the conflict will start making sense when the inputs of terrain and demography are meshed into it. The initial phase was concentrated in the Valley, with the insurgency movement gaining impetus with the kidnapping of the three Air Force personnel who were subsequently killed. The problem spread in the Kashmir Valley and the Security Forces came down heavily on them and the requirement of raising a force to deal with the problem was felt. The raising of the Rashtriya Rifles Force (RR) commenced in 1990 and now the force boasts of strength of over 60 Battalions. The conflict then gained impetus on the higher reaches of Shamshabari Ranges in the Kishtwar — Warwan areas and though inputs on such camps were scanty, yet little action was taken to confirm reports and to deal with the situation. The focus shifted from predominantly Kashmir to Kishtwar and Bhaderwah areas of the Doda District and efforts were made by the insurgent tanzeems to become active during the second half of 1990's, while near normalcy returned to the Valley. With the attention of the security forces now focussed in the Jammu Region, Pakistan in the guise of mujahaddin, occupied the Kargil heights and tried to cut off the only life line to Ladakh. However, with the importance attached to clearing the opposition, the Pakistani designs were neutralised and again till 2001, the overall situation improved. With some respite to the security forces and with the requirements of the tanzeems showing their prowess, it became important for their to re-charge their struggle and the focus was once again to raise the ante in the Kashmir Region with infiltration attempts on the rise in the Jammu Division. However, when the situation became difficult for the Security Forces in 2002—03, 'Sarp Vinash' which caught the head lines in the months of May 2003, when the Army launched 'Operation Sarp Vinash', which caught the headlines in May 2003. Later, that year a unilateral declaration of cease fire, along the Line of Control by Pakistan, and the ferocity of operation reduced considerably.

2006-02-05 Illustrations

Military Media Relations — Kargil War

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

There have been media reports that the military has been talking out of turn, and counter views have also been expressed on the topic by some supposed thinkers. It is not by individual perceptions that policies are made and the subject, in today's context needs to debated with select examples of the world military media relations kept as a backdrop and the examples of using the various media tools as force multipliers. Military has opened up to the media only recently. Kargil operation was the first televised war, which brought the conflict to peoples homes. It showed the war zone to the world and changed people's perception on the pattern of conflict in high altitude areas. It reduced the gap between the military and the civilians and connected people with the lives of soldiers, who carry out their duties even at the peril of their lives. It is in their prompt response at the borders that our countrymen can remain comfortable at their homes. It was a bonding established and a national fervour built which brought about unity in diversity. The up front reportage altered the world opinion in our favour and justified the conflict, making Pakistan the bad guy. All this happened only because the media by India was handled with an aim, a vision and the public, in many ways participated in the conflict. The negatives, to balance out, have also been true, with at times some media personnel being given preferential treatment by the military and the same media men, when rubbished on an occasion have been nasty in the reporting about the military. Such practices are reasonably common, despite the users in the game being quite aware, and such practices are bound to take place in a democratic system, yet it is important to analyse the reasons for the reporters adopting a sudden change in their outlook. It must be appreciated, after all, they are also individuals and bound to err and swing one way or the other to gauge the mood swing of the readers. Just prior to Kargil, Kosovo happened, and just a little later the United Nations Force launched an operation in Sierra Leone. A brief mention of the two will facilitate in framing opinions on the media being used as a weapon system. While Kosovo was a 'War of Will' at least as projected by the western media, which gave only a one sided picture with Mr Reuben giving his daily briefings; the Sierra Leone intervention, despite the Indian contingent being actually responsible for the success of the mission, was over shadowed by the British media which highlighted the contributions made by the British troops in the success of the operations. However, damage control was carried out by the Indian Foreign Service at a later stage more as a reaction by sending the Indian media to cover the happenings, bringing to focus the Indian Army's actions which brought about peace in the Region. More recently, the American coalition war in Iraq was again a reminder that a war can be projected as a justifiable war, if the events are doctored well and projected selectively. The above examples bring to focus one important aspect, and that is, media has to be intelligently applied and it must be situation oriented. It cannot adorn a template which has to dittoed in all situations and the content also has to vary. An over or an under play will neither be good for the public nor for the military. The responses from the military have to be couched and well articulated. A total ban on interaction with the media will give rise to speculation and invariably result in misreporting. An over eager, inadequately thought of hurried response, is again likely to give a negative projection. The bait by the media will always be given with smiling faces approaching the military and wanting to be the first to report an incident and in the bargain getting access to an event. It may also be that the military, at times may feel that some other security agency may take the credit for the task accomplished and therefore prematurely reveal some details to pre-empt the other stake holders, which at times may result in tendering apologies at a later stage. Such out of turn exposures to the media must be guarded against and that comes with fore thought and practice Hence, it is important that media education is imparted to the military as a professional subject. It should be taught in schools of instructions right from entree level and should be practiced over the years. The importance of the information warfare with media as a force multiplier has to be understood and it has to be correctly used as a weapon of decision making, a weapon of success.

2006-02-05 Illustrations

"A HOLY TERROR" - OUR FREEDOM IS AT STAKE

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

?A HOLY TERROR? ? OUR CHERISHED FREEDOM IS AT STAKE Vosselaar, Belgium - 29-Dec-05 ? Muslim terrorism is actually as well in the United States as in Europe and the other states belonging to the ?West?(Australia, New Zealand and Israel), the main concern of the populations and Governments. Radical Muslims make no attempt do disguise that they want to destroy first Israel and then the rest of the ?West?. At the same time, China, India and the East Asian countries are ready to play a dominant role in world politics. In order to establish treaties, Muslim states are already approaching China and China already delivers parts of nuclear installations and missiles to these countries). Are we heading towards a ?Clash of civilizations? (as Samuel P. Huntington calls it)? Our future doesn?t look bright at the moment. Our countries are politically divided. Europe shows a kind of anti-Americanism and anti-Semitism flares up again. The writer?s website deals comprehensively with these problems on the pages: justification, information and bibliography. http://www.westernfreedom.com In Robert Maegh?s thriller ?A Holy Terror?, a story as up-to-date and frightening as tomorrow?s newspaper, several terrorist organisations merge and begin to forge plans to establish the multi-national supremacy of Islam. In Sydney, Australia, John Friedmann and Siobhan Bergman stumble upon a murdered man and obtain possession of a terrorist map which gives vital information about future terrorist actions. In their quest to regain the information, the fundamentalists murder Friedmann?s wife. The Holy Terror is set in motion around the world and there is an evil assault on Paris while the drinking water in Sydney is poisoned. Mossad and C.I.A. are involved. Siobhan and a Jewish officer are abducted. Will they be in time to rescue Siobhan? Can the extremists be stopped before they bring terror to the rest of the world? The extensive biography of the Belgian writer Robert Maegh, who spent several years in the Middle East (especially Iran) can be consulted on the website: http://www.westernfreedom.com (page about the author) Contact Robert Maegh for more insights into this topic. Direct line: 32 (0)14620138, Email: degree@skynet.be Other helpful information regarding the book can be found at: http://www.westernfreedom.com. For More Information Contact: Robert Maegh degree@skynet.be http://www.westernfreedom.com

2006-02-05 Illustrations

Am I Gay?

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Am I Gay?

I guess this is a question a lot of young men will have asked themselves during their confusing adolescent years; it's certainly one that every gay man will at some time have had to tackle, and come to terms with on discovering the true answer. Of course, there are the lucky ones - the majority - those people for whom their sexuality has never been in any doubt. They are the very people who, by their heterosexual appetite and acknowledged prowess with the opposite sex, may have initiated that desperate question in other minds. But to not be one of that majority, to not have the same appetite for the opposite sex, does not immediately make anyone gay.

Times are changing slowly, perhaps too slowly, for most children still grow up in an overwhelmingly heterosexual world - a world that will by its very existence from an early age have instilled expectations and preconceived ideas in every boy's mind - so should the time come that he reaches puberty, and his juvenile years, and he finds that those expectations are not being met as they are by his friends, he becomes concerned. He begins to suspect that he is different to the mates that he grew up with - and it troubles him. But trouble is too weak a word. At this stage of human development to suddenly not be ranked along with one's peers can be devastating. The questioning and gnawing fears in a boy's mind may remain closely guarded secrets - because they have to be.

Faced with this feeling of being different, young men may react in many different ways. Only a few will cope with the situation easily. Some may become reclusive; some may turn to bullying others; some to drink and drugs; and some may undoubtedly turn towards criminal behaviour to gain their much needed kudos - however, most will try to maintain an act: an appearance of being perfectly "normal". This act, and the feeling of a need to prove themselves to their family and friends, will often only exasperate the problem. And when thoughts for the same sex enter their minds, thoughts that they may believe to be bad or wrong, a great feeling of guilt can engulf them. It can be a very desperate time in a young man's life. It is a time when some may even come to consider suicide - and that, purely the result of the failings, the teachings and the expectations of a mainly ignorant heterosexual world, should never be!

Puberty, and the working of the sexual equipment, arrives at different times for different people. There is nothing wrong or untoward about being a late developer - many races are won by those who had a poor start. And even once everything is found to be in working order, it is quite normal for the feelings and the desires that arrive around this time to be "strange", to say the least! The sudden explosion of hormones the body has to try to make some sense out of can for some bring forth quite peculiar urges, fascinations, and attractions. At this time it is not uncommon for those who will later be "normal" heterosexual men to have "a crush" on someone of the same sex. It may be a schoolmaster; it may be a friend - it could be anyone, there are no rules, and it may not just be the one person - it may be many. There is nothing wrong, and this is not the time to fear one's sexual orientation; more a time to consider its possibilities.

For most who have arrived at this stage, they will have had no preparation for the alternative sexual orientations that life can deal out. Such is the failing of society, for around one in ten males will turn out to be gay, and around one in five males will at some time in their lives have gay sex. Each one of these people will be some proud parent's son. They could be anyone's son. These are facts that may be hard to accept by some people, but to life itself they are the "normal".

Sexual orientation is not hereditary, neither can it be instilled by corruption, persuasion, lifestyle or by any other means - and no matter what anyone may tell you, or claim, it most definitely cannot be changed. It is what you are. Were it to be any different, then in a vastly heterosexual society, and with few gay people actually reproducing, by long before now there would have been no gay people left in the world. But it is a known fact that the percentage of homosexual people in the world has varied little throughout all history, and although we may yet not understand the reason for it, nature has seen fit to maintain this status quo.

We now come to the crunch question: how do I know if I am gay? I suppose the simple answer is - you just know. But you do need to wait until all those hormones have settled down a bit before asking the question. Once that has happened the sexual desires and urges will be noticeably better fed and nourished by the thoughts and fantasies of either one or the other of the two sexes. Crudely put: whatever makes you "cum" the easiest and the best will give you the answer. For just a few people this may be equal, or it may alternate continuously throughout their lives, and they are what we term as being: bisexual.

Gay, straight or bisexual, it matters not - you are you, and you are unique. Whatever sexuality you may be, no two people are ever exactly the same - not even identical twins. Be proud of who and what you are, and if you find that you are gay or bisexual then remember that that is quite normal in the great scheme of things, it is only some areas of society that still have a problem with this - and the problem is theirs, not yours.

One of the biggest mysteries in the world today is why some people have a problem with another person's sexuality when you consider all the great names there have been throughout history that have been known not to be heterosexual. Great emperors, kings, war-lords, painters, writers, poets, musicians, composers, pop singers, fashion gurus, astrologers, philosophers, architects, engineers and many, many others all enjoying pride of place in history have been either gay or bisexual - the list is almost endless, and it even includes a pope or two! Their sexual orientation never hampered these people - it need not hamper you.

Judy Garland is reputed to have said: "Always be a first-rate version of yourself, instead of a second-rate version of somebody else." There could be no better advice. Another quote I love came from the late, great, and still sadly missed Dusty Springfield: "My sexuality has never been a problem to me but I think it has been for other people."

There is nothing at all wrong with being gay, however it does come with some burdens that heterosexuals never have to face. There is the gay scene - known by all to be notoriously promiscuous - and although it is representative of less than a quarter of all gay people it is what a gay person will always be seen as being a part of by many uninformed heterosexual people. Then there is the whole "coming out" saga. Should you come out to family and friends, at work, to all and sundry, or not do it at all? Facing up to this issue can be traumatic for some people - and whatever you finally decide on as being best for you, even staying "in the closet", it will not be without some implications. These issues I will cover in separate articles - look out for them!

Michael Knell.

2006-02-05 Illustrations

Waste...Where will we put it and will we survive it's effects

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

1.

The Spoils of Eden
by G H Thomas
Waste!!! Where will we put it and will we survive its effects?
Where does it begin, and where will it end?
In the United States, the world's biggest producer of waste, including food and an
endless collection of unwanted goods, many harmful to our health, the business of
burying in the ground, what we no longer want, need, or have had our fill of, has
become, a billion-dollar business.»But little help to the environment»
According to The World Book Encyclopedia there are more than 6,500 landfills
in the continental United States. The simplest arithmetic produces a total of 130
landfills in each state. More in the larger states and fewer in the smaller state.
There are no clear numbers concerning how other countries handle their waste,
but in the third world nations one can only imagine.
Here there are designated facilities for different land areas and what is dumped
there. One middle eastern state has a land fill that it is done in so many layers, that
there is a variable mountain of garbage with layer upon layer of dirt, and waste
material. The facility is so large that the collection vehicles and their garage are
located at the site.

2.

Among the endless varity of landfills there are, Sanitary Landfills, Materials
Reduction Landfills, Previously Incinerated Materials Landfills, Biological
Material Landfills, Hospital Waste Landfills and of course Nuclear Waste
Landfills. There are also uncounted private residue water and waste impoundment
areas, generated by industrial chemical companies, oil refineries, coal companies
and power plant operating companies. Some of the things buried, in those almost
secret repositories, would curl the nose of a worm.
You may find it hard to believe, but today, forest lands are actually being
cleared to make room for the irreverent practice of burying what we indifferently
throw away.
Some states send their garbage to other states for burial. Worse, the rules
governing disposal are the provence of each state and its laws.
For some municipalities in smaller, less populated, states the rules controlling
where and what can be discarded are applied, not by waste engineers, but by the
collectors. Agencies such as city and state government refuse to even think about
what is put where and what the end result is.

3.

There have been cases in the courts of illegal dumping were fraudulent permits
were issued. In a regular landfill where everything is dumped from grandmas
apple pie, to old refrigerators the side effects are incalculable.
Mixing the garbage with the dirt used to cover it, lengthens the gestation
period, but the end result is the same.
There are, contaminates seeping into neighboring land areas affecting the water
table. Gases produced by landfills include, Radon, Methane and a host of other
gases, some harmful, and even deadly.
The Nuclear Waste Landfill. ( Radio Active Sludge) Actually it's not a landfill
at all, but a nuclear waste storage depot. The sludge from a nuclear reactor cannot
be buried without preparing the ground to receive it. Since it cannot be left out in
the open where radiation could endanger people, it must be sealed in air-tight
plastic containers and buried deep in the ground.
The Pharaohs of Ancient Egypt would have marveled at this practice
Can you imagine air-tight tombs, to protect the living, not the Mummies
In our case there may not be may not be anyone left to bury......

George H Thomas

2006-02-05 Illustrations

Shun Cloning : Scientists Must Speak Out

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Scientists say evidence is mounting "that creating healthy animals through cloning is More difficult than they had expected." So began a front-page story in the New York Times (Marching 25), highlighting the frustrations of animal cloners, and the chance that person cloning whitethorn prove technically inconceivable. Those worried about the ethics of individual cloning have greeted this as good news, a sign that the slippery slope is leveling come out of the closet. Unfortunately, the new obstacles English hawthorn prove less than insurmountable in the hanker tally--and in bioengineering, the yearn running often proves surprisingly short. For those whose doubts about ergonomics ar expressed by the philosopher Leon Kass as "the wisdom of repugnance," it is no meter to relax: The slope Crataegus laevigata soon steepen once Thomas More. In cloning, a cellular cell nucleus from the grownup to be cloned is injected into an testis from which the karyon has been removed.

As it turns , the environment of the unfertilized testicle, hijacked for cloning purposes, is able-bodied to "reprogram" big nuclei, returning their DEOXYRIBONUCLEIC ACID to a naive, pseudo-embryonic state. As the orchis develops, it follows the familial blueprint of the full-grown from which the core was derived, essentially producing an identical twin of that individual. But at that place problems. When Ian Ian Wilmut and his co-workers produced the cloned sheep Doll, they caught about biologists unawares because it was thinking out of the question to clone a mammal. Frogs had been cloned Sir Thomas More than twenty-five years ago, but many biologists cerebration that a phenomenon termed "imprinting" would prevent mammalian cloning. Imprinting confers "memory" on a developing cell, helping to distinguish fully grown skin cells, for instance, from heart, liver, and blood cells.

Experiments in mice suggested that imprinting permanently altered the DESOXYRIBONUCLEIC ACID, making it unimaginable to derive a feasible embryo from an grown core group. changed all that. Still, the cloning of mammals is a precarious enterprise. himself acknowledged that cloning was ineffective and fraught with grotesque loser, and he strongly advised against trying to clone world. Even the just about experienced researchers to generate executable clones only 2 to 5 percent of the metre. The failures appear to stem from the imprinting phenomenon, which had been discounted post-: the hereditary absolution conferred by the ball turns to be at best, and memories persist in the of cloned embryos, interfering with their development.

This point was made by MIT developmental biologist Rudolf Jaenisch during testimony earlier a House subcommittee on Master of Architecture 28, and in a forceful article he co-authored with , "Don't Clone Humans!" (Science, MArch 28). As Jaenisch and others stressed ahead Congress, the high unsuccessful person rate in animal cloning should make somebody cloning unthinkable. The proponents of cloning, a motley crew of UFO cultists and fringe physicians, argue that they volition succeed in human race where experts have failed in animals. Their position is, of course, untenable.

For now, soul cloning testament probably end up prohibited. However, in that location is a danger in arguing against cloning on technical grounds alone: Once the procedure is perfected, it implicitly becomes ethically permissible.

2006-02-05 Illustrations

Daylight Saving Time

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

October 19, 2005 Daylight Saving Time By Stan Dyer The history of Daylight Saving Time began in the late 1700?s in America. Benjamin Franklin, while serving as ambassador to France, suggested that the cost of lighting could be reduced simply by having shops open and close earlier. It was a novel idea, but it did not catch on until the 20th century. In 1907, William Willet urged adoption of Daylight Savings Time, and, during World War I, many European countries used the idea to save energy. America joined them when Woodrow Wilson signed a Daylight Saving Time bill on March 31, 1918. The law was repealed after the war in 1919, but reestablished for World War II. The energy crisis of the 1970?s lead to the reappearance of the idea and a National Daylight Savings Time that extended throughout the year was established in 1973. In 1974, the country reverted to standard time for the winter months. Finally, in 1987, Federal Legislation established permanent Daylight Saving Time on a voluntary basis beginning the first Sunday in April and ending the last Sunday in October. Arizona, Hawaii, and the territories of Guam, Puerto Rico, The Virgin Islands, and American Samoa are the only American places that do not observe Daylight Saving Time. Indiana elected in April of 2005 to adopt Daylight Savings Time. Also in 2005, Congress enacted a new law effective in 2007 that extends Daylight Saving Time by one month. Under the new law, Daylight Saving Time will begin that year on the second Sunday in March and extend through the first Sunday in November. This year, Daylight Saving Time will end Sunday, October 30 at 2:00 a.m. We will all set our clocks back one hour at that time, and enjoy an extra hour of sleep.

2006-02-05 Illustrations

Fury of Night

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Youth has found a way to escape the whirlwind of everyday repitition and perpetual blank existence. the alternatives to the well founded design of youth coming into its own seem to be far more taxing upon the generation before in a mental manner. Drugs and free association rapture seem to consume the new torch carriers of the modern world. Families must watch the collapse of utopial idealism that creates the view of life that everyone wants to wake up to. One thing seems clear, day to day routine is failing to cut it, change in routine could be the window to new bonds and connections between frail formed years that rush by with nothing to look back on in a sentimental way. New generation?, well yes but also and always a quickly moving lifestyle that screams cosmopolitan intrigue and rebellion to conformity. Third times the charm a father thinks to himself as he desperately forces interaction with his son on the same plane that his father did, a forgotten way.

2006-02-05 Illustrations

True Life

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

This is just a part of my writing.

It is not about the color of skin any more, I think it is about the way a person lives.
A person that is known for haveing a drug problum is seen as a bad person, who may hard others and rob from others.
Drug users can be any color of skin, so the color dose not matter. People see a drug user and start judgeing, I personaly know that not all people with a drug problum are bad, it all comes down to the way a person is inside.
I am not saying drugs are not bad, because they are, but not every person that uses a drug is bad.
Are we all equal? I think not, and you can see the unjust ways in the court room. A person with money can go and buy legal help, legal help that will help them fight, a poor person can not buy legal help, so chances are they will not fight and have to go along with the court even if the court is wrong. This is not equal. Money can buy a person more rights, but as a person we should all have the same rights.
The USA should not use the word freedom when we do not follow the meaning. People with so called power, law, schools, CPS, ect. these hight standing people are telling others how to live. When I was a little girl, and I am 24 now, I use to think the USA was a magical place, and I was proud to be in the usa, born and raised, I do not see it the same any more.
I know there are places in the world that I would not like to
live, But the USA is looked at as such a grand place. We need to start seeing what it is really about, all the things the government looks past, there is so much pain in the USA, but it is not noticed. If I had the money I would make someone see the sad storys of true USA life. I would start off by telling my familys true life, how my sister is dealing with the schools
takeing her to court, she is a singal mother of 3 and after haveing her home tore down, she and her kids were homeless for more than one year, she is still not giveing up. My story life
deals with haveing the local cops raid are home and after finding nothing the lied to a CPS worker, just so they could have on paper that we commitied a fellony witch they say was Child Endangerment, but they did not come into are home for that, they did not even know we had a son, and if they were so concerned about my son, why did that have gund out, pointed down the hall were my son stood crying, not one of the cops botherd to get my son out of the way. My son was taken away because of one CPS worker not doing her own investagation but, only going on what the cops said. Thank God, are son is home, after haveing him gone for about one month, and going to court, haveing people go on the stand to be questiond, the CPS started to see the truth and that is was not right that are son was taken away. CPS offerd us a deal
and we had to take it in order to get are son back. Just another true story of how things today are not right.

2006-02-05 Illustrations

Pink Bandeaux Revolution

Sun, 05 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Pink Bandeaux Revolution BRIG (RETD) MUHAMMAD ASLAM KHAN Young Kyrgyzs crowd, with sprinkling of seasoned politicians who were lucky enough, not to be incarcerating in isolated dungeons, wearing pink band on their heads literally personified free popular will. Innocent looking, some touchingly enough, were confronting the state demons. A protester focused upon by the western electronic media, was being hit incessantly. The boy, hardly in his teens did manoeuvre to his utmost to make a nearby terrace blunt the blowing sticks, was after all a symbol of raw innocence and thus utterly failed. The hefty perpetrator, despite the boy's boxing-style ducking down, took a right aim at his cheekbone mound as well. The whole story could be interpreted through this single episode, the grunting cop representing the government and the young victim representing the oppressed masses, all too easy to be understood by anyone having red-purple heart. Pink (Bandeaux) Revolution is the third in series to follow the previous two in recent past, (red rose/velvet and orange) flushing the sifting governments in Georgia and Ukraine through the deluge of popular opinion which could not be restrained by any force of muscles though the autocratic rulers had the fancy for a while to be perching under the shadow of its false security. The leaders had no option but to quit. Red rose/velvet and orange revolutions altered the course of history. Kyrgyzstan, with total area of 1,98,500 sq kms and population of about 5 million is spread over the slopes of Tianshen and Altai mountains. To the north/northwest lies Kazakhstan, Tajikistan to the south, Uzbekistan to the west/south west and Xingjian (Sikiang) to the east. Khyrgystan has three oblasts (provinces), namely lssy-kul, Narin and Osh. Khyrgyz in demographic pattern are 50 percent of the total population while rest is Uzbeks, Russians and others. Its currency is called, »summ». The governance frame cast in the wake of dissolution of the USSR is lot responsible for the throes this region is going through; Kyrgyzstan included. The emergence of five Central Asian Republics (CARs) had been generally a sort of continuing legacy of the Soviet's rule and senior communist native party leaders found themselves in the cockpit to steer their states whose aerodynamics were no better than a bumble-bee. The masses though were happy to have been off the Soviets hook but then emerging governments of CARs were mired by plethora of challenges from within in 1990/1991. «The White Man's Burden» as Rudyard Kipling had complimented these masses with, remained even after about a century, essentially the Soviets burden whose economy could no longer sustain them at the time of independence as she herself lacked the capacity to pay in much needed hard currency to these states for raw material. More than CARs, if eager to seek independence thus, Soviets appeared eager to boot them out. Even the Soviets staunch critic like Alexander Solzhenitsyn offered a cheeky argument that Russia would be better off only after, «it had shed the onerous burden of Central Asian underbelly'. The somersault in the Russian thinking to disown Central Asia was not a new paradigm shift. During the Czars rule, at the time when Great Game of 19th century was being played between Imperial Russia and Victorian England, some Russian think tanks had argued against further expansion beyond River Oxus. Their logic hinged upon two factors: one, that Russia would stand stretched too far away from the centre and the second: that assimilation of Subcontinent even if successful would mean nothing but additional burden of 300 millions of polyglots. However at the beginning of the third millennium, it is the geo-strategic significance of Central Asia that Russia now vows to claim her �backyard' or �near abroad'. Kyrgyzstan, as of other CARs, found it expedient to enforce a coercive rule to contain masses high expectations of seeking national identity and expression of speech and religion under several pretences. Chemistry of Kyrgyzstan crises, largely similar in fundamentals to other republics, has certain peculiarities, which have been having a catalytic effect. Askar Akayev, a researcher in famous St Petersburg Institute emerged as consensus leader to forge cohesion among ethnic groups by 1990, which paved his way to the power through 1991 elections. Erstwhile a popular leader relatively, where did he go wrong that brought him doom rather surprisingly on 24 March? The answer can be found in certain errors of judgement he committed which alienated him from masses as he developed his governance strategy from semblance of a democratic to a repressive rule in an inverse proportion to the people expectations. To count some of his serious miscalculations: He gave in to Russian population demand, which constitutes 22 percent of Kyrgyzstan population to have established a separate Slavic University and granted Russian language an equal status to Kyrgyz in 1999. Though Russian segments had threatened to migrate to Russia but an agreed solution should have been found to cater for the local sensibilities as well. Akayev democratic reforms to begin with, were in perfect harmony with tolerant Kyrgyz, also staying mild toward lslamists but their seismic effects could jeopardise the rulers grip in Uzbekistan and Kazakhstan who had no intention to embrace democratic rule under several pretexts. On the contrary, the masses with greater expectations of added freedom generated a pull, which on resistance by the government got transformed to riotous situation at several occasions. Akayev, goaded by neighbours came hard on lslamists. It rekindled their communists era memories when they had persecuted Islam as religion. Akayev overlooked the lessons of history about Islam which were epitomised by a Stalin's minister for minorities in a single statement that Islam was like a nail, harder you hit, the deeper it goes. Having their hopes dashed and also moving into hornets nest-like events in the backdrop of government versus others and urban-rulers divide, the calm at the seat of power (Bishkek) remained shaky. Capture of several villages in Southern Kyrgyzstan by Islamic militants in 1999 was a resultant chain event. State managed referenda; Askar Akayev used one after another as a tool to circumvent constitutional obligations, which in an earnest sense, he could not or did not want to fulfill. Perpetuating his stay in power emerged as necessity of self-aggrandizement for him. As a sequel to achieve his aim, he banned opposition parties in year 2000 elections, imprisoning popular leaders to leave himself elected unopposed. ln a bid to attract foreign investment he mopped up states functional inadequacies. Instead of resolving ethnic, religious and social unrest through transparent square dealing, he projected an aura of openness which kept inflating through the image building, undertaken by the local and non-local conglomerate of NGOs till boom busted suddenly when the regime was accused of massive rigging of March 13 elections and popular politicians were prevented to reach the parliament. Certainly Askar Akayev could make some people fool for sometime but not all the people for all the times. In the meantime when caretaker setup is in place, restoring order in the country under the auspices of interim President lshenbai Kadyrbekov; Askar Akayev has branded the coup as unconstitutional, forgetting the state behaviour pattern that successful coups are always constitutional regardless of any moral ground. In the whole episode two developments may provoke academic interest. First: the documents found from the Bishkek «white house» reveal that the deposed President frenetically begged Mr Putin to intervene through his troops stationed at Russian base at Kant near Bishkek. He may be pardoned for all his sins against Kyrgyz but the people would find it hard to digest his provoking the Russian to commit aggression against his own people. Second, Mr Putin's reluctance to intervene and resorting to verbal admonishing of the angry protesters only to stop this wave of so called revolution a day or two before Akayev ouster, is meaningful. The protesters obviously did not oblige, delivering a blow to Russian disapproval of the government changes summarily. Briefly said, hard times are ahead for Kyrgyzstan as well as her neighbours. Who is destined next and for which �colour' may require and «guess of a genius», as Lenin had said in a different context, «but a guess work after all». The initial steps taken by the interim President Ishenbai Kadyrbekov like express resolve to hold elections shortly and reverting to bicameral system of legislation after supreme court post-revolution verdict, suggest that Kyrgyz would be able to restore peace and seek to learn a lot from this imbroglio. Email: makni49@yahoo.com © Copyright

2006-02-05 Illustrations

Tasty+Healthy=Indian+Chinese Food

Sat, 04 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Food is any substance that can be consumed, including liquid drinks. Food is the main source of energy and of nutrition for animals, and is usually of animal or plant origin The study of food is called food science. In English, the term food is often used metaphorically or figuratively, as in food for thought. Humans are commonly believed to be omnivorous animals that can consume both plant and animal products. Evidence suggests that early humans employed hunter-gatherer techniques as their primary method of food collection. This involves combining stationary plant and fungal food sources (such as fruits, grains, roots, and mushrooms with mobile animals which must be hunted and killed in order to be consumed. Additionally, it is believed that humans have used fire to prepare food prior to eating since their divergence from Homo erectus, possibly even earlier. Taste is something that goes back to our early days of learning about food, don't you think? We are familiar with the tastes and mouth feel of our favorite dishes. Think about how a bowl of hot oatmeal with milk reminds you of home, or how chocolate cupcakes call to mind birthday parties with your best friends. Visit www.indomunch.com to get to know the different tastes of Indian-Chinese food. It definitely takes time for taste buds to change. Until then, eat the healthy foods that you do like, and that you do enjoy. To get the 25-30 grams of fiber per day recommended by the American Dietetic Association, fill your plate with fresh ripe fruits and veggies of bright colors. Learn how to incorporate whole grains in the form of pasta and bread to your meals. These things will cleanse your palate, and open your taste buds wide. In time things will taste all together different. For such an ethnic and mouth watering Chinese cuisine mixed with traditional and spicy Indian cooking just check out Indo Munch Restaurant.

2006-02-04 Illustrations

A Good Combination of Indian & Chinese Cuisine

Sat, 04 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Not feeling like cooking tonight? Or wanting to try Chinese dim sum breakfast? Just visit onIndo Munch Restaurant where you will taste real Indian Chinese Fusion Cuisine. Indian Chinese cuisine is the adaptation of Chinese seasoning and cooking techniques to Indian tastes. It is widespread in certain localities in India, and is also enjoyed by Indian and Chinese communities in Malaysia, Singapore and North America. It may be helpful to read about India and its history and culture to understand how to approach Indian Cooking. Indian cuisine is as diverse as it's people and geography. Indians did not have written down recipes but were passed on through generations purely by word of mouth. India is a multi-faceted country with a variety of colors, cultural differences, food, festivals, languages, peoples and so on. In this section we introduce you to the different strokes of Indian cuisine. Foods tend to be flavoured with spices not traditionally associated with Chinese cuisine, such as cumin, coriander, and tumeric Hot chili, ginger, garlic and yogurt are also frequently used in dishes. This makes Indian Chinese food similar in taste to many ethnic dishes in Southeast Asian countries such as Singapore and Malysia which have strong Chinese and Indian cultural influences. Non-staple dishes are by default served with generous helpings of gravy, although they can also be ordered "dry" or "without gravy". Culinary styles often seen in Indian Chinese fare include chili (implying hot and batter-fried), Manchurian (implying a sweet and salty brown sauce), and Szechwan (Sichuan, implying a spicy red sauce). These correspond loosely, if at all, with authentic Chinese food preparation. For such an ethnic and mouth watering Chinese cuisine mixed with traditional and spicy Indian cooking just check out Indo Munch Restaurant.

2006-02-04 Illustrations

Combination of two famous taste of the world

Sat, 04 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Indian Chinese Cuisine is the adaptation of Chinese seasoning and cooking techniques to Indian tastes. It is widespread in certain localities in India, and is also enjoyed by people in Malaysia, Singapore and North America. Visit www.indomunch.com to get to know the different tastes of Indian-Chinese food. Features: Foods tend to be flavoured with spices not traditionally associated with Chinese cuisine, such as cumin, coriander, and tumeric. Hot chili, ginger, garlic and yogurt are also frequently used in dishes . This makes Indian Chinese food similar in taste to many ethnic dishes in Southeast Asian countries such as Singapore and Malaysia, which have strong Chinese and Indian cultural influences. Non-staple dishes are by default served with generous helpings of gravy, although they can also be ordered "dry" or "without gravy". Culinary styles often seen in Indian Chinese fare include chili (implying hot and batter-fried), Manchurian (implying a sweet and salty brown sauce), and Szechwan (Sichuan, implying a spicy red sauce). These correspond loosely, if at all, with authentic Chinese food preparation. Scallions and soy sauce are used in plenty to add a "Chinese touch" to the food. Popular Entrees: Appetizers 1. Crunchy Okra 2. Salt & Pepper Gobi 3. Salt & Pepper Paneer 4. Chicken Lollipop 5. Chicken 65 Main Entrees: 1. Vegetable Manchurian 2. Chili Paneer Gravy 3. Chili chicken Gravy 4. Chicken Manchurian 5. Chicken Munch Special 6. Lamb Manchurian 7. Szechuan Lamb 8. Fish in Hot Garlic 9. Lemon Fish 10. Salt & Pepper Prawn

2006-02-04 Illustrations

Chinese Food Style

Sat, 04 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Food is an important part of daily life for Chinese people. Chinese not only enjoy eating but believe eating good food can bring harmony and closeness to the family and relationships. Shopping daily for fresh food is essential for all Chinese cooking. Unlike the fast food society of the U.S., the Chinese select live seafood, fresh meats and seasonal fruits and vegetables from the local market to ensure freshness. This means swimming fish, snappy crabs, and squawking chickens. Even prepared foods such as dim sum or BBQ duck for to go orders must gleam, glisten, and steam as if just taken out of the oven. Chinese people in general are not as concerned about nutrition as Western culture. They are more concerned with the food's texture, flavor, color, and aroma. These are the crucial points for good Chinese cooking. Chinese daily meals consist of four food groups: grains, vegetables, fruit, and meat. Because of lactose intolerance, Chinese do not consume large amounts of dairy products. Instead, Chinese substitute these with soymilk and tofu, which also contain large amounts of protein and calcium. Vegetables, fruits, and meats are usually fresh. Some exceptions include preserved vegetables such as snow cabbage or mustard greens, preserved eggs, aka "thousand year old eggs" or salted and dried fish. Other exceptions include snack items such as beef jerky, cuttlefish jerky, sweet and sour preserved plums, or dehydrated mango slices. Canned or frozen foods are seldom eaten. Western desserts such as cookies, cakes, pies, and ice cream are eaten only on special occasions such as birthdays and weddings. After dinner, families usually eat seasonal fruit as dessert. Chinese desserts such as red bean soup, sweet white lotus's seed soup, or steam papaya soup are served every so often as a special treat on a hot summer's night. Ethnic Chinese cooking does not involve a lot of deep fried cooking. The reason most of the Chinese restaurants in America have deep-fried dishes such as sweet and sour pork, almond fried Chicken, and deep-fried shrimp is to promote business and to please western tastes. This clearly reflects why there are more overweight and high blood pressure concerns in Western culture than there are in Chinese culture. Such an ethnic Chinese food mingled with Traditional Indian food can be enjoyed in Indo Munch Restaurant which is and Indian Chinese Fusion Cuisine.

2006-02-04 Illustrations

Changing Trends in South Korean Food Market

Sat, 04 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

South Korea is the third largest economy in Asia after Japan and China. It is also a pioneer in industrialization in East Asian region. Trends in food consumption indicate that people of South Korea are turning to western diets from the conventional one. Consumers in Korea are looking for high value and convenient food products of good quality. South Korea is the leading trader in agriculture that represents an export market of $2.5 billion for US agricultural products only. Till recently, South Korea kept the tariffs on imports of processed food high. It also imposed other sanitary and technical barricades to obstruct trade export. As per the Free Trade Agreement between Korea and US, food-processing companies of Korea will allow an increased and easy access to US food units in South Korea's market. It will give new opportunities to food processing and beverage units. A good understanding and marketing strategy between the two countries will result in sturdy development. Consequently, South Korea's economy will also foster. South Koreans believe that diet plays a crucial role in maintaining a good health. Along with a rise in health conscience, the concern of South Koreans for their routine food escalated. As the packaged foods are basically processed and have artificial substances in them, customer choices became even more discriminating than in natural ones. In this situation, packaged foods that are basically healthy could endure the current economic pressure. But those products that are known to be unfit for health, experienced a rapidly falling consumer demand. Health related products have filled the shops in packaged food sector. These products have gained the attention of health conscious customers. Ingredients like green tea, black bean and black sesame are specifically popular. For further information about South Korean Food Processing Market and its future growth, read the report "Food Processing Market in South Korea (2005)" by RNCOS at: http://www.rncos.com/Report/FB17.htm RNCOS is an industry leader in the field of online business research. We specialize in industry research on various business verticals. To read our other reports, visit: http://www.rncos.com/Report.htm or email us at info@rncos.com. To get the latest news on Food Industry worldwide, please visit our newly launched Blog section at http://www.rncos.com/Blog/food.html

2006-02-04 Illustrations

Make Mine Italian: Wines From Tuscany And Piedmont

Sat, 04 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

A modern renaissance of winemaking in Italy is making wine lovers and critics stand up and take notice. In the 20th century, wine in Italy frequently meant low-cost, low quality and high volume-think straw covered bottles-with little to get excited about. However, things have changed in past 25 years and thanks to new laws further regulating Italian vintners, the standard of winemakers in that country is reaching new levels of excellence.

Today, Italy is seen as one of the most prolific and versatile wine regions in the world-with over 100 official vitis vinifera vines- and thousands of grape varieties. Italian wines are food friendly and affordable, with many of the wines available in specialty retail stores. Italian red varietals offer a nice alternative to California cabernets and merlots. Sangiovese is the grape of Chianti Classico that hails from the hills of Tuscany in Northern Italy, and in the hands of a talented wine maker, this red wine can be absolutely elegant. Look no farther than the cuisine of Italy to find the perfect match for Chianti. Try pasta pomodoro (or any red sauce), pizza and roast lamb with this lovely red.

The great Barolo, made from the Nebbiolo grape grown in Piedmont, is the King of red wines in Italy. And though Barolos are rare and pricey, these big-gun reds are prize cellar candidates, with at least 5 (if not 15) years of patience required before the wines mature to a divine richness. Boutique wine retailer www.personalcellar.com has only a limited supply of the 1999 Cordero di Montemezolo Barolo, priced under ($40). This is a great value from one of the best vintages of the last decade. If pasta and pizza are on your menu this week, try the 2000 Il Mandorlo Chianti Classico ($25) from another great vintage. It is blended with a little cabernet and merlot, to create a lush, mouth-filling wine with just the right acidity to balance tomato sauces- and not break the bank while still impressing your guests.

2006-02-04 Illustrations

Some Irish Recipes to Celebrate St. Patrick's Day

Sat, 04 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

St. Patrick's Day is March 17th, and it is a "day for wearing green" and other Irish traditions. Even though the patron saint St. Patrick was not born in Ireland, everything that is Green (which symbolizes spring and the prospering of the crops), fun and Irish can be worn or used to celebrate this holiday. And it is a holiday for all ages. Here are some entertaining ideas to use on St. Patrick's Day.

A few drops of green food coloring goes into anything you might want green, even a mug of draft beer. Anything made with Irish cream or Irish whiskey has the Irish spirit, too.

Authentic Corned beef and cabbage

Corned beef brisket, about 4 lbs.
1 juice orange
18-20 whole cloves
1 tsp. whole yellow mustard seeds
1/2 tsp. caraway seeds
1/2 tsp. whole black peppercorns
1/2 tsp. whole coriander

Put corned beef brisket into large pot for cooking. Take cloves and insert them, then sprinkle remaining spices on. Cover brisket with water, bring to boil, then simmer for 3 hours or until tender.

3 lbs. small potatoes, peeled
2 1/2 lbs. carrots, peeled and cut into large pieces
1 medium head cabbage

About 40 minutes before beef is finished, boil a large pot of water and cook potatoes and carrots. Add cabbage about 10 minutes before you're ready to serve as it doesn't need to cook long. Drain vegetables.

Arrange meat and vegetables on a platter and serve with your favorite mustards.

St. Patrick Day Cookie Pops (for the kids to make)

Box of Vanilla Wafers
Box of Popsicle sticks
Vanilla or chocolate frosting; or Peanut butter
Various decorations — chocolate chips, icing packs, assorted green candies, green sugar sprinkles, ju ju bees, sprinkles, etc.

Spread out ½ of the vanilla wafers, with the flat sides up on the plate. Take the vanilla, chocolate icing, or peanut butter and spread across flat surface. Next, take a Popsicle stick and lay it down with the end in the middle of the cookie. Top with another vanilla wafer to make a sandwich.

Now the kids can get creative! Turn the cookie pop into a green shamrock; apply vanilla icing and draw with green icing pack; make a pot of gold with candies; anything you want!
They make a great treat for the kids to take to school!

Easy Hot Whiskey Punch (for the adults) Serves 1

1 measure of whiskey
2 teaspoons white sugar
4-6 cloves
2 slices fresh lemon
7 oz. boiling water

Put whiskey, sugar cloves and lemon slices into a strong glass. 2. Pour on the boiling water until the sugar has dissolved. 3. Sip contentedly by a blazing fire.

Irish Scones

1/2 cup butter
4 cups flour
2 teaspoons baking powder
1/2 teaspoon salt
1/4 cup sugar
1 egg
1 cup milk
Note: You can add raisins, dates or other dried fruits, if desired.

Makes about 18 scones.

Preheat oven to 425°F.

In a large bowl, combine butter and flour until crumbly. Add baking powder, salt and sugar.
In a separate bowl, beat egg and milk. Mix into dry ingredients to make a dough.
Turn onto floured surface and roll to one-inch thickness. With a cookie cutter or the bottom of a drinking glass, cut dough into 2-inch rounds. Place on greased cookie sheet, about one inch apart and bake for 15 minutes.

When serving your Irish creations don't forget an Irish toast to bless the meal!

2006-02-04 Illustrations

Indian Cookery with a British Twist

Sat, 04 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

In a traditional Indian home, the wife and mother does not go out to work. She stays at home and spends her days making sure that there is wholesome and tasty food ready for her family to eat whenever they may want it. If there are other older women in the household such as aunts or a grandmother, they will help too.

An Indian girl will start learning to cook at a very early age and will be expected to help her mother with the household catering and cleaning too. At her mother's side a daughter will learn how to grind spices, how to mix them to make various masalas and exactly when and how to add them to individual dishes. She will learn how to make various types of bread - chapattis, rotis, parathas and more. She will learn to make several dishes at the same time, no Indian meal consisting of only one dish, and she will learn the art of producing the crispest deep-fried onion bhajis and pakora. The girl's skill in the kitchen can make the difference between her finding a husband or not.

There's no getting away from it, delightful though Indian cuisine is, producing a meal is a complex and time-consuming business, even for the most experienced Indian housewife.

That's the traditional way. However, in modern-day India and in Britain, where many Indian families have made their homes, life is quite different.

These days, Indian women often do not have the luxury of staying at home all day. They want or need to go out to work. Indian girls brought up in Britain see other girls of their age going shopping, to parties, to visit friends, to school, to college and ultimately to work and they don't want to stay at home with their mothers, slaving over a hot stove. On top of that, they don't want to lose the culture and flavours of Indian cuisine.

What to do then, when Indian cookery does not provide a quick answer to providing a meal? Vicky Bhogal has found the answer. In her book, Cooking Like Mummyji, she explores the culinary problems of a modern Indian girl living in Britain and provides an interesting answer.

I suppose we would call this fusion cooking as it is a mixture of the flavours of India and the simplicity of British family food and the results are great tastes produced in the minimum of time. I particularly recommend Fishcakes with Bite and for Sunday lunch with a difference, Green Masala Roast Chicken - absolutely delicious.

For all your Indian cooking needs why not visit my Asian Food Online Store at http://www.lizebiz.com/trk.php?c=3308&u=Apro

2006-02-04 Illustrations

Indian Food as Part of a Weight Loss Regime

Sat, 04 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Most people think that you can't possibly eat Indian food, if you're on a slimming diet. That's a fair statement if you always eat Indian food in restaurants, because many traditional Indian recipes involve either deep frying or the use of ghee (clarified butter). However, if you cook Indian food at home, it can easily form part of a weight loss regime, just the same as any other food. You just need to follow a few simple general rules.

- Avoid altogether recipes which involve deep frying.
- If you need to seal meat before braising it for a curry, use a good non-stick pan and a spray bottle with sunflower or vegetable oil in it. Lightly spray the surface of your pan with oil and that should be enough to prevent the meat from sticking while you brown it.
- If a recipe includes cream or coconut cream, substitute plain yoghurt and another flavouring to replace the coconut.

Tandoori recipes are great as part of a low calorie or low carbohydrate diet. Just marinade some fish (cubed or whole), chicken (cubed or in pieces) or prawns (shrimp) in a mixture of low fat plain yogurt, ground turmeric, ground coriander, ground cumin, crushed garlic, grated root ginger and a little chilli powder (or to taste) for at least an hour. If you're using cubed meat, thread onto skewers. Grill or barbeque with a medium heat until done. Serve with mixed salad and wedges of lemon to squeeze over. If your diet isn't too severe, you can also have a pitta bread, a baked potato or some boiled rice with this.

Curry dishes are fine too (preferably fish or chicken). If you use a recipe which has just a spice and water base or a tomato base, it certainly won't do your calorie intake any harm but be sure to keep the oil you use for frying onions, spices or whatever, to an absolute minimum.

For vegetarians or those trying to cut down on meat because of its relatively high calorie content, Indian cooking is ideal. There are so many recipes for vegetables and pulses which are really tasty that you won't even know you're on a diet!

Don't forget paneer (Indian cottage cheese), which can be cooked as per the tandoori idea above, or in a spicy sauce. If you can't get paneer, try substituting tofu.

Here's to a slim new year!

For all your Indian cooking needs why not visit my Asian Food Online Store at http://www.lizebiz.com/trk.php?c=3308&u=ACK

2006-02-04 Illustrations

Indian Snack Food

Sat, 04 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Indian children love the Khomcha-Wallah. He wanders the streets, the busier the better, basket of goodies on his head and a cane stool under his arm. When he encounters a likely crowd he sets down his basket on the stool and starts to trade. The basket will contain the half-prepared ingredients of what is known in northern India as chaat - savoury snacks from traditional Hindu cuisine - which may be served in a banana leaf bowl.

One item might be Aloo Chaat which is fried, golden-brown potato cubes tossed with chilli powder, roasted cumin powder and chaat masala**.

Another, Dhai Baras which are split-pea patties. They will be already fried and softened in warm water. To complete the dish the Khomcha-Wallah may add beaten, creamy plain yoghurt with salt on top, and a choice of spice mixes. One mixture will be aromatic and probably contain roasted cumin, black pepper and dried mango powder, another will be hot a fiery with chillies, another sweet and sour like tamarind chutney.

Some Indian cities have become renowned for a certain sort of chaat - Jaipur for Paapri Chaat (similar to Dhai Baras but served with cubed potatoes chick peas) and Mumbai for Pau Bahji (spicy potato and vegetable curry served in a bun) but it is Delhi which is the chaat capital of India.

Some other chaats are:

Aloo Samosa - little pastry triangles filled with a spicy mixture of small diced potatoes and peas with chillies, chilli powder, fresh coriander, cumin and garam masala.

Keema Samosa - similar to above but including minced beef or lamb.

Aloo Tikki - mashed potato mixed with peas, cumin powder, corn flour, chilli powder and salt, formed into patties and fried until crisp and golden.

Tandoori Chicken Chaat - Tandoori chicken, shredded and mixed with diced green mango, onions, green chillies, coriander leaves and chaat masala**, dressed with lemon juice, oil and chilli powder.

**Chaat Masala is a spice mix made by combining the following ingredients.

4 tsp powdered dried mango
3 tsp cumin seeds, roasted and ground
3 tsp salt
½ tsp ground black pepper
1 tsp garam masala
1 tsp coriander seeds, roasted and ground
½ tsp ground ginger
½ tsp fennel seeds, roasted and ground (optional)
¼ tsp cayenne pepper

For all your Indian cooking needs why not visit my Asian Food Online Store.

2006-02-04 Illustrations

The Cooking of Kerala

Sat, 04 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Kerala is situated on the South West coast of India right beside Tamil Nadu. The capital is Cochin with its bustling harbour lined with fishing nets and home to fishing boats of all shapes and sizes.

Much of the architecture has been influenced by the Chinese who traded along the coast leaving legacy of cooking pots similar to woks, cleavers and pickling jars. As well as the Chinese, the abundance of spices in Kerala attracted the attentions of the early Phoenicians, Syrians, Egyptians, Greeks and Romans all of whom were happy just to trade and return home. Fighting over the territory didn't begin until the late 15th Century when the British, Dutch, Portuguese and French tried to stake their claims to the spice riches. The British ended up the victors and set up a factory and depot dealing in spices in Tellicherry, a name still associated with good quality pepper.

Black pepper is prolific in Kerala and makes a major contribution to India's input of one third of the world's production. Cardamom too is a native here and the warm, damp growing conditions are ideal for ginger and turmeric rhizomes to flourish.

Kerala is famous for its inland waterways including lakes, lagoons, canals and rivers, collectively known as backwaters, bordered by tropical, lush, greenery and paddy fields as well as homes and schools. The backwaters provide a road network along which transport in the form of canoes, grass-thatched rice boats and overloaded water buses ply their trade.

Kerala means "land of the coconuts" and no part of the coconut is wasted - the oil is used for frying and the dressing of hair. The flesh appears in a large number of cooked dishes and the coir which is produced from the husk of the coconut, is used to make floor mats, mattresses and many handicrafts.

Fish is big business here - a lot of prawns are exported to Japan and USA, having first been peeled and sorted by size by an all-woman workforce and frozen. Squid too goes to Japan as well as frogs' legs to France but the majority is eaten locally.

There are many methods of fishing - Chinese fishing nets attached to upright wooden poles catch what is swimming by. The nets are raised and lowered with ropes and the catch extracted. Trawlers fish the deeper waters and, as elsewhere, fill their nets with anything and everything which can't escape through the mesh.

On some beaches you can buy fresh caught pomfret, tiger prawns, red snapper, crabs and mullet, to name but a few and have it stir-fried at a shack where a quick sauce of garlic and shallots is tossed with turmeric and chilli.

The fishermen eat what they call Boatman's Curry. It uses meaty fish steaks such as cod, swordfish or salmon, cooked in a thick spice paste (red chillies, cayenne pepper, paprika, ground coriander, turmeric and grated coconut) which is first fried then mixed with tamarind paste, green chillies, ginger, shallots and salt.

Apart from fish, a popular celebration meal is "stew" for especially for Christians at the end of fasting for Lent. Made from boneless lamb shoulder with potatoes and carrots simmered in spicy sauce of cardamom, cinnamom, cloves, curry leaves, ginger green chillies and onion with coconut milk added at the end, it resembles a spicy Irish stew.

Another favourite lamb dish is shoulder meat stewed with fennel, spices, vinegar and toasted coconut chips. The sauce is allowed to dry out so it clings to the meat and the dish is finished with fried mustard seeds, shallots and curry leaves.

Duck and chicken are readily available and vegetable dishes are common as many Hindus are vegetarian. Whatever the vegetable, it will very often be mixed with coconut.

Local boiled red rice is eaten with every meal and sometimes appams which are rice pancakes with a spongy centre. Ginger chutney or yoghurt with pineapple may also be served.

Favourite snacks are paper-thin slices of plantain or banana deep fried in coconut oil - the Keralan equivalent of western potato chips.

2006-02-04 Illustrations

Rediscovering Grilled Pizza

Sat, 04 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

America?s favorite food has long been the pizza cooked in a traditional oven but is that about to change? While most Americans have probably never indulged in a grilled pizza, the origins of pizza are making a big comeback. There is no denying that we love our traditional backyard barbeque but rarely, if ever has the barbeque included grilling a pizza. Despite the seemingly odd combination of grill and pizza, the grill is the ideal tool for cooking pizza and in fact is deep in the origin of pizza making. The high, dry heat is ideal for a nice crisp crust and the flavor provided from your grill will on a whole new world of backyard grilling.

Before the word pizza was ever used, Greeks and Romans used wood-fired brick ovens to prepare the original version of pizza ? flatbread. In ancient times each diner was given a piece of flat bread along with a piece of meat on the bread. This food was eaten with the fingers with an occasional knife to cut the meat. Little did they know that this would eventually spark the creation one of the America?s favorite foods.

Grilled Pizza Techniques:

Ingredients:
1 teaspoon dried yeast
1 tablespoon soy oil
1 teaspoon sugar
? cup warm water (110?F)
1 ? cup bread flour
1 tablespoon soy flour
1 teaspoon salt

Instructions:
Combine yeast, sugar and ? cup very warm water in bowl, let sit for five minutes. Combine flour and salt in bowl. Mix yeast mixture with bowl containing dry ingredients. Add a little extra flour if dough is sticky. Knead for a good 10 minutes. Put into a greased bowl and let rise for 60 minutes until it doubles in size. Turn out onto a floured surface then knead lightly until smooth. Roll out into a ?" thick, 12" diameter circle. The thinner the dough is rolled, the better.

Before placing your crust on the grill, be sure that your grill is both clean and well oiled. This will help prevent the dough from sticking to the grill. You will need something large enough to transport your dough to the grill. A pizza spatula is highly recommended for this task. Brush an even coat of extra virgin olive oil on the side that will be facing down first. The oil will introduce flavor and help to keep the dough from sticking to the grill as well as giving the crust a nice crisp finish. Before placing your pizza on the grill, you may want to remove the top rack of your grill to make it easier to flip your pizza. Cook the first side from 1-3 minutes before flipping depending on the heat of your grill. During this time you will need to brush olive oil on the side that is facing up. While cooking the first side, peak under the edge of the crust to monitor its finish. Cook until you are satisfied with the finish and then flip your crust over. After flipping, immediately apply any topping that you would like. It?s highly recommended that you keep the topping very light, as they will not have a chance to cook on the grill without burning the crust. You may consider precooking certain ingredients such as meats and thick vegetables. Be sure to lower the lid as soon as possible to trap the heat in and finish cooking the toppings. Cook the pizza for an additional 2-3 minutes or until you are satisfied with the crust?s finish.

You are now ready to experience one great pizza with deep tradition. Cut your pizza into triangle shaped slices or try cutting them into 1? wide strips. This shape is great for a party snacks!

2006-02-04 Illustrations

Regional Indian Cookery - The Punjab

Sat, 04 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

The Punjab is situated in eastern India and is divided by the Indian/Pakistani border. It is very fertile because of the rivers that cross here and as a consequence, agriculture is central to the economy. Wheat accounts for a large proportion of the crops, along with corn, mustard greens, sugar cane and rice.

Buffalo milk which is 3% higher in fat than cows milk, is also important to the Punjabis, who are not prey to worries about cholesterol. Every bit of the buffalo milk is used in some way or other. Some is used in tea or evaporated into a much thicker richer milk known as bhadoli, which in turn is set into yoghurt. The thick cream will be removed from the top of the yoghurt and churned into butter. Some of the butter will be saved as is and the rest will be warmed slowly and turned into ghee (clarified butter) by pouring off the clear butter and discarding the solid sediment. Yet more of the milk will be made into paneer, the Indian equivalent of cottage cheese. The milk is boiled then curdled by adding lime juice then strained of whey, leaving the curds which can be shaped into solid rounds.

The Punjab is predominantly Sikh, being the home of the Golden Temple at Amritsar, central to the Sikh religion, thus more than half of all Punjabis are vegetarian. No one goes hungry here and Sikh temples always offer simple free meals of bread and vegetable curry to all who turn up.

Bread is the most important part of the Punjabi diet. Rotis are made from wholewheat flour and water, formed into balls and flattened into discs which are then slapped onto the site of a tandoor or onto a tava (a flat griddle pan like a flat frying pan). Rotis are commonly eaten for breakfast with butter, fresh yoghurt and pickles, while for lunch or dinner there will be parathas which are much richer, being brushed with ghee, folded and rolled again before being cooked and brushed with more ghee.

Unlike most of the rest of India, rice in the Punjab is for special occasions only or for making rice pudding.

Lunch in the fields will often consist of paratha and a curry made from onions fried with garlic, ginger, green chillies, cayenne, garam masala, tomatoes, turmeric and salt. Potatoes are stirred in and coated with the spices before adding water and cooking slowly.

Breads may also be served for dinner with small black beans and kidney beans cooked with onions, ginger, garlic and tomatoes and garnished with butter. Another favourite is paneer bhaji - tomatoes, chillies and ginger quickly fried with crumbled paneer added - or the same basic mixture with pureed spinach and cubes of paneer added. Paneer can also be dipped in chick pea flour batter and deep fried, making pakora. Mustard greens may be cooked very slowly with green chillies then when soft, pureed, thickened with cornmeal flour and added to fried onion, tomato and ginger and garnished with white butter.

For the non-vegetarians, there is tandoori chicken - whole chicken marinaded in yoghurt and spices, cut into pieces and cooked in a tandoor - or tikkas (kebabs) of chicken or cubed or minced meat mixed with spices, garlic and ginger.

Cheap fast food restaurants called dhabas are common in the Punjab and often have their own specialities - one may concentrate on paneer bhaji and another, tandoori chicken - but you can be sure that wherever you eat in the Punjab, you will be filled with nourishing, tasty food.

2006-02-04 Illustrations

Indian Tandoori Cooking

Sat, 04 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Traditionally, tandoori dishes are cooked in a tandoor, an oval shaped clay oven with a small fire in the bottom. The heat rises gradually but ultimately reaches a much higher temperature than a barbeque.

A tandoor is normally used to cook naan bread, meats and kebabs (meat or paneer). The bread is stuck to the sides, the kebabs stood vertically and whole chickens rested on a grid over the fire.

For domestic cooking, a tandoor is not really convenient but the meat dishes can be reproduced on a barbeque or in the oven. The bright red appearance of tandoori meats which you may see in Indian restaurants is produced by a food dye which really isn't necessary to enhance the look of your tandoori dishes.

I have a great fondness for tandoori style food. It has flavour, without being "hot" or high in calories or too filling. In fact it's an ideal dish summer or winter, if you fancy something a little different. As a bonus, it doesn't take hours to prepare. Of course you can take all the effort out of it and use a pre-prepared mix, but I think they have less flavour and you can't use them for anything else, whereas if you use the individual spices, you can make other dishes as well.

You can easily make tandoori chicken (whole), tandoori lamb chops (pork would be more unusual, but there's no reason why you shouldn't use it, if you prefer) and lamb tikka (kebabs) but my personal favourite is chicken tikka because it's so quick so here's my own recipe.

This recipe serves two people - multiply it for as many people as you want.

Ingredients

2 Chicken breasts

1 small tub Greek yogurt

1 tsp ground cumin

1 tsp ground coriander

½ tsp ground turmeric

½ tsp ginger powder

½ tsp chilli powder (or to taste)

1 small clove garlic, crushed

salt to taste

1 tbsp lemon juice

It began as most 'ethnic food movements' do - with small restaurants in the neighborhoods where immigrants settled, diners and lunchrooms and tea rooms opened by those who wanted to offer a taste of home to their fellow migres. Chinese, Italian, Middle Eastern, Thai - from family run bistros, the cuisine spread as those outside the cultures of the 'neighborhood' learned of the good food and the word spread.

The latest 'new cuisine' that is spreading like wildfire is Brazilian - a delicious blending of three separate cultures that comes together in dishes and delicacies that aren't found anywhere else in the world.

To understand the cuisine of Brazil, one must understand a little of its history. The base of Brazilian cuisine is in its native roots - the foods that sustained the native Brazilians - cassava, yams, fish and meat - but it bears the stamp of two other peoples as well: the Portuguese who came to conquer and stayed, and the African slaves that they brought with them to work the sugar plantations.

Brazilian cuisine today is a seamless amalgam of the three influences that interweave in a unique and totally Brazilian style.

The staples of the Brazilian diet are root vegetables, seafood and meat. Manioc, derived from cassava root, is the 'flour' of the region, and is eaten in one form or another at nearly every meal.

The bitter cassava root is poisonous in its raw state, but when prepared properly, the cassava root yields farinha and tapioca, bases for many dishes of the region.

The Portuguese influence shows in the rich, sweet egg breads that are served at nearly every meal, and in the seafood dishes that blend 'fruits de mer' with coconut and other native fruits and vegetables. The national dish, bobo de camarao is one of these, a delicious mingling of fresh shrimp in a puree of dried shrimp, manioc (cassava) meal, coconut milk and nuts, flavored with a palm oil called dende.

It is the African influence that is most felt, though - as is to be expected of the people who worked in the kitchens. Pineapple and coconut milk, shredded coconut and palm hearts worked their way into everyday dishes, flavoring meat, shrimp, fish, vegetables and bread.

Brazilian food, unlike the cuisines of many of the surrounding countries, favors the sweet rather than the hot, and more than any other South American cuisine, it carries the savor of tropical island breezes rather than the hot wind of the desert.

The most common ingredients in Brazilian cuisine are cassava, coconut, dende, black beans and rice.

Bacalao - salt cod - features in many dishes derived from the Portuguese, but flavored with typical Brazilian insouciance with coconut cream and pistachio nuts it becomes an entirely different food.

It is typical of the Brazilian attitude toward food - an expression of a warm and open people to whom feeding and sharing food is the basis of hospitality. Brazilian cuisine is like its people - all are welcome, all are welcomed and all make their mark - without ever overwhelming the contributions of the other.

2006-02-02 Illustrations

Cantonese Regional Cuisine

Thu, 02 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

Easily the most well-known of the Chinese regional cuisines, Cantonese cuisine comes from the region around Canton in Southern China. Simple spices and a wide variety of foods used in cooking characterize Cantonese cuisine. Of all the Chinese regions, Canton (Guangdong province) has the most available food resources. Its proximity to the sea offers a veritable marine cornucopia to be added to its dishes, making possible such delicate matings as Seven Happiness, a dish that includes shrimp, scallops, fish and lobster along with chicken, beef and pork. The light, delicate sauce, quick cooking and subtle spicing allows the natural flavors to shine through rather than being overwhelmed and blending together.

The spices used in Cantonese cooking tend to be light and simple: ginger, salt, soy sauce, white pepper, spring onion and rice wine. For many who are used to the more rich, spicy and complex flavors of Hunan and Szechwan cooking, Cantonese cooking may seem bland ? but the subtle blends of flavor and aroma are created by the hand of a master chef.

All Chinese cuisine takes far more into account than the flavor of a dish. Chinese cooking is a presentation of texture, color, shape and aroma with even the name of the dish contributing to its overall presentation. In true Oriental fashion, a meal is poetry, with every part of it contributing to the overall effect. Chinese courtesy demands that a guest be treated with honor, and to present a guest with anything less than perfection is the height of rudeness.

As an honor to guests, freshness is one of the ultimate ?ingredients? in Cantonese regional cooking. In many restaurants, guests can choose their meal from a seafood tank in the dining room. It?s not unusual for a patron to be brought a live fish or crab at the table as proof of the freshness of the meal about to be prepared. Vegetables are likewise fresh, crisp and sweet, and the quick cooking methods preserve each flavor separately to play against the others.

Light sauces with subtle seasonings bring out the natural sweetness of seafood ? but the Cantonese chef will only use the very freshest seafood in those dishes. For ?stale? seafood, Cantonese cuisine offers thick, spicy sauces meant to mask the characteristic odor of fish. Pungent/sweet dishes like sweet and sour butterfly shrimp might be served this way.

There are few Cantonese desserts that are indigenous to the region, though many restaurants serve a mango based pudding or tapioca. Most meals are served with plain boiled rice, and accompanied by either tea or rice wine.

Wherever in the world you are, you?re likely to find restaurants that serve Cantonese cuisine. It has been carried across the world by emigrants from the Quangdong province, and its light, delicate flavors are easy on the Western palate. To truly appreciate it though, takes more than the taste buds. Cantonese cuisine is a treat for the eyes and the nose as much as for the mouth. Appreciate it.

2006-02-02 Illustrations

British Cuisine

Thu, 02 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

British cuisine has always suffered from bad press. The simple homespun fare and plain preparation of most traditional British foods pales when compared to French haute cuisine, and it's not uncommon for food critics to sound almost apologetic when writing about traditional British dishes as if there were something shameful in enjoying a good, thick joint of beef with an accompaniment of Yorkshire pudding. If they speak in glowing terms of anything at all, it is a nod to the clever naming of British foods, where dishes like bubble and squeak and spotted dick appear on restaurant menus.

And yet, for all the snickering and apologetic references, British cuisine at its best is hearty, delicious, simple fare on which to fuel the nation that influenced the entire world. There is no other nation in the world that does a roast of beef to such perfection, nor any better accompaniment to the succulent meat than a puffed, piping hot Yorkshire pudding prepared in its drippings, and few cuisines have a dessert that can compare with the pure heaven that is a well made trifle or treacle tart.

Wed, 01 Feb 2006 06:00:00 GMT

When considering the daunting task of preparing and designing the wedding floral arrangements on your own, take the time to fully consider all of the responsibilities that will come with such a task. You may be able to find a relative or member of the bridal party who would be willing to help you assemble your floral arrangements and bouquets. Once the wedding has been arranged, the wedding flowers chosen and the arrangements decided upon, it's time to find the source of flowers in the locality. Fresh flowers, silk flowers, dried flowers and preserved flower arrangements alike require special preparations and planning. But armed with a few basics about flowers, the arrangements you choose will land you a bevy of compliments and queries. Now that you are planning your wedding, you've got to choose bouquets, boutonnieres, centerpieces, church arrangements, and a stunning corsages important people who will attend the ceremony.. Somehow, you'll have to make the arrangements for all this, and at a cost that will likely be between 10 and 15 percent of your overall wedding budget. The arrangements should reflect your style and personality and color scheme of your wedding. Whether your budget allows for altar and pew pieces, centerpieces or flowers for your cake, whatever arrangements you order, your bridal bouquet and the groom's boutonniere should be the crown jewels. In addition to flowers for the wedding party and family members, you will need flowers for the church, arrangements for the reception tables, head table, and guest book table. Your florist will also have pictures of flowers, bouquets and arrangements to help determine exactly what will create the wedding of your dreams. Several of these pictures can be small bouquet for flower girl, ceremony arrangements (can serve double duty at your reception perhaps at your buffet), vase at Guest Book Table, centerpieces for Reception Tables, centerpiece for Head Table (usually larger than other centerpieces) and Flowers or Petals for Cake Table (Flowers for Cake if necessary). Planning Planning for wedding flowers can be a lot of fun for bridal party who might come up with innovative ideas that you might not have thought about. Get advice on your wedding from planning to the latest hot trends in wedding bouquets and flower designs. Once you have selected your florist, schedule planning meetings at the ceremony and reception locations to determine the wedding flowers you'll use and their placement (or provide photos so that the florist will have an idea of what the locations look like). Consider your wedding facility as a blank canvas upon which your florist will create his/her work of art. Wedding Flowers can be classified into spring, Summer, Summer, Autumn, Winter and Anytime categories. Spring Popular spring colors are lavenders, baby blues, soft greens and pale yellows. Flowering trees offer more spring wedding flower choices. Wedding Flowers in spring to select from are tulips, violets, greenery, daffodils, lilacs, lilies and lily of the valley, fern, pansies, peonies, ivy, dogwoods, larkspur, tasty peas, irises, forsythia branches, hyacinth, apple or cherry blossoms. As pink is such a soft color, it would look lovely in both a spring wedding summer bouquet, as well as a summer wedding bouquet. Wedding Flowers provides detailed information about wedding flowers, fall wedding flowers, silk wedding flowers, spring wedding flowers and more. For example, tulips for a spring wedding would be much less expensive then tulips in December. Summer Summer is one of the best times to get married as the flower range you can choose from are colorful, hearty blooms from the lily, orchid, daisy, and dahlia families that makes your wedding come alive with warmth and grace. Choose summer wedding flowers that are white, full of color, airy, or solid, It does not matter which of these flowers you select as each of these summer flowers is bursting with decorating potential. If you are planning a warm-weather wedding, be sure to stick with flowers that can withstand heat and high humidity. Winter While other times of year, like fall, spring and even the winter season, have been gaining increasing popularity as the perfect time for hosting a wedding, the summer season always has been, and probably always will be, the most preferred time to host the perfect wedding. Even though fewer weddings are held in winter, that does not mean that the bride is faced with a limited choice. A winter wedding flower can be any type of flower that highlights the warm tones of the festivals set against the snow-white backdrop. There are many wonderful winter wedding flowers on the market, and this may help to account for why winter weddings are becoming so popular. It is important to start the search for the perfect winter wedding flowers long before winter sets in, however, as it can take quite some time to find the perfect supplier for your all important wedding flowers. Marrying in the Autumn or Winter does not mean that you need to be restricted when it comes to choosing floral arrangements. There is quite a chasm between Autumnal flowers and Winter flowers in terms of colour, style and fragrance. Fall Like all other seasonal weddings, fall weddings have their popular flower choices. To highlight the texture of the fall season, dry grasses like rye and wheat can be used in the bouquet. Dahlia — a late summer and fall bloom known for its wide variety of colors. There are many important considerations for those planning a fall wedding, but finding the right fall wedding flowers is one of the most important of those considerations. It can be difficult to find just the right fall wedding flowers, and it is important for wedding planners to start shopping for those flowers as early as possible. Planning a fall wedding can be a great deal of fun, and the selection of autumn wedding flowers is certainly one of the most beautiful parts of a successful fall wedding.

2006-02-01 Illustrations